JP2016158947A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To appropriately cope with vibration occurring when operating operation means, such as a performance button unit.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: an operation member 2000 operable by a player; a support member 2059 for supporting the operation member 2000 so as to be displaced from a first position to a second position; and a performance component holding member 2095 that is provided in the support member 2059 and holds a performance component 2113 for executing a predetermined performance. The performance component holding member 2059 is provided in the support member 2095 via a vibration transmission prevention member 2105.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 7

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with operation means that can be operated by a player.

Conventionally known as this type of gaming machine is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot gaming machine in which a player plays a predetermined game using a gaming medium such as a game ball or medal. .
In such a gaming machine, there is one that performs a predetermined effect by displaying an effect image on an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device in order to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document 1)
The gaming machine includes an effect button unit having an effect button as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the displayed effect image can be changed by operating the effect button. . The player can participate in the game directly by changing the effect by operating the effect button by the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In addition, an electronic component such as an LED board is mounted on the effect button unit itself, and the effect button unit itself also performs an effect when the LED emits light.

JP 2011-229597 A

However, in a gaming machine equipped with this type of effect button unit, the effect button may be pressed frequently and powerfully to change the effect image. In particular, in the case of a player who has become hot in the game / production, the frequency and power of pressing the production buttons are large (strong).
For this reason, the effect button unit itself frequently vibrates, and this vibration may adversely affect electronic components inside the effect button unit.
In addition, when vibration frequently occurs, various members constituting the effect button unit are frequently brought into contact by the vibration, which causes damage to the effect button unit.
The present invention has been made to solve such problems of the prior art, and the problem is to appropriately deal with vibrations that occur when operating operation means such as a production button unit. There is.

In order to achieve such an object, the first invention includes an operation member (button cover 2001, button base 2013) 2000 operable by a player,
A support member (unit base) 2059 that displaceably supports the operation member 2000 from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011;
An effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 that is provided on the support member 2059 and holds an effect component (louver 2117, electrical decoration board 2183) 2113 for executing a predetermined effect,
The effect component holding member 2059 is a gaming machine that is provided to the support member 2095 via a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105.

  According to the first invention, the vibration generated by the player's operation on the operation member 2000 is prevented from being transmitted by the vibration transmission preventing member 2105, so that the effect component (louver 2117) for executing a predetermined effect is provided. It is possible to prevent the vibration of the electric decoration board 2183) 2113.

According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect, when the operation member 2000 is displaced from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011, a decorative member 2041 having a first opening 2043 that can be inserted and moved;
A second side that is provided on the back side of the decorative member 2041 so as to communicate with the first opening 2043 and that can be inserted and moved when the operation member 2000 is displaced from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011. A cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 having an opening 2053;
The opening diameter of the second opening portion 2053 is smaller than the opening diameter of the first opening portion 2043.

  According to the second invention, when the operation member 2000 reciprocates between the first position 2009 and the second position 2011 by the player's operation of the operation member, the operation member 2000 is the second member of the cover member 2051. Although it contacts the opening 2053 but does not contact the decorative member 2041, the decorative member 2041 is not scraped off due to wear or the like, so that the decorative property is not deteriorated or damaged, and the durability of the decorative member 2041 is improved. To do.

  According to a third invention, in the second invention, the cover member 2051 is a gaming machine characterized in that at least a peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 is formed of a self-lubricating material.

According to the third aspect of the invention, even if the operation member 2000 swings in the horizontal direction and contacts the cover member, at least the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 of the cover member 2051 that contacts the operation member 2000 Is made of a self-lubricating material and is excellent in slidability, so that the operation member 2000 can be prevented from being damaged.
In addition, when the operation member 2000, the cover member 2051, or the decorative member 2041 is damaged due to contact when the operation member 2000 is moved and the shavings or the like are generated, the shavings or the like enter the interior, and the electric decoration board 2183. However, according to the present invention, since such a problem cannot occur, safety is improved.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately deal with vibrations generated when operating an operation means such as a production button unit, and to prevent the production parts and the like from being affected by vibrations. It is also possible to suppress damage to the operation member.

It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the gaming machine concerning the first embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a schematic front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic perspective view of the operation unit which is the principal part in 1st embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic perspective view of an operation unit in which a button cover, a decorative member, a button cover receiver, an inner decoration, and a louver press are removed and a louver blade can be visually recognized. FIG. 4B is a schematic perspective view of the operation unit in which the louver blade is further removed from the state of FIG. 4A so that the inner lens can be visually recognized. It is a partial expansion perspective view which expands and shows the axial support part of a louver. FIG. 4 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 3. 3A and 3B are schematic longitudinal sectional views of the operation unit shown in FIG. 3, in which FIG. 3A shows a state when the first position is not pressed, FIG. 3B shows a state when the second position is pressed, and FIG. (A) It is an enlarged view of the area | region enclosed with the dashed-dotted line. It is a schematic partial expanded sectional view which shows the connection state of a decoration member and a unit base while showing the positional relationship of a decoration member, a cover receptacle, and a button cover. It is a schematic sectional drawing which expands and shows partially. It is a schematic sectional drawing which shows the motion of a louver. It is a schematic perspective view of a movable production | presentation part, (a) shows the state of the position before displacement (1st specific position) where the louver is closed, (b) is the position after displacement (2nd specific position) where the louver is open. Shows the state. It is a schematic bottom view of the state where the production component holding member provided with the production component is viewed from the back side, (a) shows the state of the pre-displacement position (first specific position) where the louver is closed, and (b) shows the louver. The state of the open post-displacement position (second specific position) is shown. It is a schematic perspective view of the state which looked at the production | presentation component holding member provided with production | presentation part from the back side, (a) shows the state of the pre-displacement position (1st specific position) in which the louver is closed, (b) The state of the open post-displacement position (second specific position) is shown. It is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view of the effect component holding member provided with effect components. It is the schematic which shows a press detection sensor. It is a schematic perspective view of the operation unit which is the principal part in 2nd embodiment of this invention. FIG. 16 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 15, showing a state before the displacement (first specific position) where the shutter is closed. FIG. 16 is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 15, illustrating a state at a post-displacement position where the shutter is opened. It is a block diagram of the operation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic exploded perspective view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 15. In the operation unit shown in FIG. 15, (a) is a schematic plan view, and (b) is a schematic longitudinal sectional view. 15A is a schematic longitudinal sectional view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 15, in which FIG. 15A shows a state where the operation member is located at a first position in a non-pressed state, and FIG. Indicates the state of It is the schematic which shows the opening / closing mechanism of a shutter, (a) shows the 2nd position which is an open state, (b) shows the 1st position which is a closed state. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the opening / closing mechanism of a shutter, (a) shows the 1st position which is a closed state, (b) shows the 2nd position which is an open state. It is a partial expansion schematic diagram showing a press detection sensor. It is a figure which shows roughly one Embodiment of the production | presentation state in the production | presentation components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically other embodiment of the production | presentation state in the performance components of 2nd embodiment. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the gaming machine concerning a third embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a schematic front view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, it is a front view showing a state in which a game board, a light guide plate, a cell sheet and a back box are visible. It is a schematic front view of a game board, showing a state in which a third movable effect character is visible. It is a schematic front view of a back box, and is a schematic front view which shows the state where the 3rd movable production | presentation actor is visible. It is a schematic front view of a back box. It is the schematic rear view which looked at the game board from the back side in the state which removed the back box. It is a schematic perspective view of the state in which the display device is separated as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic longitudinal perspective view of a state in which a light guide plate is disposed on the back side of the game board in a longitudinal section. It is a schematic sectional drawing of a channel | path member. It is a schematic division | segmentation perspective view of a channel | path member. It is a schematic front view which shows the state by which the decoration member used as a board | substrate concealment is given to the light-guide plate. It is a schematic front view of a light-guide plate. It is a schematic rear view of a light-guide plate. It is a schematic side view of a light guide plate shown partially omitted. It is a schematic front view which shows the state where the predetermined light emission effect is given to the area | region shown with the oblique line of the light-guide plate by light emission of some LED of an upper left board | substrate. It is a schematic front view which shows the state by which the left side area | region of a light-guide plate is light emission effect displayed by FIG. It is a schematic front view which shows the state by which predetermined | prescribed light emission effect is given to the area | region shown with the oblique line of the light-guide plate by light emission of LED of upper middle board | substrate and some LED of an upper left board | substrate. It is a schematic front view which shows the state by which the center area | region of a light-guide plate is light emission effect display by FIG. It is a schematic front view which shows the state by which predetermined light emission effect is given to the area | region shown with the oblique line of the light-guide plate by light emission of LED of an upper right board | substrate. It is a schematic front view which shows the state by which the right side area of a light-guide plate is light-emitting effect display by FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view showing a state where a predetermined light emission effect is applied to a region indicated by oblique lines of a light guide plate by light emission of LEDs of a left upper substrate, a left middle substrate, and a left lower substrate. FIG. 62 is a schematic front view showing a state where the entire region of the light guide plate is displayed as a light emission effect according to FIG. 62. (A) thru | or (c) is the schematic which shows the display state of the light emission effect of FIG. It is a schematic front view which shows the state where the predetermined light emission effect is given to the area | region shown with the oblique line of the light-guide plate by light emission of LED of a left upper board | substrate. FIG. 66 is a schematic front view showing a state where the upper region of the light guide plate is displayed as a light emission effect according to FIG. 65. (A) is a schematic exploded perspective view of the light guide plate, cell sheet and game board, (b) is a schematic front view showing that only the design of the cell sheet is visible when the light guide plate is turned off, and (c) is a guide. It is a schematic front view which shows that one new design is displayed by overlapping the design of a light guide plate on the design of a cell sheet at the time of lighting of a light board. It is a schematic exploded perspective view of the 1st light emission production | presentation means. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the 1st light emission production | presentation means from the back side. It is a general | schematic longitudinal side view of a 1st light emission production | presentation means. It is a schematic sectional drawing which abbreviate | omits and shows the light emission state of a 1st light emission production | presentation means. It is a schematic exploded perspective view of the 2nd light emission production | presentation means. It is a schematic exploded perspective view of the 3rd light emission production | presentation means. It is a schematic back view of the lens member of the 3rd light emission production | presentation means. (A) thru | or (e) is a schematic front view which shows the light emission state of a 3rd light emission production | presentation means. (A) thru | or (e) is a schematic front view which shows the state which looked at the light emission state of the 3rd light emission production | presentation means from the decoration member (decoration lens member) side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the state which has the 1st movable production | presentation thing in the appearance position where it is easy to visually recognize, and is performing predetermined light emission production from the game board side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the state which the 1st movable production | presentation thing exists in the appearance position where it is easy to visually recognize, and is moving forward toward diagonally upward from the game board side. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of the state seen from the surface side of the 1st movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic perspective view which abbreviate | omits a part in the state seen from the surface side of the 1st movable production | presentation actor, and shows a part with a virtual line. It is a schematic perspective view of the state seen from the back side of the 1st movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic perspective view of the state seen from the back side which shows the state which the 3rd gear has meshed | engaged with the 1st gear, the 2nd gear, and the 3rd gear which comprise a 1st movable production | presentation actor. The first gear, the second gear, and the third gear that constitute the first movable director, and the region that does not have the gear teeth of the third gear does not have the gear teeth of the first gear. It is a schematic perspective view of the state seen from the back side which shows the state which is moving in contact with the area | region. It is a schematic front view which shows the state located in the initial state of a 2nd movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic back view which abbreviate | omits a back decoration member and shows the state located in the initial state of a 2nd movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic back view which abbreviate | omits a back decoration member and shows the state which turned to the appearance state of the 2nd movable production | presentation actor. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of the 2nd movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic perspective view showing the transmission mechanism of the 2nd movable production actor. It is the schematic front view which looked at the state in which the 2nd movable production | presentation thing exists in an appearance position from the game board side. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the state which equips a back box with the 2nd movable production | presentation character accommodation part, and has a 2nd movable production | presentation character in an appearance position. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of a 3rd movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic front view of a 3rd movable effect combination. It is a schematic sectional drawing which expands and shows the light emission state of the 3rd movable production | presentation actor partially. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the connection state of the 1st movable part and 2nd movable part which comprise a 3rd movable production | presentation actor from the back side. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the isolation | separation state of the 1st movable part and 2nd movable part which comprise a 3rd movable production | presentation actor from the back side, and shows a partially expanded second locking member. It is a schematic plan view which shows the state where the width | variety of the front-back direction of the recessed part provided in the 2nd latching member becomes narrow as it goes to the back | inner side from the front end side. Schematic rear view showing the connection state of the first combination movable director and the second combination movable director that constitute the third movable director, and showing that the third movable director is in the initial position FIG. Schematic rear view showing the separation state of the first combination movable director and the second combination movable director, which constitute the third movable director, and showing that the third movable director is in the appearance position FIG. It is the schematic front view of the state which looked at the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment from the game board side. It is a schematic perspective view of the state which looked at the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment from the back box side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the state which has a 4th movable production | presentation thing in an appearance position from the game board side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the state in which the 4th movable production | presentation actor and the 5th movable production | presentation actor are in an appearance position, respectively from the game board side. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of a 4th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the state which removed the front base of the 4th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic operation | movement figure of the state which looked at the 4th movable production | presentation actor from the back side, (a) shows the state before moving, (b) is a schematic back view which shows a movable state. It is the schematic perspective view which removed the guide base of the movable member which comprises the 4th movable production | presentation actor, and looked at the arrangement | positioning state of a transmission mechanism part and a protrusion member from the back side. It is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the assembly state from the decoration member of the movable member which comprises a 4th movable production | presentation actor to a guide base. It is a schematic back view which shows that the protrusion member which comprises a 4th movable production | presentation actor exists in an appearance position on the cyclic | annular guide surface of a guide base. It is the schematic rear view seen from the guide base side which shows that the protrusion member which comprises the 4th movable production | presentation thing exists in the initial position on the cyclic | annular guide surface of a guide base. It is a schematic front view which shows the light emission means in the movable member which comprises a 4th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic sectional drawing which expands and shows the light emission state of a 4th movable production | presentation actor partially. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which is a 5th movable production | presentation actor and is in an initial position. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which is a 5th movable production | presentation character and exists in an appearance position. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of the movable body which comprises the 5th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic front view of the lens member which comprises a movable body. It is a movable body which comprises the 5th movable production | presentation actor, and is a schematic front view when the light emission means is extinguished. It is a movable body which comprises the 5th movable production | presentation actor, and is a schematic front view when a light emission means is at the time of lighting. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view which shows the other form of a 4th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic perspective view which abbreviate | omits and shows an LED board, a board | substrate cover, and a decoration member about the other form of the 4th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which is another form of a 5th movable production | presentation actor, and exists in an initial position. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which is another form of a 5th movable production | presentation actor, and exists in an appearance position. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of the movable body in the other form of the 5th movable production | presentation actor. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the 6th movable production actor from the front side. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of a 6th movable production | presentation actor. It is the schematic back view which removed the mechanism base and looked at the state before the drive of the 6th movable production | presentation actor from the back side. It is the schematic rear view which removed the mechanism base and looked at the state which the 6th movable production | presentation thing goes up and exists in an appearance position from the back side. It is the schematic back view which removed the mechanism base and saw the state which pulled down slightly after the 6th movable production | presentation thing rose from the back side. It is a schematic rear view which expands partially and shows the state where the extrusion member of the back-and-forth link mechanism of the sixth movable effect role is pressing the decorative member. It is a schematic front view of the state which looked at the state which has a 7th movable production | presentation character in an appearance position from the game board side. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of the state which looked at the 7th movable production | presentation actor from the back side. It is a schematic back view of the 7th movable production | presentation actor. It is a schematic back view which shows the state (state which became the appearance position) where the 7th movable production | presentation actor rose. It is a general | schematic disassembled perspective view of the state which looked at the 8th movable production | presentation actor from the front side. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which has an 8th movable production character in an initial position. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which has an 8th movable production | presentation actor in an appearance position. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the big winning opening in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a schematic perspective view of the 4th light emission production | presentation means. It is a schematic perspective view of the 5th light emission production | presentation means. It is a schematic perspective view of the 6th light emission production | presentation means. In the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, in the configuration of the back surface of the front frame, it is a rear view showing a state where a part of the launching device provided in the main body frame is visible. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the cover member with a wiring holding function shown by FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of the surface of a main body frame. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the back surface of a main body frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the surface of the game board which can be attached or detached to the back surface (refer FIG. 144) of a main body frame. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the back surface of the game board which can be attached or detached to the back surface (refer FIG. 144) of a main body frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the surface of a rear frame. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the back surface of a rear frame. 147 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state where the dispensing device case shown in FIG. 147 is maintained in a posture in which the dispensing device is exposed. FIG. FIG. 149 is a partially enlarged perspective view illustrating a configuration for maintaining the dispensing device case in the posture illustrated in FIG. 148. It is a front view which partially enlarges and shows the state in which the payout device is set at a position where game balls can be paid out. It is a front view which partially enlarges and shows the state by which the dispensing device is set in the position which can be removed. (A) is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the main structure of the ball drop prevention mechanism, and (b) is a state in which the ball stopper of the ball drop prevention mechanism has entered the ball passage (outflow of game balls (C) is a partially enlarged view showing a state where the ball stopper of the ball drop preventing mechanism is avoided from the ball passage (a state in which a game ball can be paid out). is there. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows one Embodiment of a transparent plate unit. It is a front view of a transparent plate unit. It is a vertical side view of a transparent plate unit. It is a schematic rear view which expands and shows the bulb | ball channel | path part which connects a discharge port and a supply port on the back surface of a front frame. It is a schematic longitudinal cross-sectional side view which expands and shows the communication state of a discharge port, a supply port, and a ball path. An enlarged view of a state in which the locking claw portion of the lower plate cover is locked in the locking hole of the front frame base plate, and the holding portion provided integrally with the ball passage cover (lower cover) is disposed directly below the locking claw portion. It is a partial expanded sectional view. It is a schematic front view which shows one Embodiment of the positional relationship of the plating part of a top dish front decoration, and the left side decoration member. A state in which the plated portion of the upper plate front decoration is arranged close to the connector provided on the left relay board of the left decorative member, and the left light guide lens provided with the connector cover is arranged between the plated portion and the connector It is a schematic bottom view which shows. The schematic perspective view which shows a left relay board | substrate and a left light guide lens. (A) is the schematic which shows the flow of the static electricity in this embodiment which took long creepage distance, (b) is the schematic which shows the flow of the static electricity in the comparative example with a short creepage distance. It is a partial enlarged front view showing one embodiment of a launching device. It is an enlarged front view of a firing handle. It is a schematic front view of the state which removed the handle cap from the firing handle. 165 is a schematic front view of a state in which the handle lever is removed from the state of FIG. 165 and the launch stop button is pressed to restrict the launch of the game ball. FIG. 165 is a schematic front view of a state in which the handle lever is removed from the state of FIG. 165 and the release to the launch stop button is released and a game ball can be launched. FIG. It is a schematic perspective view of a firing stop button. The outline of the axial stop part of a firing stop button is expanded and shown, (a) is a schematic vertical front view, and (b) is a schematic exploded front view. It is a schematic longitudinal side view which shows one Embodiment of an electrical component accommodating member and a wiring holding member. It is a partial schematic vertical side view which expands and shows the state by which the wiring holding member is detachably attached to the 2nd surface part of the electrical component accommodating member. It is a schematic rear view of a wiring holding member. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the wiring holding member from the front direction. It is a side view which shows the structure of an operation unit. 174 is a plan view of the operation unit shown in FIG. 174 as viewed from above. FIG. It is a figure which decomposes | disassembles and shows the structure of an operation unit. It is a top view which shows the arrangement configuration of the sensor for detecting the rotation operation state of an operation unit. 179 is a perspective view showing an arrangement configuration of detection pieces (detection members) detected by the sensor shown in FIG. 177 when detecting the rotation operation state of the operation unit. FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and partially shows the arrangement configuration of the spherical member for improving the rotation property of the operation unit. 179 is a perspective view showing an arrangement configuration of rolling surfaces on which the spherical member shown in FIG. 179 can roll. FIG. It is a top view which shows the state by which the operation unit was detachably fixed to the upper plate | pan upper cover. It is a rear view for demonstrating the process which inserts and attaches an operation unit to the hole for attachment penetratingly formed in the top plate upper cover. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the structure of the right side decoration member provided with the pressing member. It is a perspective view which expands partially and shows the state where the side surface near the end surface of the light guide plate is positioned and fixed by the pressing member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows partially the state by which the wiring of the light emission board | substrate is hold | maintained by the pressing member. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration of a right decorative member according to another configuration in which the pressing member shown in FIGS. 183 to 185 is reused as it is. FIG. 10 is a bottom view showing a state in which a series of front reflection surface portions are formed by the first and second movable decorative members in the patrol lamp accessory. FIG. 10 is a bottom view showing a state in which a series of rear reflecting surface portions are formed by the first and second movable decorative members in the patrol lamp accessory. It is a top view which shows the structure of the drive mechanism for moving the 1st and 2nd movable decoration member. 189 is an enlarged view showing a configuration of a rack applied to the drive mechanism of FIG. 188; FIG.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the gaming machines according to the present invention are intended for general pachinko gaming machines and pachislot gaming machines including sealed pachinko gaming machines, but in the present embodiment, pachinko gaming machines of the form shown in the drawings are assumed. .
FIGS. 1 to 14 are the first embodiment, FIGS. 15 to 40 are the second embodiment, FIGS. 41 to 98 are the third embodiment, FIGS. 99 to 139 are the fourth embodiment, and FIGS. Each of the fifth embodiments is shown.
In addition, in the schematic perspective view of the whole gaming machine in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1 and the schematic front view of the whole gaming machine in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, Since it is common, it is used as it is. In the schematic perspective view of the entire gaming machine in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 41 and the front view of the entire gaming machine in the third embodiment shown in FIG. Since it is common in five embodiments, it is used as it is.
It is also possible to provide a gaming machine having a new configuration by combining the configuration of the first embodiment or the second embodiment with any of the third embodiment to the fifth embodiment, and is within the scope of the present invention.
"First embodiment"

<Schematic configuration of the entire gaming machine>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is surrounded by guide rails (outer rails, inner rails) (not shown), and has a rolling area (not shown) in which game balls launched through the launching device 26 can flow down. A main body frame 2 having a board and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be visually recognized are provided, and can be rotated by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (player side). Attached to the front frame 3 supported on the back side of the game board and detachably attached to the light guide plate (not shown) for emitting and displaying a predetermined image, and detachably attached to the rear frame (not shown), A display device (not shown) such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) whose display mode is controlled by a sub-control board based on a command from the main control board, and a back side of the light guide plate are provided. Objects (movable effect won game, emission effect combination thereof, etc.) is attached to the back box (not shown) was disposed.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6, and in this state, the main body frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. It is rotatably supported. In the present embodiment, the main body frame 2 includes a speaker 10c.

  The table frame 3 includes various table frame components. The table frame components include a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8 (an upper plate 17, a lower plate 18), an operation unit 9, speakers 10a and 10b, light There are various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like that produce effects according to the above. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained.

  The rear frame includes a ball tank 47 for storing game balls to be paid out as, for example, rental balls and prize balls, and a rail unit (not shown) that continuously rolls down a plurality of game balls from the ball tank 47. ), A payout device (not shown) that can be connected to the lower end of the rail unit, and a ball payout passage (not shown) that supplies game balls paid out from the payout device to the upper plate 17. It is installed.

In this embodiment, since it has a characteristic structure in the operation unit 9 provided in the upper plate 17 for storing a lending ball and a prize ball, it demonstrates below focusing on the characteristic part.
Note that other configurations such as a game board, a light guide plate, a display device, and a back box are not particularly limited, and various configurations can be employed within the scope of the present invention. . It is also possible not to employ a light guide plate or a back box. Needless to say, the configurations of the third to fifth embodiments described later can be employed.

<Schematic configuration of operation unit>
FIG. 3 is an overall schematic perspective view of the operation unit 9 of the present embodiment. The operation unit 9 of the present embodiment has an operation member 2000 as an operation means that can be operated by a player. By performing the operation, the player can directly participate in the game and change the effect image displayed on the display device (effect device) such as a liquid crystal display.

  The operation unit 9 includes an operation member (button cover 2001, button base 2013) 2000 that can be operated by the player, and the operation member 2000 from a first position (for example, a pre-pressing position shown in FIG. 6A) 2009 to a second position. Provided between a support member (unit base) 2057 that is displaceably supported at a position (for example, a position after pressing shown in FIG. 6B) 2011, and between the operation member 2000 and the support member 2057, the operation member A vibration absorbing member (shock absorbing cover 2089, elastic member 2093) 2087 capable of absorbing vibration generated based on the displacement of 2000 to the second position 2011 and the support member 2057, and performing a predetermined effect. Production component holding member (louver) that holds production components (louver 2117, electrical decoration board 2183, etc.) 2113 It is composed of a over scan) 2095.

In this embodiment, the operation member 2000 includes a button cover 2001 and a button base 2013 that are formed separately and integrated by screwing.
In the present embodiment, the button cover 2001 and the button base 2013 are described as separately formed. However, the button cover 2001 and the button base 2013 may be integrally formed. It is possible to select and adopt appropriately within the range.

The button cover 2001 has a dome-shaped top surface (pressing surface) 2005 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and has a pressing portion 2003 formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with the bottom surface opened, and a lower end of the pressing portion 2003. It is composed of a plurality of connecting piece portions 2007 formed in a projecting manner from the edge in the horizontal direction.
For the button cover 2001, it is preferable to select a material that has translucency and is excellent in strength that can withstand repeated pressing (pressing) operations by the player. For example, polycarbonate, acrylic resin, etc. are assumed. The
The connecting piece 2007 is detachably screwed and fixed to a connecting receiving portion 2017 of the button base 2013 to be described later, and the button cover 2001 and the button base 2013 are integrated.

  The button cover 2001 is entirely formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency in the present embodiment, but it is sufficient that at least a portion capable of expressing an effect by an effect member described later has translucency, The design can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment.

  The button base 2013 includes a hollow first tube portion 2015 provided with a connection receiving portion 2017 at a predetermined position on the upper end facing the connection piece portion 2007 of the button cover 2001, and a diameter smaller than that of the first tube portion 2015. It is formed of a second cylindrical portion 2021 that is integrally formed in a hollow continuous with the one cylindrical portion 2015. The upper portion of the first cylindrical portion 2015 is opened, and the lower portion of the second cylindrical portion 2021 is closed with a bottom portion. ing. Three guide pins (leg portions) 2023 are suspended from the outer surface of the bottom portion of the second cylindrical portion 2021.

In this embodiment, the connection receiving part 2017 is provided with three connection receiving parts 2017 at a position that is evenly separated in the circumferential direction, for example, every 120 degrees. Further, a relief recess 2019 cut out in a predetermined area is formed between the connection receiving portions 2017 adjacent in the circumferential direction at the upper end of the first cylindrical portion 2015.
In the escape recess 2019, a connecting piece 2099 of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 is positioned so as to protrude.
When the connecting piece 2099 is attached and fixed to the upper end surface of a support member (unit base) 2057 positioned outside the button base 2013, the escape recess 2019 moves up and down in the vertical direction. Is recessed so as not to interfere.

  The guide pin 2023 is inserted into a second through-hole portion 2075 formed on the bottom surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 via an elastic member (coil spring) 2025 and a guide bush 2027.

  In the button base 2013, a rendering component holding member (louver base) 2095 that holds a predetermined rendering component is housed in a substantially suspended manner while being supported by a support member (unit base) 2057.

  In the present embodiment, a vibration motor unit 2029 is provided on the bottom inner surface of the button base 2013.

The vibration motor unit 2029 includes a vibration motor 2031 and a motor cover member 2033 that is detachably fixed to the bottom inner bottom surface of the button base 2013 so as to cover the vibration motor 2031. The operation member 2000 is forcibly vibrated to improve the player's interests when performing the above-described effects.
Further, in this embodiment, the motor cover member 2033 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency from the viewpoint of attachment and maintenance.

  The button base 2013 is integrally formed of a black synthetic resin material in the present embodiment, and the operation member 2000 is displaced by a press detection sensor 2035 described later on the bottom outer surface of the second cylindrical portion 2021. A detection piece 2039 for detection is integrally projected in a plate shape. In the present embodiment, the detection piece 2039 is integrally formed with the button base 2013. However, it is within the scope of the present invention even if the detection piece 2039 is formed separately and then retrofitted.

The button base 2013 can be displaced in the vertical direction from the first position (position before pressing) 2009 to the second position (position after pressing) 2011 integrally with the button cover 2001 as the operation member 2000, and the displacement position is detected. Therefore, the movement of the detection piece 2039 is detected by the press detection sensor 2035.
The press detection sensor 2035 is assumed to be a general photo sensor, for example, and in this embodiment, a detection region facing the opening of a detection piece part in / out hole part 2077 formed in a bottom part of a support member (unit base) 2057 to be described later. The support member (unit base) 2057 is attached and fixed to the outer surface of the bottom so that 2037 is positioned.
Thus, in order to accurately detect the movement of the detection piece 2039 by the press detection sensor 2035, the whole including the detection piece 2039 is formed in black. In the present embodiment, the whole is integrally molded with a black synthetic resin material from the viewpoint of ease of molding, but at least the detection piece 2039 only needs to be formed in black. The portions other than the detection piece 2039 are formed of a light-transmitting member, so that the attachment / maintenance can be improved.

  A decorative member 2041 is disposed around the button cover 2001 so as to give a predetermined decoration around the pressing portion 2003.

  The decorative member 2041 has a first opening portion having an inner diameter R1 larger than the outer diameter R3 of the pressing portion 2003 so that the cylindrical pressing portion 2003 of the button cover 2001 constituting the operation member 2000 can be inserted and moved. It has 2043 on the top surface and is formed in a substantially annular dome shape, and a predetermined decoration is applied on the surface side. In the present embodiment, the surface of the decorative member 2041 is plated to improve the decorativeness.

  The decorative member 2041 is provided on the back side so as to communicate with the first opening 2043. When the operation member 2000 is displaced from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011, the button cover of the operation member 2000 is provided. A first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 having a second opening 2053 through which 2001 (pressing part 2003) can be inserted and moved is provided.

  The decorative member 2041 accommodates the first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 inward, and is detachably screwed to the support member (unit base) 2057 in a state of being detachably integrated via screws or the like. It is fixed.

The first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 is formed in a substantially annular dome shape having a size that can be accommodated in the inner region of the decorative member 2041, and has a top surface side opening (second opening portion 2053). The inner diameter R2 is smaller than the inner diameter R1 of the first opening 2043 of the decorative member 2041.
The inner bottom edge portion of the opening of the first cover member 2051 is positioned so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the connecting piece portion 2007 in the button cover 2001.

According to this embodiment, the inner diameter R1 of the first opening 2043 is larger than the inner diameter R2 of the second opening 2053, and the inner diameter R2 of the second opening 2053 is the pressing part 2003 of the button cover 2001. The outer diameter R3 is larger than the outer diameter R3 (having a relationship of R1>R2> R3).
With this configuration, when the operation member 2000 (pressing portion 2003) is reciprocated between the first position and the second position and displaced by the operation of the operation member 2000 by the player, the operation member 2000, the side surface of the pressing portion 2003 can come into contact with the second opening 2053 of the first cover member 2051, but does not come into contact with the first opening 2043 of the decorative member 2041, so that the decorative member 2041 is scraped due to wear or the like. As a result, the durability of the decorative member 2041 is improved without deteriorating the decorative property or causing damage.

Further, it is preferable that the first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051 has at least a peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 formed of a self-lubricating material.
For example, the entire first cover member 2051 is formed of a self-lubricating material having excellent slidability, or only the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 of the first cover member 2051 is self-sliding. It is formed of a lubricious material, or the entire first cover member 2051 or the peripheral edge of the second opening 2053 is coated with a highly slidable self-lubricating material. preferable. For example, as the self-lubricating material, polyacetal (POM), polyamide (PA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) and the like can be assumed.
In the present embodiment, the entire first cover member 2051 is formed of a self-lubricating material, and can be appropriately selected and adopted according to the embodiment.

Thus, if at least the peripheral portion of the second opening 2053 is formed of a self-lubricating material, the region in contact with the operation member 2000 (pressing portion 2003) is excellent in slidability. The member 2000 can be prevented from being damaged.
Further, when the operation member 2000, the first cover member 2051, or the decorative member 2041 is damaged due to contact when the operation member 2000 is displaced and the shavings or the like are generated, the shavings or the like enter the interior, and the electric decoration Although there is a possibility of affecting the substrate 2183 and the like, according to the present embodiment, since such a problem cannot occur, safety is improved.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the decorating property is improved by disposing an inner decoration 2055 provided at the upper edge of the movable effect part described later.
The inner decoration 2055 is formed in an annular shape having a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the pressing portion 2003 of the operation member 2000. In the present embodiment, the surface is plated and a predetermined decoration is applied.
The opening area of the inner decoration 2055 is formed with an opening diameter that can display a movable effect of a movable effect component described later.
And the inner decoration 2055 is detachably fixed on the upper end surface of a production component holding member (louver base) 2095 described later.

  In this embodiment, the support member 2057 is a unit base that displaceably supports the operation member 2000, and the unit base 2057 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape that can accommodate the entire button base 2013. A first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059 where the first cylindrical portion 2015 of the button base 2013 is located and a second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 where the second cylindrical portion 2021 is located are integrally formed. The upper part of the first large-diameter cylindrical part 2059 is open, and the lower part of the second large-diameter cylindrical part 2067 is closed by the bottom part 2069.

A flange 2061 that is continuous in a predetermined range in the circumferential direction is formed at the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059, and a fixing hole portion 2063 that detachably fixes the decorative member 2041 to the flange 2061 by screws. Is provided.
In addition, a boss 2065 that detachably fixes an effect component holding member (louver base) 2095, which will be described later, via a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 is provided inside the upper end of the first large diameter cylindrical portion 2059. It is provided at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction.
In the present embodiment, an effect button mechanism 2081 used for selecting a character appearing in the effect, for example, is disposed at a predetermined position at the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059. The configuration and operational effects of the effect button mechanism 2081 are not particularly limited in the present embodiment.

  The second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2059, and an installation space 2071 for accommodating the vibration absorbing member 2087 is provided in a substantially central region of the inner bottom surface thereof. In the vicinity of 2071, a first through-hole portion 2073 into which the leg portion 2091 of the shock absorbing member 2087 can be inserted and disposed is provided. The inner bottom surface is provided with a second through hole portion 2075 through which a guide pin (leg portion) 2023 and a guide bush 2027 projecting from the bottom surface of the operation member 2000 can be inserted.

The second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 is formed with a detection piece part in / out hole portion 2077 penetrating from the inner bottom surface to the outer bottom surface, and a concave portion 2079 is formed on the outer bottom surface side of the detection piece portion intrusion hole portion 2077. The depression detection sensor 2035 is disposed in the recessed portion 2079 (see FIGS. 4, 4A, and 4B).
Therefore, when the player depresses (presses) the operation member 2000, the detection piece 2039 that protrudes from the outer bottom surface of the button base 2013 of the operation member 2000 is the second largest in the vertical direction from the detection piece part in / out hole 2077. While being pressed down toward the recessed portion 2079 on the outer bottom surface of the diameter cylindrical portion 2067, the pressed state is detected by entering the detection region 2037 of the press detection sensor 2035.

In this embodiment, a protective cover 2083 formed separately is detachably fixed to the lower end side of the second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 of the support member (unit base) 2057 with a screw. The protective cover 2083 has a receiving portion in which the tip of the guide pin 2023 protruding from the tip of the second through-hole portion 2075 of the second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2067 can be received in a non-contact state when the operation member 2000 is pressed down to the maximum. 2085 is integrally provided. That is, a predetermined gap G is formed between the accommodating portion 2085 of the protective cover 2083 and the tip of the guide pin 2023 even when the operating member 2000 is pressed down to the maximum (in FIG. 4). The guide pin 2023 at the time of maximum pressing is indicated by a virtual line).
In the present embodiment, the protective cover 2083 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material to improve maintenance such as wiring processing.

  The vibration absorbing member 2087 includes an impact absorbing cover 2089 and an elastic member 2093, and is provided between the bottom surface of the button base 2013 and the support member (unit base) 2057 constituting the operation member 2000.

  In the present embodiment, an elastic member (rubber sheet) 2093 formed with a predetermined thickness with an elastic material such as rubber having a substantially rectangular shape on the installation space 2071 on the inner bottom surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 is provided. A shock absorbing cover 2089 made of a synthetic resin material or the like configured in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the elastic member 2093 is placed so as to cover the upper surface of the elastic member 2093 in the vertical direction.

The shock absorbing cover 2089 is formed of a self-lubricating resin such as polyacetal (POM), polyamide (PA), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyphenylene sulfide (PPS).
The elastic member 2093 is made of, for example, a rubber sheet. However, the elastic member 2093 is not limited to this, and a spring (for example, a leaf spring or a coil spring) or a synthetic resin material having an impact absorbing function is within the scope of the present invention. Can be selected.

Then, the leg portion 2091 of the shock absorbing cover 2089 is inserted into the first through hole portion 2073 that penetrates from the inner bottom surface of the unit base 2057 toward the outer bottom surface, and is bolted from the outer bottom surface side. At this time, the leg portion 2091 that is bolted is configured to be slidable in the first through-hole portion 2073 in the vertical direction.
That is, when the operation member 2000 is located at the second position 2011 and the player presses the operation member 2000 strongly, the bottom surface of the button base 2013 of the operation member 2000 is the inside of the unit base 2057. It can be considered that the bottom side is strongly impacted.

By configuring as in the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the button base 2013 hits the shock absorbing cover 2089 constituting the shock absorbing member 2087 even when the player presses the operating member 2000 strongly. The impact can be absorbed and reduced together with the elastic member 2093 located below the elastic member 2093.
At this time, since the leg portion 2091 of the shock absorbing member 2087 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the first through-hole portion 2073, the elastic member 2093 is pressed when a strong shock is applied. Since it is movable in the vertical direction within the range, the impact force can be further released (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrates with embodiment which provided the two leg parts 2091 on the diagonal, it is a form provided with three legs, a form provided with four legs, etc. The number and shape are not particularly limited.

  Furthermore, when the elastic member 2093 is made of a rubber material as in the present embodiment, oil or the like may come out of the rubber material upon receiving an impact. However, in the case of the present embodiment, the operation member 2000 indirectly presses the elastic member 2093 via the shock absorbing cover 2089, so that even if oil or grease comes out from the elastic member 2093, it adheres to the operation member 2000. There is no fear. Even when the operation member 2000 is pressed, the operation member 2000 is not in direct contact with the elastic member 2093, so that it is difficult for oil and fat to come out compared to when the shock absorbing cover 2089 is not provided.

The effect component 2113 includes a louver mechanism 2115 as a movable effect component that can be displaced to a pre-displacement position (first specific position) and a post-displacement position (second specific position), and an effect effect by light on the movable effect component. It is comprised with the electrical decoration board | substrate 2183 for providing.
The effect parts 2113 are integrally supported by a support member (unit base) 2057 via an effect part holding member (louver base) 2095. In the present embodiment, the first specific position where the louver 2117 is closed is the pre-displacement position, and the second specific position where the louver 2117 is open is the post-displacement position. The second specific position (in a state where the louver 2117 is open) and the post-displacement position can be set as the first specific position (in a state where the louver 2117 is closed).

  The production component holding member (louver base) 2095 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with the upper part opened, and at the upper end, a shaft support region portion that holds the louver 2117 constituting the louver mechanism 2115 so as to be freely displaceable (turnable). 2097, and holds a louver mechanism 2115, an electric decoration board 2183, and an inner lens 2187.

The production component holding member (louver base) 2095 has a plurality of connecting piece portions 2099 protruding in the horizontal direction at the upper end edge, and is detachably attached to the upper end surface of the support member (unit base) 2057 ( (See FIG. 11).
In the present embodiment, the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 is provided to the support member (unit base) 2057 via a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 (FIGS. 4 to 4). 5 and FIG.
Specifically, the production component holding member (louver base) 2095 is provided with a fitting locking piece 2101 protruding at a predetermined location on the periphery of the upper end, and the fitting locking piece 2101 is continuously cut from the tip. A first fitting locking groove 2103 is provided (see FIG. 11).
The vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with an elastic material such as a rubber material, and the second fitting that is continuous in the circumferential direction on the substantially central outer peripheral surface in the cylinder length direction. A mating groove 2107 is formed (see FIGS. 5 and 7).

  Accordingly, the vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 is fitted and disposed on the outer periphery of the boss 2065 projecting from the upper end surface of the support member (unit base) 2057, and the production component holding member (louver base). The first fitting locking groove 2103 of the 2095 fitting locking piece 2101 is fitted and locked to the second fitting locking groove 2107 provided on the outer periphery of the vibration transmission preventing member (vibration-proof bushing) 2105. . Thereby, the production component holding member (louver base) 2095 is integrally connected to the support member (unit base) 2057 via the vibration transmission preventing member (vibration-proof bush) 2105.

The effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 is internally provided with an electric decoration board 2183, an inner lens 2187, and a louver 2117 in this order from the inner bottom surface side.
The link member 2125 and the displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) 2147 constituting the louver mechanism 2115 are attached to the outer surface side of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095.

The louver mechanism 2115 pivotally supports a louver 2117 composed of a plurality of separately formed (eight in this embodiment) wing plates 2119 and each wing plate 2119 constituting the louver 2117 so as to be displaceable (rotatable). The shaft support region 2097 at the upper end of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 and one end of each slat 2119 constituting the louver 2117 are locked, and provided on the back side of the effect component holding member 2095 so as to be horizontally movable. The link member 2125 and a displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) 2147 for driving the link member 2125 so as to be horizontally movable and displacing the louver 2117 from the first specific position to the post-displacement position.
The production component holding member (louver base) 2095 is formed in a substantially cylindrical main body 2096 and a flange having a diameter larger than that of the main body 2096 from the upper end of the main body 2096, and the wing plates 2119 are arranged at positions facing each other. The second surface portion 2139 constituting the side wall surface portion 2133 of the link member 2125 is horizontally movable between the one shaft support region portion 2097 and the main body 2096. A slit 2098 for moving the link is formed.
Further, a shaft support groove 2100 that rotatably supports the rotation shaft portion 2121 of the slat 2119 is adjacent to the top of the shaft support region portion 2097 with the groove opening portion facing upward in the vertical direction. A plurality are provided (see FIG. 4B).

Each wing plate 2119 has a cylindrical rotating shaft portion 2121 that is pivotally supported by the shaft supporting region portion 2097 of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 coaxially on the end faces facing each other in the longitudinal direction. In addition to projecting, a locking portion 2123 that can be locked to the link member 2125 is projected from either one of the end surfaces.
The locking portion 2123 is formed in a prismatic shape shorter than the rotation shaft portion 2121 on one end face, and the protruding position of the locking portion 2123 is shifted up and down and back and forth.

Further, each wing plate 2119 is plated and deposited only on the surface and side surfaces, and only a predetermined region on the surface is peeled off to form a translucent region (not shown). In the present embodiment, a satin treatment is applied to the translucent area (plating peeling area) for the purpose of exhibiting a light diffusion effect.
Although not particularly limited, for example, when each wing plate 2119 is in a closed state (first position 2009), the “PUSH” of the “PUSH” is defined by the translucent region applied to each wing plate 2119. When a character (not shown) or the like is formed, the light emitted from the LED 2185 of the illumination board 2183 is irradiated from the character portion of “PUSH” toward the pressing portion 2003, and “PUSH”. It is possible to prompt the player to perform a pressing operation by emphasizing the character portion and displaying the light emission. Before the louver 2117 rotates, the LED 2185 emits light when the LED 2185 emits light. When the louver 2117 rotates, the LED 2185 emits light and when the LED 2185 emits light, the surface of the wing plate 2119 is plated with the LED 2185. Is reflected and the light is reflected to the player side.
The light emission display of “PUSH” can be performed in various colors. For example, an image of a predetermined color (blue, red, yellow, etc.) may be used, and for example, the letters “PUSH” may be displayed in various colors.
Note that the number of the slats 2119 constituting the louver 2117 is not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate according to the specifications. Further, the shape of the slats 2119 and the like are arbitrary, and the form of the louver 2117 constituted by each slat 2119 is also arbitrary.
Furthermore, the decoration can be arbitrarily applied as necessary. It is also possible to provide a plurality of drive mechanisms and to configure each wing plate 2119 so that it can be operated individually, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

  The link member 2125 includes a base portion 2127 and a side wall surface portion 2133 that is integrally raised from the base portion 2127 in the vertical direction.

  The base portion 2127 is formed in a rectangular shape, and is provided with a moving cutout portion 2129 that is recessed at a predetermined length in a part thereof, and a protruding portion 2131 is integrally formed on the back surface side.

The side wall surface portion 2133 includes a first surface portion 2135 provided horizontally from a side edge of the base portion 2127 opposite to the moving notch portion 2129 via a step portion 2143, and a vertical direction from the first surface portion 2135. And a second surface portion 2139 to be raised.
In the first surface portion 2135, a guide groove 2128 is formed with a predetermined width in which a guide protrusion portion 2151 protruding from the outer bottom surface of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 can slide.
On the upper end of the second surface portion 2139, a plurality of square-hole-shaped locking grooves 2141 are formed at predetermined intervals with a notch on the upper side where the locking portion 2123 of the wing plate 2119 can be locked.

  A displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) 2147 is connected to a solenoid 2153 mounted on a solenoid cover 2149, a plunger 2155 that can be retracted from the solenoid 2153, a plunger cover 2157 provided at the tip of the plunger 2155, and a plunger cover 2157. And a crank 2163 that can be driven.

The crank 2163 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and is a first connection hole portion that is rotatably connected to a shaft portion 2109 that protrudes on the back side of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095. 2165 and a second connecting hole formed integrally from the first connecting hole 2165 via the first protruding piece 2167 and rotatably connected to a shaft portion 2159 protruding from the bottom surface of the plunger cover 2157. Part 2169 and the first connecting hole 2165 are formed integrally with the first projecting piece 2167 through a second projecting piece 2173 integrally formed at an angle of about 90 degrees, and the base of the link member 2125 is formed. The protrusion 2131 provided on the portion 2127 is integrally formed with a third connecting hole 2175 that is rotatably connected.
The second connection hole 2169 and the third connection hole 2175 are formed as long holes.
Further, in the present embodiment, a guide groove 2111 is provided on the back side of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095 along the movement direction of the plunger, and a shaft portion 2159 connected to the second connection hole portion 2169. A guide protrusion (not shown) that protrudes from the surface of the plunger cover 2157 opposite to the surface of the plunger cover 2157 is provided to be linearly guided along the guide groove 2111 (see FIGS. 11 and 11). 12).

Accordingly, the crank 2163 rotates around the shaft 2109 on the inner bottom surface of the solenoid cover 2149 in accordance with the movement of the plunger 2155, and the link member 2125 is displaced in the horizontal direction in accordance with the rotation of the crank 2163. To do.
Then, when the link member 2125 is displaced in the horizontal direction, each wing plate 2119 in which the locking portions 2123 are locked in the locking grooves 2141 of the second surface portion 2139 of the link member 2125 becomes the effect component holding member (louver). The base is rotated around a rotating shaft 2121 that is rotatably supported by the shaft supporting groove 2100 of the shaft supporting region 2097 of the base 2095 to open and close.

  The second cover member (louver presser) 2177 includes an edge portion 2179 that covers the shaft support region portion 2097 of the movable effect component, and an opening portion 2181 provided inside the edge portion 2179, and is formed in a substantially disc shape. The inner decoration 2055 and the louver base 2095 are sandwiched and held. The displacement movable effect of the louver 2117 can be visually recognized through the opening 2181.

By providing the second cover member (louver presser) 2177 in this manner, the louver 2117 can be prevented from falling off, and the interference between the louver 2117 that operates to be displaced and the inner decoration 2055 can be prevented by the second cover member 2177. Therefore, damage to the inner decoration 2055 can be prevented. For this reason, the malfunction that aesthetics are impaired by the damage of the inner decoration 2055 can be prevented.
In the present embodiment, the second cover member (louver presser) 2177 is formed of a self-lubricating material, like the first cover member (button cover receiver) 2051. Thereby, damage to the louver 2117 in contact with the second cover member (louver presser) 2177 can also be prevented.

  An electrical decoration board (production component) 2183 is configured by arranging predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 2185 at predetermined positions on the front side of the board. The electric decoration board 2183 is not particularly limited and interpreted in the present embodiment, and a well-known form can be appropriately selected within the scope of the present invention.

The inner lens 2187 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and is subjected to a predetermined cut that can exert an effect of diffusing light emitted from the LED 2185 of the electric decoration board 2183 (see FIG. 4B).
Further, the inner lens 2187 is provided with a substrate pressing projection 2189 on the rear surface side thereof, and the substrate pressing projection 2189 is pressed onto the substrate 2183 with a screw or the like on the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095. It is detachably attached (see FIGS. 7 and 13). The inner lens 2187 is not particularly limited in the present embodiment, and a well-known form can be appropriately selected within the scope of the present invention.

<Explanation of operation unit operation>
Here, the operation of the operation unit 9 employed in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, in the normal gaming state, each LED 2185 of the illumination board 2183 of the operation unit 9 does not emit light, and the louver 2117 of the movable effect part also lays all the wing plates 2119 in a substantially horizontal state (closed state). The open region 2145 is not formed between adjacent slats 2119 (see FIGS. 9A, 10A, 11A, and 12A).

During the game, when any effect display state is reached, for example, each LED 2185 of the lighting board 2183 is emitted by the sub control board based on a command from the main control board, and is closed (first specific position). The character portion of “PUSH” can be highlighted and displayed in the direction from the character “PUSH” (translucent region) applied to each wing plate 2119 to the pressing portion 2003.
As a result, the player can be prompted to press the operation member 2000.

When the player depresses the pressing portion 2003 of the operation member 2000, the operation member 2000 is in the first position (pre-press position) 2009 and the second position (post-press position) 2011 in the support member (unit base) 2057. The displacement is repeated in the vertical direction (see FIG. 6).
At this time, the operation member 2000 is pushed downward (second position 2011) in the vertical direction against the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) 2025 by the player's pressing operation.
When the pressing operation on the pressing unit 2003 by the player is canceled, the operation member 2000 is returned to the first position 2009 by the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) 2025.

Next, when a predetermined effect display state is obtained by pressing the operation member 2000, an energization signal is sent to the solenoid 2153 of the displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) 2147 by the sub control board based on a command from the main control board, for example. Then, the plunger 2155 and the plunger cover 2157 move linearly in the direction indicated by the arrow L1 (see FIGS. 9B, 10B, 11B, and 12B).
The linear movement of the plunger 2155 and the plunger cover 2157 in the L1 direction causes the crank 2163 to move in the arrow L1 direction, and the movement of the crank 2163 in the arrow L1 direction causes the link member 2125 to move horizontally in the arrow L2 direction ( (Refer FIG.9 (b), FIG.10 (b), FIG.11 (b) and FIG.12 (b).).

  That is, when the plunger 2155 and the plunger cover 2157 move in the direction of the arrow L1, the first protruding piece 2167 rotates in the clockwise direction around the shaft portion 2109, and at the same time, the second protruding piece 2173 also rotates in the clockwise direction. In order to move, the link member 2125 whose projection is connected to the third connection hole 2175 moves horizontally in the direction of the arrow L2 (FIGS. 9B, 10B, 11B and (Refer FIG.12 (b).).

  By this operation, each wing plate 2119 in which the locking portion 2123 is locked in the locking groove 2141 of the second surface portion 2139 of the link member 2125 becomes the shaft support region portion 2097 of the effect component holding member (louver base) 2095. 9 is pivoted about a rotating shaft portion 2121 that is pivotally supported by the shaft 2121 to be in an upright state (post-displacement position), and an open region 2145 is formed between adjacent wing plates 2119 (FIG. 9 ( b), FIG. 10 (b), FIG. 11 (b) and FIG. 12 (b)).

  Therefore, the light emission from the LED 2185 of the illumination board 2183 positioned below through the plurality of open regions 2145 can be emitted toward the pressing portion 2003 (see FIGS. 9B and 10B). ).

When the energization of the solenoid 2153 is released, the plunger 2155 moves linearly in the arrow L3 direction by the restoring force of the spring 2156, and the crank 2163 moves in the L3 direction as well. Then, the link member 2125 moves horizontally in the direction of the arrow L4, and each wing plate 2119 rotates around the rotation shaft portion 2121 to fall back to the pre-displacement state (closed state), and between the adjacent wing plates 2119 It is closed (see FIG. 9 (a), FIG. 10 (a), FIG. 11 (a) and FIG. 12 (a)).
The light emission of the LED 2185 on the lighting board 2183 may be terminated at the same time as or after the plunger 2155 moves in the direction of the arrow L3 when the solenoid 2153 is energized. The light emission of the LED 2185 may be terminated before the movement of.
In addition, the light emission of the LED 2185 of the lighting board 2183 may be continuously lit for a predetermined time, or may be flashed at a constant interval or at an indefinite interval. The specification of the gaming machine incorporating the present invention Depending on the situation.
In addition to the purpose of prompting the pressing operation of the operation member 2000, each wing plate 2119 can be configured to be displaced (opening / closing), and is within the scope of the present invention.
Furthermore, a restricting member that restricts the movement of the plunger 2155 may be provided so as to be displaceable between a restricting position and a non-regulating position. That is, for example, although not shown, each blade 2119 is closed as shown in FIG. 10A, rather than the state shown in FIG. 10A in which each blade 2119 stands by providing a regulating member. It is also possible to regulate the open state at a position close to the state. Further, it is not necessary to cause the LED 2185 of the electric decoration board 2183 to emit light while each wing plate 2119 is opened and closed, and it is possible to cope with the specification of the gaming machine incorporating the present invention.
In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of sets of displacement operating mechanisms composed of the displacement mechanism (louver drive unit) consisting of a solenoid, a plunger, a plunger cover, and a crank and a link member, each of which can be configured to perform a separate operation. is there. And the latching | locking part of a predetermined blade is each latched and comprised in the latching groove of the 2nd surface part of each link member.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an effect that only predetermined blades are opened / closed and the other blades are closed and not operated.
In addition, it is possible to arrange the adjacent slats so as not to overlap each other and to allow each slat to rotate 180 degrees or 360 degrees. At that time, different designs can be applied to the front and back of the slats, and it is possible to give effects by different design displays before and after rotation.

  According to the present embodiment, the vibration generated by the collision of the lower end of the operation member 2000 due to the displacement operation of the operation member 2000 from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011 by the player is absorbed by the vibration absorbing member 2083. It is possible to prevent the vibration from being exerted on the effect parts (louver 2117, electrical decoration board 2183) 2113 for executing the effect. Further, since the vibration generated by the displacement operation from the first position 2009 to the second position 2011 with respect to the operation member 2000 is absorbed, it is possible to suppress damage to the operation member 2000 itself.

In the present embodiment, the operation member 2000 is provided with a vibration motor 2031, and the operation member 2000 is forcibly vibrated when executing a predetermined effect, thereby improving the interest of the player.
According to the present embodiment, even when such an effect by the vibration motor 2031 is adopted, the effect component holding member (louver 2117 base) 2095 provided with the effect component 2113 such as the electrical decoration board 2183 is used to prevent vibration transmission. Since the support member 2057 is provided via the member 2105, the vibration of the vibration motor 2031 from the operation member 2000 can be prevented from reaching the effect part.

  The elastic member 2093 has a structure that absorbs vibration by being pressed when the button base 2013 of the operation member 2000 comes into contact with the shock absorbing cover 2089. Therefore, the elastic member is stressed only at the time of pressing, but is not so much at other times. Therefore, the stress on the elastic member is reduced, and the durability of the elastic member is improved.

The vibration generated by the player's operation on the operation member 2000 is absorbed by the vibration absorbing member 2087 and the vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2105 further prevents the vibration from being transmitted. It is possible to prevent the production parts (louver 2117, electrical decoration board 2183) 2113 from being subjected to the vibration.
"Second embodiment"

15 to 40 show a second embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, since the operation unit 9 provided on the upper plate 17 has a characteristic configuration, the following description will be made with an emphasis on the characteristic portion.
Note that other configurations such as a game board, a light guide plate, a display device, and a back box are not particularly limited, and various configurations can be employed within the scope of the present invention. . It is also possible not to employ a light guide plate or a back box. Needless to say, the configurations of the third to fifth embodiments described later can be employed.

<Schematic configuration of operation unit>
Similar to the first embodiment, the operation unit 9 of the present embodiment has an operation member 2000 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. By operating the operation member 2000, the player directly It is possible to change the effect image displayed on the display device (effect device) 2281 such as a liquid crystal display by participating in the game.
The display device 2281 is not limited to the LCD, and may include, for example, a cathode ray tube including a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube), a dot LED (Light Emitting Diode), a segment LED, an EL (Electronic Luminescent), a plasma, or the like. Is not to be done.
In the present embodiment, the display device has a backlight (not shown), and the display area of the liquid crystal can be displayed by light emission by the light emission of the backlight.

The operation unit 9 includes a light-transmitting first portion on at least a part of the top surface 2191 side, and an operation member (button cover 2197, button base 2209) 2000 that can be operated by a player, and the operation member 2000. A support member (unit base) 2241 that is displaceably supported from a first position (for example, a position before pressing shown in FIG. 20A) to a second position (for example, a position after pressing shown in FIG. 20B); A base member (holder) 2259 having a contact region 2267 with which at least a part of the operation member 2000 can contact when the operation member 2000 is located at the second position, and the base member 2259 are provided. Vibration means 2269 capable of applying vibration to the operation member 2000 when at least a part of the operation member abuts against the contact area 2267; A display device (LCD) 2281 arranged on the back side of the first part of the operating member 2000 and having a display area 2283 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image toward the first part side, and the first part side from the first part side When the display area 2283 is visually recognized, the movable effect part is displaceable between a position before displacement (first specific position) where the display area 2283 is difficult to visually recognize and a position after displacement (second specific position) where the display area 2283 is easily visible. (Shutter) 2291 and drive means (shutter drive mechanism) 2307 capable of displacing the movable effect component 2291 to the position before displacement or the position after displacement.
In this embodiment, the first specific position where the shutter 2291 is closed is the pre-displacement position, and the second specific position where the shutter 2291 is open is the post-displacement position. The second specific position (the state where the shutter 2291 is open) and the post-displacement position can be the first specific position (the state where the shutter 2291 is closed).

In this embodiment, the operation member 2000 includes a button cover 2197 and a button base 2209 that are formed separately and integrated by screwing.
In the present embodiment, the button cover 2197 and the button base 2209 are described as separately formed. However, the button cover 2197 and the button base 2209 may be integrally formed. It is possible to select and adopt appropriately within the range.

  The button cover 2197 includes a pressing portion 2199 formed in a hollow cylindrical shape having a translucent first portion on at least a part of a dome-shaped top surface 2191 (pressing surface), and a pressing portion. 2199 has a flange portion 2203 projecting horizontally from the lower edge of 2199, a connecting piece portion 2205 that is detachably connected to the button base 2209 at a predetermined location of the flange portion 2203, and a vertical direction from the decorative member 2223 A notch portion that passes through the connecting portion 2227 that projects from the first position and functions as a guide portion when moving in the vertical direction between the first position (position before pressing) 2009 and the second position (position after pressing) 2011. 2207.

For the button cover 2197, it is preferable to select a material having at least a first portion having translucency and having excellent strength capable of withstanding repeated pressing (pressing) operations by the player. Polycarbonate, acrylic resin, etc. are assumed. In the present embodiment, the entire button cover 2197 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material and functions as the first portion.
The button cover 2197 is formed of a synthetic resin material having translucency as a whole in the present embodiment, but may include at least a first portion having translucency that can express an effect by an effect member described later. What is necessary is just to change a design suitably according to embodiment.

  The button base 2209 includes a hollow first cylindrical portion 2211 provided with a connection receiving portion 2213 at a predetermined position on the upper end facing the connection piece portion 2205 of the button cover 2197, and a smaller diameter than the first cylindrical portion 2211. It is formed of a second cylindrical portion 2219 that is integrally formed in a hollow continuous with the one cylindrical portion 2211. Both the upper portion of the first cylindrical portion 2211 and the lower portion of the second cylindrical portion 2219 are opened to be opened up and down. Communicate. In the figure, reference numeral 2221 denotes a coil spring which is provided on the outer periphery of the second cylindrical portion 2219 and is a pedestal member which will be described later by a vertical displacement between the first position and the second position of the operation member (button base 2209) 2000. (The inner surface of the holder) 2259 extends and contracts (see FIG. 20).

  In the present embodiment, the left and right rising surface portions 2215 that are integrally raised in the vertical direction from the opposite positions of the upper ends of the first cylindrical portions 2211 and the outward from the rising surface portion 2215 in the horizontal direction. A pair of left and right connection receiving portions 2213 are formed by the provided connection surface portion 2217.

  The inner surface of the first cylindrical portion 2211 is integrally provided with a substantially rectangular plate-shaped detection piece portion 2279 that protrudes with a predetermined length in the vertical direction, and is provided in a shutter drive mechanism 2307 described later. The press detection sensor 2277 can detect the displacement movement of the operation member 2000 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 23).

The decorative member 2223 has a first opening portion having an inner diameter R1 larger than the outer diameter R3 of the pressing portion 2199 so that the cylindrical pressing portion 2199 of the button cover 2197 constituting the operation member 2000 can be inserted and moved. 2225 is formed in the shape of a substantially annular dome having a top surface, and a predetermined decoration is provided on the surface side. In this embodiment, the surface of the decorative member 2223 is plated in order to improve the decorativeness.
Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of connecting portions 2227 that protrude in the vertical direction from the back surface side of the decorative member 2223 are provided, and are detachably connected to the support member (unit base) 2241 via the connecting portions 2227. ing.

  On the back side of the decorative member 2223, a main body portion 2231 having an opening region capable of displaying the display region 2283 of the display device 2281 on the top surface and formed in a substantially annular dome shape, and integrally projecting around the main body. An LCD cover 2229 composed of a flange portion 2233 is provided.

  The LCD cover 2229 has the main body portion 2231 formed in a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the pressing portion 2199 of the button cover 2197 and positioned in the pressing portion 2199, and a flange portion 2233 having a support member (unit base) 2241. It is arranged on the flange portion 2245 and is detachably connected. The main body 2231 is provided with a translucent portion (not shown) in an arc shape on the upper surface, and an electric decoration board 2237 having a predetermined shape for displaying the translucent portion on the inner surface of the main body 2231. Is integrated.

The flange portion 2233 is formed with left and right notch relief portions 2235 that are notched over a predetermined region in the circumferential direction at opposing positions.
The left and right cut-out relief portions 2235 are positioned so that the left and right rising surface portions 2215 of the button base 2209 are inserted into the cut-out relief portions 2235 and protrude above the flange portion 2203, respectively. The operation member 2000 that moves in the vertical direction in a state where the connection piece portion 2205 of the button cover 2197 is integrally attached to the connection receiving portion 2213 provided at the tip of each rising surface portion 2215 so as not to interfere with the LCD cover 2229. It is functioning. Due to the presence of the notch relief portion 2235, the effect parts that are suspended in the operation member 2000 via the LCD cover 2229 are not affected by the moving operation of the operation member 2000. Become.

  The electrical decoration board 2237 is provided on the inner surface of the LCD cover 2229, and is configured by arranging predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 2239 at predetermined positions on the front side of the board. The electric decoration board 2237 is not particularly limited in the present embodiment, and a well-known form can be appropriately selected within the scope of the present invention.

In this embodiment, the support member 2241 is a unit base that displaceably supports the operation member 2000, and the unit base 2241 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape that can accommodate the entire button base 2209. A first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2243 where the first cylindrical portion 2211 of the button base 2209 is located and a second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2251 where the second cylindrical portion 2219 is located are integrally formed.
In the present embodiment, the upper part of the first large-diameter cylindrical part 2243 and the lower part of the second large-diameter cylindrical part 2251 are opened to communicate with each other in a vertically open state.

A flange 2245 that is continuous in a circumferential range is formed at the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2243, and the decorative member 2223 and the LCD cover 2229 are fixed to the flange 2245 so as to be detachably screwed. A hole 2247 is provided.
In the present embodiment, an effect button mechanism 2249 that is used when, for example, a character appearing in an effect is selected is disposed at a predetermined position at the upper end of the first large-diameter cylindrical portion 2243. The configuration and operational effects of the effect button mechanism 2249 are not particularly limited in the present embodiment.

  The second large diameter cylindrical portion 2251 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the first large diameter cylindrical portion 2243, and a pedestal member (holder) 2259 is detachably attached to the lower end thereof. Further, the lower end edge of the second large-diameter cylindrical portion 2251 is provided with a protruding portion 2257 at a predetermined position, and the protruding portion 2257 is provided with a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255 described later.

  The pedestal member (holder) 2259 has a bottomed cylindrical portion 2261 having a bottom portion and a flange portion 2263 provided around the bottomed cylindrical portion 2261, and a vibration means (vibration motor) 2269 is provided on the outer bottom surface. When the operation member 2000 is located at the second position, a contact region 2267 that can contact the lower end of the operation member 2000 (the lower end of the second cylindrical portion 2219) is formed in the flange portion 2263 near the cylindrical portion 2261. Have.

The cylindrical portion 2261 has an outer diameter smaller than the lower end inner diameter of the support member (unit base) 2241, and is larger than the lower end of the operation member 2000, that is, the lower end outer diameter of the button base 2209. The lower end of the button base 2209 is accommodated in the cylindrical portion 2261 so as to be movable in the vertical direction.
The pedestal member (holder) 2259 is provided with three fitting locking pieces 2265 at predetermined positions of the flange portion 2263.

In the present embodiment, the support member 2241 and the pedestal member 2259 are attached via a vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bush) 2255.
The vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255 is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape with an elastic material such as a rubber material, and the second fitting member that is continuous in the circumferential direction on the substantially central outer peripheral surface in the cylinder length direction. A stop groove portion 2257 is formed.

  Therefore, the vibration transmission preventing member (anti-vibration bushing) 2255 is fitted and disposed on the three protrusions 2257 protruding from the lower end surface of the support member (unit base) 2241, and the base member (holder) 2259 is disposed. The fitting locking piece 2265 is fitted into the second fitting locking groove 2257 provided on the outer periphery of the vibration transmission preventing member (vibration-proof bushing) 2255 and locked. Accordingly, the base member (holder) 2259 is integrally connected to the support member (unit base) 2241 via the vibration transmission preventing member (vibration-proof bushing) 2255.

  The vibration means 2269 has a predetermined vibration motor 2273 attached and fixed to the back surface of a base member (holder) 2259 via a motor cover 2275, and the lower end of the operation member 2000 (the lower end of the button base 2209) is the base member. (Holder) It is possible to apply vibration to the operation member 2000 when it comes into contact with the contact area 2267 on the surface of 2259.

According to this embodiment, the player depresses the operation member 2000, the operation member 2000 reaches the second position, and the lower end of the operation member 2000 (the lower end of the button base 2209) is the pedestal member (holder) 2259. When coming into contact with the contact area 2267 on the surface, vibration from the vibration motor 2273 is applied to the operation member 2000, and an effect by vibration can be executed for the player (see FIG. 20B).
Further, even if vibration is applied to the operation member 2000, the support member (unit base) 2241 and the base member (holder) 2259 are vibration transmission preventing members (anti-vibration bushing) by the fitting locking pieces 2265 of the base member 2259. The other part of the support member (unit base) 2241 and the base member (holder) 2259 are not in contact with each other only by being connected via the 2255 (a gap G1 is formed as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17). Therefore, vibration transmission to the support member (unit base) 2241 is prevented, and the possibility of adverse effects on the display device 2281 and the movable effect component 2291 can be minimized.

  In the operation member 2000, predetermined production parts (display device 2281, movable production part 2291, drive means 2307) that are unitized are held by the support member (unit base) 2241 via the mechanism base 2285. It is housed in a substantially suspended form.

  In the present embodiment, the other support plate (the plate on the side where no gear group is provided) 2309 in the drive means (shutter drive mechanism) 2307 is provided with a press detection sensor 2277 (FIGS. 18, 20 and 20). (See FIG. 23). That is, the press detection sensor 2277 can be assumed to be a photosensor arranged with the detection region 2280 facing the inner surface of the first cylinder portion 2211 of the button base 2209 constituting the operation member 2000. Therefore, when the operation member 2000 is displaced between the first position (position before pressing) 2009 and the second position (position after pressing) 2011, the detection piece 2279 provided on the operation member 2000 side is provided with the shutter drive mechanism 2307. The displacement movement of the operation member 2000 is detected by moving in and out of the detection region 2280 of the press detection sensor 2277 provided on the side. In this embodiment, the state in which the detection piece 2279 is detected by the press detection sensor 2277 (the state in which the detection piece 2279 is positioned in the detection region 2280) is when the operation member 2000 is not operated (FIG. 20 ( a) when the operation member 2000 is operated (a state in which the detection piece 2279 is not included in the detection region 2280). 20 (b) during non-pressing operation).

In this embodiment, the display device (LCD) 2281 is formed in a rectangular shape having a size that can be accommodated in the first cylindrical portion 2211 of the button base 2209 constituting the operation member 2000. It has a display area 2283 that is arranged on the back side of the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 of the member 2000 and can display a predetermined effect image toward the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 side. The liquid crystal drive substrate 2287, the LCD bracket 2289, and the display device (LCD) 2281 are displayed in this order on the surface side of the mechanism base 2285 that is detachably fixed to the flange portion 2245 at the upper end of the support member (unit base) 2241. A display area 2283 of a device (LCD) 2281 is arranged toward the pressing portion 2199.
The display device (LCD) 2281 of the present embodiment is not limited to the case where the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is in the post-displacement position (open position), but is located in the pre-displacement position (closed position). Even in this case, it is possible to display a predetermined image in the display area 2283.

  The movable effect component 2291 includes a first shutter portion 2293 and a second shutter portion 2295. When the display region 2283 is viewed from the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 side, the display region 2283 is difficult to view. The driving means 2307 can be opened and closed so as to be displaceable between a pre-displacement position (closed position) and a post-displacement position (open position) that are easily visible.

Since the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are formed symmetrically, only the first shutter portion 2293 will be described here.
The first shutter portion 2293 is formed with a shaft fitting portion 2299 for fitting the rotation shaft 2297 therein, an inner member 2301 provided integrally with the shaft fitting portion 2299, and a curved shape. The outer member 2303 which is fixed to the end edge with a screw is formed in a substantially C shape.
At least the outer member 2303 is formed in such a size as to close the opening area of the LCD cover 2229 when positioned at the pre-displacement position (closed position).

In addition, the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 of the present embodiment has a translucent region 2305 having translucency in a predetermined region. Note that the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is plated and deposited only on the surface and side surfaces, and the light-transmitting region 2305 is formed by removing the plating only on a predetermined region of the surface.
The portion to be plated (plated vapor deposition portion) is not limited to this embodiment, and may be applied to the back surface of the movable effect component (shutter) 2291. Further, the translucent region may not be formed by plating all of the movable effect component (shutter) 2291.
It should be noted that the number of movable effect parts (shutters) 2291 provided is not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications. The shape of the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is also arbitrary.
Furthermore, the decoration can be arbitrarily applied as necessary. Also, a plurality of drive mechanisms can be provided, and each movable effect component (shutter) 2291 can be configured to be individually operable, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

Although not limited in particular, for example, when the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are closed (pre-displacement position), the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2293 When the character “PUSH” is formed by the translucent region 2305 applied to the shutter portion 2295, the light emission from the display device (LCD) 2281 is pressed from the character portion “PUSH”. It will be irradiated toward the part 2199 direction. Thus, since light is emitted from the character portion of “PUSH”, the player can be urged to press the operation member 2000 by highlighting the character portion of “PUSH” and displaying the light emission display ( (See FIG. 19.)
Note that the character portion of “PUSH” that is the light-transmitting region 2305 can be provided only in one of the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295.
In addition, the arrangement state of the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295, that is, the opening and closing direction, for example, the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 from the player side toward the gaming machine side. It is also possible to provide the first shutter portion 2293 with a character portion “PUSH” that is a light-transmitting region 2305.

The display device (LCD) 2281 can display a predetermined image in the display area 2283 even when the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is located at the position before displacement (closed position). Therefore, when the movable effect component 2291 is located at the pre-displacement position, a predetermined image is displayed in the display region 2283, so that the translucent region provided in the movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is provided. Even if the movable effect component 2291 has a light-transmitting region 2305 and the movable effect component 2291 is located at a position before displacement that makes the display device 2281 difficult to see. Since the light from the display device 2281 on the back side can be transmitted, the effect from the display means can be reflected and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The drive means (shutter drive mechanism) 2307 moves the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295, which are the movable effect parts 2291, from the pre-displacement position (closed position) or the post-displacement position (open). In the present embodiment, for example, in the present embodiment, on the back side of the mechanism base 2285 that is detachably fixed to the flange 2245 at the upper end of the support member (unit base) 2241 It is arranged.

  The driving means (shutter driving mechanism) 2307 includes a pair of support plates 2309 and 2309 arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the front-rear direction, and a bottom plate portion 2311 that holds the pair of support plates 2309 and 2309 at a predetermined interval. The shutter drive motor 2312 is disposed on the inner surface side of the bottom plate portion 2311, and the motor shaft 2315 provided in the shutter drive motor 2312 is provided on one support plate 2309 so as to protrude.

A connecting gear 2317 is provided at the projecting end of the motor shaft 2315, and the rotation shaft 2297 and the second shutter portion in the first shutter portion 2293 are positioned above the position where the connecting gear 2317 is disposed on the support plate 2309. The rotation shaft 2297 of 2295 is arranged in parallel across the pair of opposing support plates 2309 and 2309 so as to be able to rotate in the left-right direction, and on one support plate 2309 side where the connecting gear 2317 is provided. A rotating operation gear 2321 is provided at one end of the protruding rotating shaft 2297. The two rotary operation gears 2321 are meshed with each other.
Further, in this embodiment, the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are rotated so as to be displaced to the pre-displacement position (closed position) or the post-displacement position (open position). Two rotating shafts 2297 that operate are horizontally extended on opposite sides of the bottom plate portion 2311 in the vertical direction across the opposing surface portions of a pair of support plates 2309 and 2309 that are integrally raised from both ends of the bottom plate portion 2311. For example, it is assumed that a twisting force is applied to the rotating shaft 2297 by opening and closing the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 because the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are opened and closed. However, it has a unit form which is not easily affected and is excellent in strength.

  An intermediate gear 2323 that is provided between the connection gear 2317 and the rotation operation gear 2321 and transmits the rotation operation from the shutter drive motor 2312 from the connection gear 2317 to the rotation operation gear 2321 is connected to the connection gear 2317. It is provided so as to protrude toward the one support plate 2309 provided with the rotation gear.

In this embodiment, a detection mechanism 2325 for detecting the opening / closing operation of the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 is provided (see FIG. 22).
For example, one embodiment thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In a state where the first pre-displacement position (closed position) is positioned, the outer surface of the shaft fitting portion 2299 of the first shutter portion 2293 is vertically aligned. An open / close detection sensor (photo sensor) is provided on the bottom plate portion 2311 below the detection piece 2327 so that the detection piece 2327 projecting downward is provided, and the detection piece 2327 in that state is positioned in the detection region 2331. 2329 (see FIG. 22A).
Therefore, when the detection piece 2327 is located in the detection region 2331 of the open / close detection sensor 2329, the first shutter 2293 and the second shutter 2295 are in the pre-displacement position (closed position). When the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced to the post-displacement position (open position), it is detected that the first shutter unit 2293 is rotated. Since the detection piece 2327 rotates and moves out of the detection region 2331 of the open / close detection sensor 2329, it is detected that the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced to the post-displacement position (open state position). (See FIG. 22B.)

According to the present embodiment, when the display area 2283 of the display device 2281 is visually recognized from the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 side of the operation member 2000, the display area 2283 is difficult to visually recognize, and the position is easily visible. Since the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 that can be displaced to the post-displacement position are provided, the display device 2281 disposed on the back side of each of the shutter portions according to the displaced position is provided. It looks different, and it is possible to perform various and innovative effects. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of playing the game and improve the interest of the game.
In the operation member 2000, a touch sensor may be provided for each region corresponding to the shutter unit, and the shutter unit corresponding to the region detected by the touch sensor may be in an open state or a closed state.

<Explanation of operation unit operation>
Here, the operation of the operation unit 9 employed in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, in the normal gaming state, the display device (LCD) 2281 of the operation unit 9 does not display light emission, and the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 of the movable effect component 2291 are also in the position before displacement (closed). The open area is not formed between the shutters (see FIGS. 16, 21B, and 22A).

  During a game, when a predetermined production execution state is reached, for example, the display device (LCD) 2281 is lit and displayed by the liquid crystal drive substrate 2287 based on a command from the main control board, and is in a closed state (position before displacement). The character portion of “PUSH” is highlighted in the direction of the pressing portion 2199 from the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) applied to the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295. Can be made. Accordingly, the player can be prompted (prompted) to press the operation member 2000 (see FIG. 19).

When the player presses the operation member 2000, the operation member 2000 is pushed downward (second position) in the vertical direction against the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) (FIG. 20B). When the pressing operation on the pressing portion 2199 by the player is canceled, the operation member 2000 is returned to the first position by the elasticity of the elastic member (coil spring) (FIG. 20A).
Further, when the operation member 2000 is displaced to the second position, the lower end of the operation member 2000 comes into contact with the contact area 2267 of the pedestal member (holder) 2259 and is disposed on the back side of the pedestal member (holder) 2259. The vibration from the vibration motor 2273 of the vibration means 2269 is transmitted to the operation member 2000, and an effect by the vibration is given to the player (FIG. 20B).

  Next, when a predetermined effect execution state is obtained by pressing the operation member 2000, an energization signal is sent to the shutter drive motor 2312 of the shutter drive mechanism by the liquid crystal drive board 2287 based on a command from the main control board, for example. Then, the connecting gear 2317 is rotated in a predetermined direction. By the rotation operation of the connecting gear 2317, the rotation operation is transmitted to the rotation gears provided in the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 via the intermediate gear 2323, and the first shutter portion. 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are displaced from the pre-displacement position (closed position, see FIG. 16) to the post-displacement position (open state position, see FIG. 17).

Accordingly, when the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are positioned at the post-displacement position (open state position), the display device (LCD) 2281 positioned below the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 can be visually recognized. Light emitted from the device (LCD) 2281 can be emitted toward the pressing portion 2199 (FIGS. 17, 21A, and 22B).
Further, the display device (LCD) 2281 can provide various effects by a character or the like instead of a simple light emission effect, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Then, after the predetermined effect execution state is finished, when an instruction to rotate in the reverse direction is given to the shutter drive motor 2312, the connecting gear 2317 starts rotating in the reverse direction, and the intermediate gear that has received the rotation operation. The rotation operation in the reverse direction is transmitted to each rotation gear by 2323. As a result, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the pre-displacement position (closed position) and cover the lower display device (LCD) 2281.
Further, the image display by the LCD, the vibration by the vibration means, and the shutter opening / closing drive may be performed simultaneously at a predetermined timing, or any one or two may be selected and various modes may be performed. You may make it produce.

<Other embodiment 1>
The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 and the display device (LCD) 2281 of the present embodiment can be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of the present embodiment (FIG. 24). Thru | or FIG. 27).

  In the other embodiment 1, the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295, which are movable effect parts 2291, are configured to be separately openable and closable. For example, in FIG. The characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) are applied to the 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295, respectively (see FIG. 24A), and the display device 2281 disposed below in the vertical direction emits light. By displaying, when the character “PUSH” is displayed by light emission and the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, only the second shutter portion 2295 is moved from the position before the displacement to the position after the displacement. In the second display area 2336 of the display device 2281 that is displaced to the position and whose second shutter portion 2295 is retracted to the post-displacement position and opened, a predetermined character is displayed. (Men image) is displayed, the first shutter portion 2293 is not displaced remains before the displacement position (see FIG. 24 (b).).

  Further, when the character “PUSH” of the first shutter portion 2293 is displayed again by light emission and the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the first shutter portion 2293 is The first display area 2334 of the display device 2281 is opened by being displaced (retracted) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, the character of a predetermined character (boy's image) is displayed as it is in the second display area 2336 as described above, and a new character (girls' image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 to produce an effect. (See FIG. 24 (c)).

  In addition, when the first display area 2334 is opened, a predetermined character (boy image) displayed in the second display area 2336 may be enlarged (see FIG. 24D). ).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is also desirable to employ the following control mechanism.

For example, FIG. 24A illustrates a state within the first operation effective period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) are The light emission display is performed only within a predetermined time which is the first operation effective period (for example, the light emission display is continued for 7 seconds).
Then, a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period (in the present embodiment, a non-detection state in which the detection piece 2279 by the press detection sensor 2277 is out of the detection region 2280 is detected). Then, the second shutter portion 2295 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (displaced to the state shown in FIG. 24B). The detection mechanism of the pressing operation is not particularly limited to the present embodiment. For example, when the detection piece 2279 is detected to be inserted into the detection area 2280, the pressing operation is detected. There may be a well-known sensor mechanism.

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the second shutter portion 2295 is not performed (the state shown in FIG. 24B is not obtained), and “PUSH”. It is assumed that the light emission display of the characters “is also ended and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the second shutter portion 2295 is forcibly displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 24B) simultaneously with the end of the first operation effective period. You may comprise.
Further, in the present embodiment, a form in which “PUSH” characters (translucent region 2305) of both the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are lit and displayed during the first operation effective period is illustrated. Although employed, only the letters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) on which the shutter portion is displaced (opened) may be displayed in a light-emitting manner.

FIG. 24B shows a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the letters “PUSH” (transparent) of the first shutter unit 2293 are illustrated. The light-emitting area 2305) displays light emission only within a predetermined time which is the second operation effective period (for example, light emission display is continued for 5 seconds). At this time, the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) of the second shutter portion 2295 that has been opened first are not lit and displayed.
When the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (the state shown in FIG. 24C). To be displaced.)

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced from the post-displacement position to the pre-displacement position without being displaced to the state of FIG. Returning, that is, the state of FIG. 24A is entered, and the light emission display of the characters “PUSH” is also terminated, and the predetermined effect is terminated.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced from the state of FIG. 24B simultaneously with the end of the second operation effective period (FIG. 24). You may comprise so that it may open | release like (c).

FIG. 24C illustrates a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is performed simultaneously with the end of the third period (for example, 4 seconds). finish. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” (the translucent area 2305) are not lit and displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of Fig.24 (a)).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, it is determined that the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state described in paragraph 0225 described later). In such a case, the effect of FIG. 24C is continued as it is, and when there is a high possibility of a loss (for example, a loss mode described in paragraph 0225 described later), the effect display of FIG. 24D is changed. It is also possible to configure, and the player will be interested in the unexpectedness of the change.
Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, when the next big hit gaming state is to be made, the effect image of FIG. If there is such a possibility, it is possible to display the effect image of FIG. Although details will be described in paragraph 0225, in both cases of shifting to the jackpot gaming state and the case of losing, the symbols are displayed in a predetermined manner after the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device for a predetermined period. (In the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state, it is displayed in a jackpot mode, and in the case of a loss, it is displayed in a lost mode.) The predetermined effect described above is an effect that is executed while the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol variation display device.

Note that a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) is provided between the above-described first operation effective period and the second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and the third period. .
Each period described above is not limitedly interpreted, and may be two or less periods, or may be provided with four or more periods, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 25 shows another example in the form of FIG. 24 described above. In FIG. 24, only the second shutter portion 2295 is first retracted from the position before displacement to the position after displacement, whereas in FIG. In the state of 24 (a), when a predetermined effect execution state is reached and the player depresses the operation member 2000, only the first shutter portion 2293 is first retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position first. In the first display area 2334, a predetermined character (girls image) is displayed (FIG. 25A). At this time, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced. When the player further presses the operation member 2000, the second shutter portion 2295 is displaced, and a predetermined character (male symbol) is displayed in the second display area 2336 (FIG. 25B). )). Moreover, the aspect shown in FIG.25 (c) is also possible.
Other configurations and operational effects are the same as those of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 23 and the embodiment shown in FIG.

  FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 show another example in the form of FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 described above, and the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are arranged in the horizontal direction in FIG. 24 and FIG. 26 and 27 differ in that the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are arranged in the vertical direction. Other configurations and operational effects are the same as those of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 1 to 23 and the embodiment shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 described above, and the description thereof is incorporated.

<Other embodiment 2>
The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 and the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of this embodiment (FIG. 28). Thru | or FIG. 31).

  For example, in the present embodiment, the movable effect component 2291 is configured by dividing the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 into four shutter portions. Each shutter unit is configured to be able to be opened and closed separately, and the letter “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) is applied to each shutter unit (see FIG. 28).

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29A, the upper right region in the drawing is the first shutter portion 2293, and the other three regions are the second shutter portion 2295. Each of the shutter portions is provided with characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) (see FIG. 28), and the characters “PUSH” emit light when the display device 2281 performs light emission display. Since it is displayed, the user is prompted to press the operation member 2000.
Then, when the operation member 2000 is pressed from the first position to the second position while the characters “PUSH” are displayed in a light-emitting manner, the three second shutter portions 2295 are respectively displaced from the pre-displacement position. Displace (retract) to position. A predetermined character (male image) is enlarged and displayed in the upper left and lower left second display areas 2336 and 2336 toward the drawing of the display device 2281 in which the respective shutter portions are retracted to the positions after the displacement and opened. In the lower right second display area 2336, a predetermined character (girls image) is displayed, and the first shutter portion 2293 is not displaced at the pre-displacement position (see FIG. 29A).

  Further, when the character “PUSH” of the first shutter portion 2293 is displayed again by light emission and the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the first shutter portion 2293 is It moves from the position before displacement to the position after displacement. As a result, all the display areas are opened, and the predetermined character (boy's image) is displayed as it is in the upper left and lower left second display areas 2336, but the upper right first display area 2334 and lower right In the second display area 2336, the character (girls image) displayed in a small size in the lower right second display area 2336 is displayed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 29D).

  Also in the present embodiment, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the embodiment of FIG.

For example, FIG. 28 illustrates a state within a first operation effective period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) are the first ones. (For example, in the present embodiment, all four “PUSH” characters (translucent region 2305) are continuously lit for 7 seconds).
When a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period, the three second shutter portions 2295 are displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (the state shown in FIG. 29A). Displace.)

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the second shutter portion 2295 is not performed (the state shown in FIG. 29A is not obtained), and “PUSH”. It is assumed that the light emission display of the characters “is also ended and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even if the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the second shutter portion 2295 is forcibly displaced (opened as shown in FIG. 29A) simultaneously with the end of the first operation effective period. You may comprise.
In the present embodiment, when the first operation effective period continues, all the characters “PUSH” of the first shutter unit 2293 and the three second shutter units 2295 (translucent region 2305). Is displayed in the figure, but only the letters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) on which the shutter portion is displaced (opened) may be displayed in a light emitting manner.

FIG. 29A illustrates a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the letters “PUSH” (transparent) of the first shutter unit 2293 are illustrated. The light-emitting area 2305) displays light emission only within a predetermined time which is the second operation effective period (for example, light emission display is continued for 5 seconds). At this time, the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) of the second shutter portion 2295 that has been opened first are not lit and displayed.
If the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within this second operation effective period (the detection of the detection piece 2279 passing through the detection area 2280 by the press detection sensor 2277), the first shutter 2293 is moved before displacement. It is displaced (opened) from the position to the position after displacement (displaced to the state of FIG. 29 (d)).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced from the post-displacement position to the pre-displacement position without being displaced to the state of FIG. Returning, that is, the state of FIG. 28 is entered, and the light emission display of the characters “PUSH” is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced from the state of FIG. 29A simultaneously with the end of the second operation effective period (FIG. 29). You may comprise so that it may open | release like (d).

FIG. 29D shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is performed simultaneously with the end of the third period (for example, 4 seconds). finish. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” (the translucent area 2305) are not lit and displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of FIG. 28).

  In addition, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed within the third period and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit game state), FIG. It is possible to continue the effect of d) and change the display to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will improve the interest in the unexpectedness of the change. .

Note that a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) is provided between the above-described first operation effective period and the second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and the third period. .
Each period described above is not limitedly interpreted, and may be two or less periods, or may be provided with four or more periods, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 29 (b), an embodiment in which the upper left and lower left regions are the first shutter portion 2293 and the other two regions are the second shutter portion 2295 is shown. ing. Each of the shutter portions is provided with a character “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) (see FIG. 28), and the characters “PUSH” emit light when the display device 2281 performs light emission display. Since it is displayed, the user is prompted to press the operation member 2000.
Further, even in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 28 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 28, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are illustrated as the second shutter portion 2295 in the drawing, but the upper left and the lower left will be described below instead of the first shutter portion 2293.
That is, in the present embodiment, a predetermined effect execution state is set, and the characters “PUSH” (translucent areas) of each shutter unit (the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295) are lit and displayed. When the operating member 2000 is pushed down from the first position to the second position, the two second shutter portions 2295 on the upper right side and the lower right side are displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position respectively. evacuate. A predetermined character (male image) is enlarged and displayed in the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336 and 2336 in the drawing of the display device 2281 in which the respective shutter portions are retracted to the positions after displacement and opened. Thus, the first shutter portion 2293 is not displaced at the pre-displacement position (see FIG. 29B).

Further, when the character “PUSH” of the first shutter portions 2293 and 2293 is again displayed by light emission and the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the first upper left first The shutter unit 2293 is displaced from the position before displacement to the position after displacement. Accordingly, it is assumed that the character (girls image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 at the upper left, and the character (boy image) is displayed in the second display area 2336 at the upper right and the lower right. (See FIG. 29 (e)).
When the player presses down the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 and 2293 are displaced from the positions before the displacement from the state of FIG. It may be displaced to the rear position. As a result, all display areas are opened. For example, the character (girls image) is enlarged and displayed in the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336, and the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334 have character ( (Men's image) may be displayed. That is, the second shutter portion 2295 that is the same as the display form of FIG. 29D and exists at the upper left and lower left as viewed in the drawing of FIG. If it is assumed that the first shutter portion 2293 located at the lower left is replaced, a similar form can be provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the shutter portion may be displaced and the display form may be displayed. In FIG. 29F, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is not displaced, and the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and the first display area 2334 is opened. A new character (girls image) is displayed.

  Also in the present embodiment, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the embodiment of FIGS. 24 and 29A. In addition, about the 1st operation effective period, description of FIG. 28 is used.

FIG. 29B illustrates a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the letters “PUSH” (translucency) of the first shutter unit 2293 are illustrated. The area 2305) displays the light emission only within a predetermined time which is the second operation effective period (for example, the light emission display is continued for 5 seconds). At this time, the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) of the second shutter portion 2295 that has been opened first are not lit and displayed.
When the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, for example, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (FIG. 29 ( It is displaced to the state of e).

Further, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced from the post-displacement position to the pre-displacement position without being displaced to the state of FIG. Returning, that is, the state of FIG. 28 is entered, and the light emission display of the characters “PUSH” is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced from the state of FIG. 29B simultaneously with the end of the second operation effective period ( You may comprise so that it may open | release like FIG.29 (e).

FIG. 29 (e) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is performed simultaneously with the end of the third period (for example, 4 seconds). finish. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” (the translucent area 2305) are not lit and displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of FIG. 28).

  In addition, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed within the third period and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit game state), FIG. It is possible to continue the production of e) and change the display to another production display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will improve the interest in the unexpectedness of the change. . In the present embodiment, the third period has been described with reference to FIG. 29E. However, the third period may be configured as shown in FIGS. 29D and 29F.

Note that a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) is provided between the above-described first operation effective period and the second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and the third period. .
Each period described above is not limitedly interpreted, and may be two or less periods, or may be provided with four or more periods, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 29C, the upper left and upper right regions in the drawing are the first shutter portions 2293 and 2293, and the other two regions are the second shutter portions 2295 and 2295. The form is illustrated. Each of the shutter portions is provided with a character “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) (see FIG. 28), and the characters “PUSH” emit light when the display device 2281 performs light emission display. Since it is displayed, the user is prompted to press the operation member 2000.
Further, even in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 28 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 28, only the upper right side is illustrated as the first shutter unit 2293 and the other three regions are illustrated as the second shutter unit 2295, but the upper left and the upper right are illustrated as the first shutter unit. 2293, the lower left and lower right will be described below in place of the second shutter portion.
That is, in the present embodiment, a predetermined effect execution state is set, and the characters “PUSH” (translucent areas) of each shutter unit (the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295) are lit and displayed. When the operating member 2000 is pushed down from the first position to the second position when the operation member 2000 is in the state shown in FIG. 28, the two second shutter portions 2295 at the lower left and the lower right as shown in FIG. Displace (retract) from position to post-displacement position. A predetermined character (male image) is enlarged and displayed in the second display areas 2336 and 2336 at the lower left and lower right as viewed from the drawing of the display device 2281 in which the respective shutter portions are retracted to the positions after displacement and opened. Thus, the first shutter portion 2293 is not displaced at the pre-displacement position (see FIG. 29B).
Further, when the character “PUSH” of the first shutter portions 2293 and 2293 is again displayed by light emission, and the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, in FIG. The upper right first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the position before displacement to the position after displacement. At this time, a new character (girls image) is displayed in the lower left second display area 2336 in FIG. 29C, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right second display area 2336 are displayed. The character (boy's image) is enlarged and displayed (that is, the state shown in FIG. 29 (f)).
In the second display area 2336 at the lower left and the second display area 2336 at the lower right, the character of the male image is displayed as in FIG. 29C, and a new character (girls) is displayed in the first display area 2334 at the upper right. Image) may be displayed (see FIG. 29G).
Further, when the player presses down the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 may be displaced from the position before displacement to the position after displacement. At this time, a new character (girls image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 in the upper left, and the character of the boy's drawing is enlarged and displayed as it is in the second display area 2336 in the lower left and lower right ( (See FIG. 29 (h)).

  Also in this embodiment, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the embodiments of FIGS. 24, 29 (a) and 29 (b). In addition, about the 1st operation effective period, description of FIG. 28 is used.

FIG. 29C illustrates a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the letters “PUSH” (translucency) of the first shutter unit 2293 are illustrated. The area 2305) displays the light emission only within a predetermined time which is the second operation effective period (for example, the light emission display is continued for 5 seconds). At this time, the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) of the second shutter portion 2295 that has been opened first are not lit and displayed.
When the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, for example, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (FIG. 29 ( Displaced to the state of g)).

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced from the post-displacement position to the pre-displacement position without being displaced to the state of FIG. Returning, that is, the state of FIG. 28 is entered, and the light emission display of the characters “PUSH” is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced from the state of FIG. 29C simultaneously with the end of the second operation effective period ( You may comprise so that it may open | release like FIG.29 (g).

FIG. 29 (g) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is performed simultaneously with the end of the third period (for example, 4 seconds). finish. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” (the translucent area 2305) are not lit and displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of FIG. 28).

  In addition, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed within the third period and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit game state), FIG. It is possible to continue the effect of g) and change the display to another effect display when there is a high possibility of losing, and the player will be more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. . Although the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 29 (g) as a form indicating the third period, the form of FIGS. 29 (f) and (h) may be employed.

Note that a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) is provided between the above-described first operation effective period and the second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and the third period. .
Each period described above is not limitedly interpreted, and may be two or less periods, or may be provided with four or more periods, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

Further, FIG. 30A includes a first shutter portion 2293 in the lower left and upper right regions, and a second shutter portion 2295 in the upper left and lower right regions. The second shutter area 2295 in the upper left and lower right retreats from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position to open the second display areas 2336 and 2336, and different character images (male image and female image) in the two areas. ) Shows an embodiment in which each is displayed.
Also in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 28 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 28, the second shutter portion 2295 is illustrated in the upper left and lower left as viewed in the figure, but in the present embodiment, the lower left is replaced with the first shutter portion 2293 and will be described below.
Then, when the player is prompted by the characters “PUSH” displayed on the first shutter portion 2293 to emit light and presses down the operation member 2000, then the lower left first shutter portion 2293 and the upper right first shutter portion 2293 are operated. It is assumed that the shutter portion of one shutter portion 2293 is displaced to the post-displacement position so that all the areas are opened and the enlarged male image character and female image character are displayed in the entire area ( (See FIG. 30 (b)).
Further, only the lower left first shutter portion 2293 remains at the position before displacement, and the upper right first shutter portion 2293 also retracts to the position after displacement, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right second display area 2336. It is also possible to display a female image character that is enlarged over (see FIG. 30C).
Further, only the upper right first shutter portion 2293 remains at the position before displacement, and the lower left first shutter portion 2293 also retracts to the position after displacement, and extends over the lower left first display area 2334 and the upper left second display area 2336. An enlarged male image character may be displayed (see FIG. 30D).

  Also in this embodiment, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the embodiment of FIGS. In addition, about the 1st operation effective period, description of FIG. 28 is used. In addition, about the 1st operation effective period, description of FIG. 28 is used.

FIG. 30A illustrates a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the letters “PUSH” (translucency) of the first shutter portion 2293 are illustrated. The area 2305) displays the light emission only within a predetermined time which is the second operation effective period (for example, the light emission display is continued for 5 seconds). At this time, the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) of the second shutter portion 2295 that has been opened first are not lit and displayed.
Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, for example, the upper right and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. (It changes to the state of FIG.30 (b).).

If the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the second shutter portion 2295 is not moved from the post-displacement position to the pre-displacement position without being displaced to the state shown in FIG. Returning, that is, the state of FIG. 28 is entered, and the light emission display of the characters “PUSH” is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, at the same time as the end of the second operation effective period, from the state of FIG. You may comprise so that 2293 may be displaced (open | release like FIG.30 (b)).

FIG. 30B shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is performed simultaneously with the end of the third period (for example, 4 seconds). finish. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” (the translucent area 2305) are not lit and displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of FIG. 28).

  In addition, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed within the third period and the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player (for example, the jackpot game state), the game is continued as shown in FIG. It is possible to continue the effect of b) and change the display to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will improve the interest in the unexpectedness of the change. . In the present embodiment, the third period is described with reference to FIG. 30B. However, the third period may be configured as shown in FIGS. 30C and 30D.

Note that a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) is provided between the above-described first operation effective period and the second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and the third period. .
Each period described above is not limitedly interpreted, and may be two or less periods, or may be provided with four or more periods, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 31A shows an embodiment in which the first shutter portion 2293 is provided in each of the lower left, upper left, and upper right regions, and the second shutter portion 2295 is provided only in the lower right region.
Also in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 28 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 28, the upper left and the lower left are illustrated as the second shutter portion 2295 in the drawing, but in the present embodiment, the upper left and the lower left will be described below instead of the first shutter portion 2293.
First, only the second shutter portion 2295 in the lower right is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and the character of the male image is displayed in the second display area 2336.
Then, when the player is prompted by the “PUSH” image displayed in the first display area 2334 and presses the operation member 2000, the three first shutter portions 2293 are retracted to the post-displacement position and the first. The display area 2334 is also opened. In the state where all the display areas are open, the enlarged male image character is enlarged and displayed in the display area (see FIG. 31B).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 31A, the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position and the lower left first display area 2334 is also opened, and the lower left first display area 2334 and the lower right first display area 2334 are opened. The character of the male image may be displayed over the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 31C).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 31A, the upper right first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position, and the upper right first display area 2334 is also opened, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right first display area 2334 are opened. The character of the male image may be displayed over the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 31D).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 31A, the upper left first shutter part 2293 and the lower right second shutter part 2295 are retracted to the post-displacement position, and the upper left first display area 2334 and the lower right first The second display area 2336 may also be opened, and a female image character may be displayed in the newly opened first display area 2334 (see FIG. 31E).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 31A, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 and 2293 and the lower right second shutter portion 2295 are retracted to the post-displacement positions and the first display area 2334 and the second The display area 2336 may also be opened, and a female image character may be displayed across the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 31F).
Similarly, after the state of FIG. 31A, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 and 2293 and the lower right second shutter portion 2295 are retracted to the post-displacement positions, and the first display area 2334 and the second The display area 2336 is also opened to display a female image character in the upper left first display area 2334, and the lower left first display area 2334 is different from the character displayed in the lower right second display area 2336. The character of the boy's image may be displayed (see FIG. 31 (g)).

  Also in the present embodiment, it is desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the embodiments of FIGS. In addition, about the 1st operation effective period, description of FIG. 28 is used. In addition, about the 1st operation effective period, description of FIG. 28 is used.

FIG. 31A illustrates a state within the second operation effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the letters “PUSH” (translucent property) of the first shutter unit 2293 are illustrated. The area 2305) displays the light emission only within a predetermined time which is the second operation effective period (for example, the light emission display is continued for 5 seconds). At this time, the characters “PUSH” (translucent region 2305) of the second shutter portion 2295 that has been opened first are not lit and displayed.
When a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second operation effective period, for example, the upper right, upper left, and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are displaced (opened) from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. (Displaced to the state of FIG. 31B).

If the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the second operation effective period, the second shutter portion 2295 is not displaced from the post-displacement position to the pre-displacement position without being displaced to the state of FIG. Returning, that is, the state of FIG. 28 is entered, and the light emission display of the characters “PUSH” is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first upper right, upper left, and lower left are forcibly started from the state of FIG. 31A simultaneously with the end of the second operation effective period. You may comprise so that the shutter part 2293 may be displaced (open | release like FIG.31 (b)).

FIG. 31 (b) shows a state within an effect execution period (third period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect is performed simultaneously with the end of the third period (for example, 4 seconds). finish. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” (the translucent area 2305) are not lit and displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the third period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of FIG. 28).

  Further, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed within the third period, it is determined that the game state (for example, the jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is shifted to FIG. 31 ( It is possible to continue the effect of b) and change the display to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will improve the interest in the unexpectedness of the change. . Although the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 31 (b) as a mode indicating the third period, it may be configured as FIGS. 31 (c)-(g).

Note that a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) is provided between the above-described first operation effective period and the second operation effective period, and between the second operation effective period and the third period. .
Each period described above is not limitedly interpreted, and may be two or less periods, or may be provided with four or more periods, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

<Other embodiment 3>
The display area of the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can also be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of this embodiment (see FIG. 32).

The display device (LCD) 2281 includes a first display area 2334 and a second display area 2336 that can display a predetermined effect image toward the first portion (pressing portion 2199) of the operation member 2000, The first display area 2334 can display an operation prompting image (such as a character “PUSH” or a hand image) that is an image prompting the player to operate the operation member 2000, and the second display area 2336 can display A predetermined effect image (specific image) such as a character different from the operation prompt image can be displayed, and the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 constituting the operation member 2000 is at least a part of the first display region 2334. , And at least a part of the second display area 2336. In the present embodiment, in the first display area 2334, a predetermined effect image such as a character can be displayed together with the operation prompting image as in the second display area 2336.
The operation prompting image is not particularly limited to the illustrated form, and may be any image that can prompt the player to perform the pressing operation. Further, the operation prompting image may be an image of a predetermined color (blue, red, yellow, etc.), for example, and the characters “PUSH” may be displayed in various colors. Moreover, the mode of the character “PUSH” is not limited to one type, and can be displayed in various modes.

  Therefore, according to the other embodiment 3 of the present case, for example, although not shown, when the predetermined effect execution state is reached, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are moved to the pre-displacement position. Is moved (opened) to a post-displacement position, an operation prompting image (such as “PUSH” characters and hand images) is displayed in the first display area 2334, and a predetermined effect image such as a character is displayed in the second display area 2336. (Specific image) is displayed.

That is, according to the third embodiment of the present case, an area for displaying an effect image (operation prompt image) that prompts (guides) the player to operate the operation member 2000 on the display device (LCD) 2281, a character, and the like The display area of the effect image can be displayed separately. In addition, it is in a state where it is not displayed on the display device (LCD) 2281 at normal times (see FIG. 32A). Note that a predetermined image may be displayed at normal times.
When the display device (LCD) 2281 is energized, an operation prompting image (such as “PUSH” characters and hand images) is displayed in the first display area 2334, and characters and the like are displayed in the second display area 2336. The predetermined effect image is displayed (see FIG. 32B).
Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the operation area (the operation area where the operation member 2000 is pressed) and to cover the effect image such as the character displayed in the second display area 2336 with the player's hand when operating. This makes it possible to easily provide the player with the desired effect image.
Further, since the operation member 2000 can be operated while visually recognizing the effect image (operation prompt image) that prompts the operation through the pressing portion (first portion) 2199 of the operation member 2000, the player himself operates ( (Pressing part 2199 is pressed) can be given a strong feeling and the fun of the game is improved.
Further, the positional relationship between the operation prompt image and the predetermined effect image, the region relationship occupied by each, and the like are not particularly limited and can be changed within the scope of the present invention. Further, a plurality of either or both of the operation prompting image and the predetermined effect image may be displayed.
Note that the operation prompting image and the predetermined effect image may be displayed so as to overlap in the vertical direction as long as substantially the entire predetermined effect image can be visually recognized.

  In addition, the first display area 2334 or the image of the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 may be changed after the first display area 2334 is pressed, and the design can be changed as appropriate (FIG. 32C). (See (d).)

  In addition, when employ | adopting the structure of other Embodiment 3 of this case mentioned above, it is also possible not to provide the movable production | presentation part (shutter) 2291. FIG.

<Other embodiment 4>
The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 and the display device (LCD) 2281 of this embodiment can be configured as follows, and can be adopted as another embodiment of this embodiment (FIG. 33). reference).

The movable effect component (shutter) 2291 is configured to be divided into a plurality of parts, and the movable effect component 2291 (first shutter portion) disposed at a position corresponding to the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336. 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295) are located at a first specific position (position before displacement (position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 33A)) covering the display area (the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336). In this case, the display device (LCD) 2281 has easy-to-view regions (openings 2294 and 2296) that allow the display regions (first display region 2334 and second display region 2336) to be visible.
An operation prompting image can be displayed in the first display area 2334, and the operation prompting image can be easily viewed when the movable effect component 2291 is positioned at the position before displacement (opening). Parts 2294, 2296).

First, in FIG. 33, the movable effect component 2291 employs a two-split configuration of a first shutter portion 2293 and a second shutter portion 2295 as in the present embodiment. An opening 2294 and 2296 are formed in each shutter portion, and an embodiment in which a display device 2281 (LCD) disposed below through the openings 2294 and 2296 is visible is shown ( (See FIG. 33 (a)). In this embodiment, the openings 2294 and 2296 are provided with a transparent plate (window), but even a simple opening is within the scope of the present invention.
Then, from the state shown in FIG. 33A, from the first specific position (pre-displacement position) where only the second shutter portion 2295 covers the second display area 2336, the second display area 2336 is more than the first specific position. Is retracted to the second specific position (post-displacement position, the position indicated by the phantom line in FIG. 33A), which is an open position with a small area covering the area, and the second display area 2336 of the display device 2281 (LCD) A predetermined character image (boy image) is displayed (see FIG. 33B).
At the same time, an operation prompt image “PUSH” is displayed in the first display area 2334, and this image can be viewed by the player through the opening 2294 of the first shutter portion 2293 located at the position before displacement. (See FIG. 33B).
Therefore, the player confirms the “PUSH” operation prompt image displayed in the first display area 2334 and presses the operation member 2000.
After the operation member 2000 is operated, the first shutter portion 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and a character image (girls) different from the character displayed in the second display region 2336 is displayed in the first display region 2334. (Image) may be displayed (see FIG. 33C), or a character image (boy image) enlarged over the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 may be displayed (FIG. 33D). )reference.).

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is also desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the case of FIG.

For example, FIG. 33B illustrates a state within the first operation effective period (first period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the image display of “PUSH” indicates that the first operation is effective. It is displayed only within a predetermined time period (for example, it is continuously displayed for 7 seconds).
Then, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (FIG. 33 (c) or (d)). Displace to the state.)

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the first shutter portion 2293 is not performed (the state shown in FIG. 33C or FIG. 33D is not obtained). ), The display of the characters “PUSH” is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced simultaneously with the end of the first operation effective period (as shown in FIG. 33C or FIG. 33D). (Open).

FIG. 33 (c) shows a state within an effect execution period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect ends simultaneously with the end of the second period. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the characters “PUSH” are not displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of Fig.33 (a)).

  Further, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed during the second period, the game state is determined to be advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit game state), as shown in FIG. It is possible to continue the effect of c) and change the display to the effect display of FIG. 33 (d) when there is a high possibility of losing, and the player is more interested in the unexpectedness of the change. Will be allowed to.

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and the second period.
Each of the above-described periods is not limitedly interpreted, and three or more periods may be provided, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

FIG. 34 shows an example of another form of FIG. 33. In this form, unlike the form of FIG. 33 (b), only the first shutter portion 2293 is moved from the pre-displacement position when a predetermined effect execution state is reached. When retracted to the post-displacement position, a predetermined character image (girls image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 of the display device (LCD) 2281. At the same time, a “PUSH” operation prompting image is displayed in the second display area 2336, and this image can be viewed by the player through the opening 2296 of the second shutter portion 2295 (see FIG. 34A). .) That is, the image displayed in the display area (the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336) when the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are displaced is the display mode of FIG. Is the opposite.
Thereafter, when the player prompted by the “PUSH” operation prompt image displayed in the second display area 2336 performs the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 (after detecting the pressing operation of the operation member 2000), The second shutter portion 2295 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and a character image (boy image) different from the character displayed in the first display region 2334 is displayed in the second display region 2336 (FIG. 34B). reference). In addition, a character image (girls image) enlarged over the first display area 2334 and the second display area 2336 may be displayed (see FIG. 34C).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 show another example in the form of FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 described above, and the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are arranged in the horizontal direction in FIG. 33 and FIG. In contrast, FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are different in that the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction from the player side to the gaming machine side). Other configurations and operational effects are the same as those of the present embodiment and the above-described embodiments of FIGS. 33 and 34, and the description thereof is incorporated. In FIG. 35, the openings 2294 and 2296 are provided with windows having translucency.

  In the form shown in FIGS. 37 to 40, the shutter part is divided into a first shutter part 2293 and a second shutter part 2295 as in the form shown in FIGS. Are provided with openings 2294 and 2296, and each of the openings 2294 and 2296 is provided with a light-transmitting window, and an effect image by the display device 2281 can be visually recognized through the window. Note that it is within the scope of the present invention to provide only a simple opening without providing a window having translucency.

First, FIG. 37 illustrates a form in which the upper right region in the drawing is the first shutter portion 2293 and the other three regions are the second shutter portion 2295.
Then, when the predetermined effect execution state is reached, each of the three second shutter portions 2295 is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, and an image of “PUSH” is displayed in the first display area 2334. An image is easily displayed from the opening (window) 2294 of the first shutter portion 2295. Furthermore, in FIG. 38A, the character of the boy's image is displayed over the two second display areas 2336 and 2336 at the upper left and the lower left, and the character of the girl's image is displayed in the second display area 2336 at the lower right.
When the player is prompted by the “PUSH” image displayed in the first display area 2334 and depresses the operation member 2000, the first shutter unit 2293 is also retracted to the post-displacement position, and the first display is performed. All of the area 2334 and the three second display areas 2336 are opened, and the male image character and the female image character are displayed side by side (see FIG. 38D).

FIG. 38 (b) shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 37, similarly to FIG. 38 (a).
Even in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 37 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 37, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are illustrated as the second shutter portion 2295 in the drawing, but in the present embodiment, the upper right and the lower right are the second shutter portion 2295, and the lower left. The upper left portion will be described below in place of the first shutter portion 2293.
In FIG. 38B, when the predetermined effect execution state is reached, the two second shutter portions 2295 are retracted from the first specific position (pre-displacement position) to the second specific position (post-displacement position). Two second display areas 2336 and 2336 are opened, and a character (boy image) enlarged over the two areas is displayed. At this time, the operation prompting image “PUSH” is displayed in each of the first display areas 2334 and 2334, and each image is easily visible through the opening (window) 2294.
Then, when the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the first shutter portion 2293 at the upper left is moved before being urged by the “PUSH” images in the first display areas 2334 and 2334. Displace from position to post-displacement position. At this time, in the upper left first display area 2334, a new character (girls image) is displayed instead of the “PUSH” image, and in the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336, 2336 Similarly, the character of the boy's drawing is displayed as it is (see FIG. 38 (e)).
38B, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 and 2293 in FIG. 38B are displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position, respectively, and all display areas are opened. The character of the male image and the character of the female image are displayed in the entire display area (that is, the state shown in FIG. 38 (d)).
Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the first shutter portion 2293 at the upper left remains in the position before displacement, and the “PUSH” operation prompt image displayed in the display area is easily visible from the window. The first shutter portion 2293 may be retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. In this case, a character (girls image) may be displayed in the first display area 2334. .

FIG. 38 (c) shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 37, as in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b).
Even in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 37 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 37, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are illustrated as the second shutter portion 2295 in the drawing, but in this embodiment, the lower left and lower right are the second shutter portion 2295, and the upper left. The upper right portion will be described below in place of the first shutter portion 2293.
In FIG. 38C, when the predetermined effect execution state is reached, the operation prompt images “PUSH” are displayed in the state where the upper left and upper right first shutter portions 2293 are located at the pre-displacement positions. At the same time, the second shutter portions 2295 and 2295 in the lower left and lower right are retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position to open the second display areas 2336 and 2336, and the character ( An embodiment in which a (male image) is displayed is shown. The operation prompting image of each “PUSH” is easily visible through the opening (window) 2294.
Then, when the player who is prompted by the display of the “PUSH” operation prompt image in the first display areas 2334 and 2334 operates to depress the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, in FIG. The upper right first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the position before displacement to the position after displacement. At this time, a new character (girls image) is displayed in the lower left second display area 2336 in FIG. 38C, and the upper right and lower right second display areas 2336 and 2336 in FIG. In FIG. 38, the character of the boy's drawing is enlarged and displayed (that is, the state shown in FIG. 38 (f)).
In the lower left and lower right second display areas 2336 and 2336, the character of the male image is displayed as in FIG. 38C, and a new character (girls image) is displayed in the upper right first display area 2334. It is good also as a thing (refer FIG.38 (g)).
When the operation member 2000 is pressed from the first position to the second position, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. At this time, a new character (girls image) is displayed in the first display area 2334 in the upper left, and the character of the boy's drawing is displayed as it is in the second display areas 2336 and 2336 in the lower left and lower right. It can also be assumed (see FIG. 38 (h)).

Moreover, Fig.39 (a) shows one Embodiment expanded from the state of FIG. 37 similarly to Fig.38 (a)-(c).
Even in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 37 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 37, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are illustrated as the second shutter portion 2295 in the drawing, but in the present embodiment, the upper left and lower right are the second shutter portion 2295, and the lower left. The upper right portion will be described below in place of the first shutter portion 2293.
In FIG. 39A, when the predetermined effect execution state is reached, the upper left second shutter portion 2295 and the lower right second shutter portion 2295 are retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position for the second display. Areas 2336 and 2336 are opened, and images of different characters (a boy's image and a girl's image) are displayed in the two areas, respectively, and the lower left first shutter part 2293 and the upper right first shutter part An embodiment in which an operation prompting image of “PUSH” is displayed on 2293 through each opening 2294 is shown.
When the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the player is prompted to display the “PUSH” operation prompt image visible from the opening 2294 of the first shutter portion 2293. All the shutter portions of the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 are displaced to the post-displacement positions, and all the two first display regions 2334 and the two second display regions 2336 are opened. In addition, a male image character and a female image character are displayed over the entire area (see FIG. 39B).
Further, only the lower left first shutter portion 2293 remains at the position before displacement, and the upper right first shutter portion 2293 also retracts to the position after displacement, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right second display area 2336. It is also possible to display a character of a female image that is enlarged over (see FIG. 39C).
Further, only the upper right first shutter portion 2293 remains at the position before displacement, and the lower left first shutter portion 2293 also retracts to the position after displacement, and extends over the upper left second display area 2336 and the lower left first display area 2334. An enlarged male image character may be displayed (see FIG. 39D).

FIG. 40A shows an embodiment developed from the state of FIG. 37 as in FIGS. 38A to 38C and FIG.
Even in the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 37 is used as the state before shifting to the predetermined effect execution state. In FIG. 37, the upper left, lower left, and lower right are illustrated as the second shutter portion 2295 in the drawing, but in this embodiment, only the lower right is the second shutter portion 2295, and the lower left and upper left. The upper right and the lower right will be described below in place of the first shutter portion 2293.
In FIG. 40A, the lower right second display area in which only the lower right second shutter portion 2295 is retracted from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position and opened when the predetermined effect execution state is reached. A character of a boy's image is displayed at 2336, an image of “PUSH” is displayed in each of the first display areas 2334 at the upper right, upper left and lower left, and the opening portion of each first shutter portion 2293 ( Windows) 2294 is visible.
When the player presses the operation member 2000 from the first position to the second position, the player is prompted to display the “PUSH” operation prompt image visible from the opening 2294 of the first shutter portion 2293. Thereafter, all the shutter portions of the remaining first shutter portion 2293 are retracted to the post-displacement positions, and all the display areas 2334 and 2336 are opened. In the state where all the display areas are opened, the enlarged male image character is enlarged and displayed in the display area (see FIG. 40B).
After the state shown in FIG. 40A, the lower left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position and the first display area 2334 is also opened, and the lower left first display area 2334 and the lower right first display area 2334 are opened. The character of the male image may be displayed over the two display areas 2336 (see FIG. 40C).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 40A, the upper right first shutter section 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position and the upper right second display area 2336 is also opened, and the upper right first display area 2334 and the lower right area are opened. The character of the male image may be displayed over the second display area 2336 (see FIG. 40D).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 40A, the upper left first shutter portion 2293 is retracted to the post-displacement position, and the lower right first display area 2334 and the upper left first display area 2334 are also opened. A character of a female image may be displayed in the opened first display area 2334 at the upper left (see FIG. 40E).
In addition, after the state of FIG. 40A, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are retracted to the positions after displacement, and the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334 are opened, and the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334 are opened. The character of the female image may be displayed over one display area 2334 (see FIG. 40F).
Similarly, after the state of FIG. 40A, the upper left and lower left first shutter portions 2293 are retracted to the positions after displacement, and the upper left and lower left first display areas 2334 are also opened, and the upper left first display. A character in a female image is displayed in the area 2334, and a character in a male image different from the character displayed in the second display area 2336 in the lower right is displayed in the second display area 2336 in the lower left. Good (see FIG. 40 (g)).

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is also desirable to employ the following control mechanism as in the case of FIG.

For example, FIG. 40A illustrates a state within a first operation effective period (first period) during execution of a predetermined effect, and an image of “PUSH” indicates the first operation effective period. Is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, it is continuously displayed for 7 seconds).
When a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the first operation effective period, the first shutter portion 2293 is displaced from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position (displaced to the state shown in FIG. 40B). .)

In addition, when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected within the first operation effective period, the displacement operation of the first shutter portion 2293 is not performed (the state shown in FIG. 40B is not obtained), and “PUSH” is set. Display of the image "" is also ended, and the predetermined effect is ended.
Even when the pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is not detected, the first shutter portion 2293 is forcibly displaced (released as shown in FIG. 40B) simultaneously with the end of the first operation effective period. You may comprise.

FIG. 40B shows a state within the effect effective period (second period) during execution of the predetermined effect, and the predetermined effect ends at the same time as the end of the second period. When the predetermined effect ends, the first shutter portion 2293 and the second shutter portion 2295 return to the state shown in FIG. At this time, the image of “PUSH” is not displayed.
If a pressing operation of the operation member 2000 is detected within the second period, the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, and the first shutter unit 2293 and the second shutter unit 2295 are displaced from the post-displacement positions. You may make it displace to the front position (return to the state of FIG. 37).

  In addition, when it is determined that the operation member 2000 is pressed in the second period, it is determined that the game state (for example, the big hit game state) advantageous to the player will be shifted to FIG. It is possible to continue the effect of b) and change the display to another effect display when the possibility of losing is high, and the player will improve the interest in the unexpectedness of the change. .

It is assumed that there is a predetermined interval (for example, about 1 second) between the above-described first operation effective period and the second period.
Each of the above-described periods is not limitedly interpreted, and three or more periods may be provided, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.
"Third embodiment"

41 to 98 show a third embodiment.
<Schematic configuration of the entire gaming machine>
The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a game board 1 that is surrounded by a guide rail (outer rail 36, inner rail 37) and has a rolling area (for example, a game area 1p) in which a game ball can flow down. A main body frame 2 and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be visually recognized are provided, and are supported by the main body frame 2 so as to be rotatable in front of the main body frame 2 (player side). A front frame 3 and a light guide plate 1031 that is detachably attached to the back side of the game board 1 and displays a predetermined image by light emission. A back box 1055 on which an object, a light emitting effect, etc. are disposed.
In the present embodiment, the outer rail 36 is provided on the game board, but this is merely expressed in this way for explanation, and is originally configured integrally with the main body frame 2. Specifically, the outer rail 36 is provided along a main body frame opening of a main body frame base plate (not shown). When the game board 1 is detachably attached to the back surface of the main body frame 2, the outer rail 36 is A guide rail in which the inner rails 37 are arranged to face each other along the inner side of the rail 36 is configured.
In the present embodiment, an “act” means an effect device that produces an effect by moving or emitting light.

  The back box 1055 is directly attached to the back side of the game board 1 via the light guide plate 1031. The back box 1055 is provided on a rear frame (not shown) that is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 attached to the back side of the game board 1. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of repair and inspection, it may be attached via a rear frame so that it can be easily separated from the main body frame 2.

  In the figure, reference numeral 4 denotes a display device for performing a predetermined effect display. In the present embodiment, the display device 4 is detachably attached to a rear frame (not shown). The display device 4 may be detachably provided on the back side of the back box 1055.

  The display mode of the display device 4 is controlled by the sub-control board based on a command from the main control board. For example, in the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is assumed as the display device 4. The display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display as long as it can display a predetermined image effect. For example, a cathode ray tube including a cathode ray tube (CRT), a dot LED (Light Emitting Diode), a segment LED, and an EL (Electronic Luminescent). Further, it may be made of plasma or the like.

  The game board 1 and the back box 1055 are provided with openings 1h and 1055h in which the display mode displayed on the display device 4 can be visually recognized. A game area 1p in which a game ball can roll down is formed over the area including the opening 1h.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6, and in this state, the main body frame 2 is attached to the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. It is rotatably supported. In the present embodiment, the main body frame 2 includes a speaker 10c.

  The front frame 3 includes various front frame constituent members. The front frame constituent members include the transparent plate unit 7, the dish unit 8, the operation unit 9, the speakers 10a and 10b, and various decorative members that give light effects (top There are a decoration 14, a right decoration member 15, a left decoration member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained.

  The transparent plate unit 7 is composed of one or a plurality of transparent plate members (for example, glass materials) and the like, and a front frame opening 3h (window) provided in a front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 Portion) is detachably attached from the back surface side (back surface side) of the front frame base plate 3a, and the front surface (front surface) of the game board 1 in a state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2. ) Side and the surface (front surface) side is covered.

  The tray unit 8 is provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls and the lower side of the upper tray 17. For example, the lower tray 17 can store game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. A dish 18 is provided.

  Further, on the back surface of the back box 1055 (see FIG. 48), a main control board (not shown) is provided in a state where the opening 1055h is avoided and accommodated in the case 28.

Although not particularly limited, for example, the main control board is connected to the sub control board and the dispensing / launching control board via the relay board 32 (see FIG. 48).
In this case, the sub-control board performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to various commands supplied from the main control board, control related to the sound generated from the speakers 10a to 10c, effect control of various accessories, It controls various LEDs used for various accessories and decorative members. Further, a launching device 26, a payout device for paying out game balls, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control board. Further, for example, a sub-relay board that transfers signals to the sub-control board, a sub-ROM relay board that stores a program related to game effects, a power supply board that supplies power, and the like are also provided.

  In addition, the rear frame in which the back box 1055 is disposed has a ball tank 47 for storing game balls to be paid out as, for example, rental balls or prize balls, and a plurality of game balls rolling continuously from the ball tank 47. A rail unit (not shown) that flows down, a payout device (not shown) that can be continued to the lower end of the rail unit, and a ball payout passage that supplies game balls paid out from the payout device to the upper plate 17 (Illustration omitted) etc. are arranged continuously.

  In addition, since this invention which concerns on 3rd embodiment has the characteristic in the following components, it demonstrates focusing on the characteristic part.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
The game board 1 has a plurality of passage areas (general winning openings 1013, a prize winning hole 1013, a game nail and a game ball rolling down the game area on the front surface of a game board body (panel body) 1a made of a transparent acrylic panel or the like. A start winning opening 1009, a large winning opening 1011), a stage 1001, and the like are arranged (see FIG. 44).
Various game members arranged on the front surface of the game board main body (panel main body) 1a are not particularly limited to the present embodiment and can be changed in design as appropriate.

  The stage 1001, which is provided on the base plate 1000 arranged along the opening 1h, enters the game ball that has been rolling down the game area 1p from the warp entrance 1007 arranged in the game area 1p, It is a member that rolls the game ball entered from the warp entrance 1007 to the left and right in the substantially central region of the game board 1 and then returns it to the game region 1p, and is not limited to the illustrated embodiment. The stage can be appropriately changed according to the embodiment.

In the present embodiment, a stage back member 1005 is provided on the back side of the stage 1001 so as to be arranged with a slight height in the vertical direction relative to the rolling surface 1003 of the stage 1001. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the light guide plate 1031 is disposed on the back side of the game board 1, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 1003 of the stage 1001 only by the stage back member 1005 is prevented from protruding and falling. In addition, the light guide plate 1031 employs a configuration that reliably prevents the game ball from protruding to the back of the stage and falling (see FIG. 49).
Accordingly, there is no possibility that the game ball protrudes from the stage 1001 and falls and collides with various movable effect actors, light emitting effect means, or a liquid crystal display disposed on the back side of the game board 1.

The general winning opening 1013, the starting winning opening 1009, and the big winning opening 1011 are arranged in a predetermined cutout area provided in a predetermined area of the panel body 1a of the game board 1.
A plurality of (three in the present embodiment) general winning holes 1013 are integrally formed on a passage member (passage unit) 1015. Note that the start winning opening 1009 and the special winning opening 1011 are not particularly characterized in the present embodiment, and are not limited to the illustrated forms, and can be modified within the scope of the present invention.

  The passage member 1015 includes a first passage member 1017 and a second passage member 1023 (see FIGS. 50 and 51).

The first passage member 1017 is at least partially disposed in front of the game board 1 and integrally includes the plurality of passage areas (general winning ports 1013).
In other words, general winning openings (passing areas) 1013 are provided at predetermined intervals on the front surface, and each of the general winning openings (passing areas) 1013 is a single long passage with the back side open on the back side. It communicates with the component 1021.
Then, from the back side of the panel main body 1a, only the respective general winning award (passing area) 1013 is provided so as to protrude from the front side of the panel main body 1a through the notch areas of the panel main body 1a. .

The second passage member 1023 is arranged at the rear of the game board 1 and discharges the game ball that has rolled through the plurality of passage areas (general winning opening 1013) from the discharge area 1035 provided in the light guide plate 1031. A discharge area 1025 is provided. In other words, the first passage member 1017 has one elongated passage component 1027 having the same shape as the open shape of the rear surface of the first passage member 1017 with the front side opened, and the rearmost side in the most downstream region of the passage component 1027. A discharge area 1025 having a predetermined shape communicating with the head is provided.
Then, the opening portion on the back surface side of the first passage member 1017 disposed on the back surface side of the game board 1 and the opening portion on the front surface side of the second passage member 1023 are overlapped and formed integrally. One hollow spherical passage 1029 composed of the constituent parts 1017 and 1023 is formed. The discharge area 1025 communicates with the back side of the light guide plate 1031 through the discharge area 1035 of the light guide plate 1031. The discharge region 1035 is connected to a predetermined discharge channel (not shown) disposed on the back side of the light guide plate 1031.
In the present embodiment, the passage member 1015 is formed of a colored transparent or colorless transparent resin member, and is configured so that a predetermined decoration (cut) is applied to a predetermined portion so that a light emission effect and a decoration effect can be achieved by light. Has been.
In addition, in this embodiment, although comprised from two members, the 1st channel | path member 1017 and the 2nd channel | path member 1023, you may make it comprise from three or more members. For example, a general winning opening passage member is provided for each general winning opening, and a collective passage member that collects game balls that roll on each of the general winning opening passage members is provided. All of these may be collected by the collecting passage member, and the collected game balls may be discharged from the discharge region 1035 of the light guide plate 1031.

<Light guide plate configuration>
In this embodiment, the light guide plate 1031 is detachably attached and fixed to the front surface of the back box 1055 by screwing a base 1041 and a second holder 1042 described later. The light guide plate 1031 is processed (for example, reflective dot processing) so that a predetermined effect shape (for example, a predetermined character shape) can be displayed in a predetermined region or all regions of the translucent acrylic panel member. By introducing (irradiating) light from the light emitting means 1037 disposed at a predetermined position, each predetermined effect shape can be displayed by light emission (see FIGS. 49 and 52 to 67).
49, FIG. 52, FIG. 56, FIG. 58, FIG. 60 and FIG. 62, the bosses indicated by reference numerals 1032, 1034 and 1036 protrude from the light guide plate 1031. These are the third movable effects described later. This is a boss for attaching and fixing the first combination movable effect combination 1323 of the combination 1321 to the front side of the light guide plate 1031. A boss indicated by reference numeral 1030 is a boss for attaching and fixing a part of a second combination movable effect combination 1335 of a third movable effect combination 1321 described later to the front side of the light guide plate 1031. Details will be described later. The light guide plate 1031 may be attached to the front side of the back box 1055 via a spacer. The light guide plate 1031 may be directly attached to the back side of the game board 1 or may be attached via a spacer or the like, and is within the scope of the present invention.

As a specific example of the light guide plate 1031, for example, the front (front) side of the light guide plate 1031 is divided into predetermined areas, and a group of reflective dots so that a predetermined image can be expressed for each predetermined area. (Reflecting part) is formed and configured.
With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player with a plurality of light emission display forms (for example, a third image described later) in relation to the light emitting means 1037 described later.
For example, a reflective dot group (reflective portion) in a certain region is configured to be able to display a predetermined effect shape by being reflected by light irradiation from above, and a reflective dot group (reflective portion) in another region. ), It is configured such that a predetermined effect shape can be displayed by being reflected by light irradiation from the side.
The configuration of the light guide plate, the overall shape, the image form to be lit and displayed, the luminescent display area and the like are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed to other known configurations within the scope of the present invention. In addition, a reflection part may be provided in the back side of a light-guide plate, and is in the scope of the present invention.
The reflecting portion is not particularly limited, and light incident from a later-described LED 1037 (1037a, 1037b, 1037c, 1037d, 1037e, 1037f, etc.) provided on the end face of the light guide plate 1031 is front side (player side). A predetermined image or the like is emitted with a predetermined arrangement by forming reflective dots of a predetermined shape that are reflected on the surface.
For example, when a predetermined image or the like is emitted on the front side of the light guide plate 1031 by the light emitted from the LEDs 1037a, 1037b, and 1037c provided on the upper end surface of the light guide plate 1031, the light guide plate is not particularly illustrated. The reflecting surface is directed upward (light irradiation direction from each LED 1037a, 1037b, 1037c) and directed to the front side (player side) so that light entering from the upper end side can be received in a predetermined area of the front surface of 1031. A plurality of reflective dots, which are recessed so as to incline, are formed in a predetermined arrangement.
In the case where a predetermined image or the like is emitted on the front side of the light guide plate 1031 by light emitted from the LEDs 1037d, 1037e, 1037f, etc. provided on the side of the light guide plate 1031, the light guide plate is not shown in particular. The reflective surface is directed to the side (light irradiation direction from each LED 1037d, 1037e, 1037f) and the front side (player side) so that light entering from the side can be received in a predetermined area of the front surface of 1031 A plurality of reflective dots that are recessed so as to incline toward the surface are formed in a predetermined arrangement. That is, a predetermined image or the like can be emitted by the light from the respective directions by the arrangement of the reflective dot groups having the reflective surfaces capable of reflecting the light from the respective LEDs. The configuration of each reflective dot adopts a conventionally known structure, and various images and the like are represented by the arrangement of the reflective dots.
Moreover, the thing which makes a reflective dot recessed in the back side of the light-guide plate 1031 may be sufficient, and a design change is possible within the scope of the present invention.
Furthermore, if the reflecting surface (inclined surface) of the reflecting dots is formed as smooth as possible, irregular reflection can be prevented, and it is possible to clearly provide a luminescent image effect.

In this embodiment, the light emitting means 1037 is assumed to be a plurality of LEDs 1038 provided on an LED substrate capable of making light incident on the end face of the light guide plate 1031 (hereinafter, the light emitting means 1037 is expressed as the LED 1038). There is also.)
The design of the light emitting means 1037 can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention. The effect shape can be displayed by light emission.

  In FIG. 52, reference numeral 1045 denotes a decorative member / substrate cover arranged to shield the LED substrate 1037 from the player side so as to be difficult to see.

In the present embodiment, an upper left substrate 1037a, an upper middle substrate 1037b, and an upper right substrate 1037c are attached to the upper end surface 1031a of the light guide plate 1031 from the left side in the horizontal direction indicated by the arrow A1 in FIG.
Each of the upper left substrate 1037a, the upper middle substrate 1037b, and the upper right substrate 1037c is provided with a plurality of LEDs 1038 so that predetermined light can be emitted from the upper side to the lower side of the light guide plate 1031. (See FIGS. 52 to 54). In the figure, reference numeral 1039 denotes a cover for attaching the respective substrates 1037 a and 1037 b to the light guide plate 1031. The cover 1039 also functions as light leakage prevention so that light from the LEDs 1038 provided on the substrates 1037a and 1037b does not leak. In the figure, reference numeral 1041 denotes a base for attaching the light guide plate 1031 to the back box 1055. The base 1041 also has a function of holding a light incident part (light incident lens part) 1047 described later.
The cover 1039 and the base 1041 are connected so as to sandwich the substrates 1037a and 1037b, respectively.
The upper right substrate 1037c is attached to the light guide plate 1031 by the first holder 1040. The first holder 1040 functions as a function of holding a light incident portion (light incident lens portion) 1047 described later and also as a light leakage prevention so that light from the LED 1038 does not leak.

In the present embodiment, the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f are arranged on the left end surface 1031b of the light guide plate 1031 in the vertical direction indicated by the arrow A2 in FIG. Each is attached.
Each of the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f is provided with a plurality of LEDs 1038, and is configured so that predetermined light can be emitted from each LED 1038 from the left side to the right side of the light guide plate 1031. (See FIGS. 52 to 54). In addition, the left upper substrate 1037d and the left middle substrate 1037e are similarly sandwiched and connected by the cover 1039 and the base 1041 described above.
The left lower substrate 1037f is attached to the light guide plate 1031 by the first holder 1040. The first holder 1040 functions as a function of holding a light incident portion (light incident lens portion) 1047 described later and also as a light leakage prevention so that light from the LED 1038 does not leak.
53 and 54, the member indicated by reference numeral 1042 is the second holder, and the substrate concealment indicated by reference numeral 1046 in FIGS. 56, 58, 60, 62, and 65 is attached to the light guide plate 1031. It is a holder for connecting to the back box.

  Here, a specific example of the light emission effect display will be described.

  First, a description will be given of a point that a predetermined partial light emission display effect can be performed by causing any one of the LEDs 1038 of the upper left substrate 1037a, the upper middle substrate 1037b, and the upper right substrate 1037c to emit light.

FIG. 56 shows the light guide plate 1031 by causing only some of the LEDs 1038 on the upper left substrate 1037a to emit light (the LED 1038 in the region indicated by reference numeral L1 in FIG. 54 is referred to as first light emitting means in this embodiment). It shows that a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the area indicated by hatching.
In the present embodiment, an image (specific image) 1143 a having the same shape as that of the first movable effect actor 1143 is displayed on the left region indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031. A reflection part (in this embodiment, the reflection part in this region is referred to as a first reflection part) is formed so that it can be displayed at the same position as the arrangement position.

Then, for example, when a predetermined condition is set in the game and a first movable effect actor 1143 to be described later is moved, before the first movable effect actor 1143 starts moving, the upper left substrate A part of the LED 1038 of 1037a is caused to emit light (flash / light).
The upper left substrate 1037a of the present embodiment is provided with an LED 1038 in the L1 area and an LED 1038 in the L2 area, the arrangement positions of which are changed in the vertical direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 54, the region indicated by L2 at a position higher in the vertical direction than the LED 1038 provided in the region indicated by L1 (in this embodiment, the same height position as the LED 1038 of the upper middle substrate 1037b in the vertical direction). LED 1038 is provided. In the present embodiment, only the LED 1038 in the range indicated by L1 in FIG. 54 emits light.
Thereby, the first movable effect actor 1143 and the first movable effect actor 1143 are arranged by the reflecting portion provided in the left region of the light guide plate 1031 corresponding to the position (left region in the drawing) where the first movable effect agent 1143 is disposed. A blade image (specific image) 1143a having the same shape is displayed in the left side region of the light guide plate 1031 in a light emission (flashing / lighting) effect so as to overlap the first movable effect agent 1143 (FIG. 57). reference).
As described above, after the image 1143a having the same shape as the first movable effect actor 1143 is displayed in the light emission effect at the same position, the first movable effect actor 1143 appears, so that the first movable effect actor 1143 appears. This suggests a possibility that the accessory 1143 can move to a predetermined position (a so-called tilt feeling such as whether or not to appear). In particular, the expectation can be further enhanced by setting to blink at high speed.

FIG. 58 shows that the light emission of the LED 1038 on the upper middle substrate 1037b and the LED 1038 in the L2 region of the upper left substrate 1037a described above gives a predetermined light emission effect to the region indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031. . In the present embodiment, the LED 1038 on the upper middle substrate 1037b and the LED 1038 in the L2 region of the upper left substrate 1037a are referred to as second light emitting means.
In the present embodiment, in the central region indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031, the reflection unit (the book) is displayed so that a face image of the character of the gaming machine (an image different from the specific image 1143 a) can be displayed large. In the embodiment, the reflection portion in this region is referred to as a second reflection portion).
For example, when a predetermined condition is established in the game and the game state is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player, before the shift, the LED 1038 of the upper middle board 1037b and the above-described upper left board 1037a The LED 1038 in the L2 area is caused to emit light (flash / light).
As a result, the face image of the predetermined character is emitted (flashed / lit) in the central area of the light guide plate 1031 by the reflecting portion provided in the central area of the light guide plate 1031 (see FIG. 59).
As described above, after the face image of the predetermined character is displayed in the center region of the light guide plate 1031 and the light emission effect is displayed, the game state transitions to the predetermined game state. Increases interest and improvement. Even in this case, expectation can be further enhanced by setting to blink at high speed. In this embodiment, the effect display is performed as described above by the light guide plate 1031. However, the face image of the character is displayed by the display device 4, and the headband image of the character is superimposed on the light guide plate 1031. It may be a light emitting display and is within the scope of the present invention.

In FIGS. 60 and 61, a predetermined light emission effect is given to the area indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031 by the light emission of each LED 1038 (in the present embodiment, this is referred to as third light emitting means) of the upper right substrate 1037c. Which indicates that.
In the present embodiment, a predetermined decorative image can be displayed on the first light emitting effect unit 1057 and the second light emitting effect unit 1105 described later in the right region indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031. In addition, a reflection portion (in this embodiment, the reflection portion in this region is referred to as a third reflection portion) is formed. For example, in the present embodiment, the character “WARNING” is displayed by light emission, but the decoration image in this case may be a character or a predetermined character image. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may light-emit in a predetermined color so that the whole region of the 1st light emission production | presentation means 1057 and the 2nd light emission production | presentation means 1105 may be covered.

  In addition, for example, a predetermined light emission display effect can be performed by causing all or all of the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f or any one of the LEDs 1038 to emit light.

62 to 64 show the light guide plate by causing all the LEDs 1038 (referred to as the fourth light emitting means in this embodiment) of the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f to emit light. It shows that a predetermined light emission effect is applied to the entire area indicated by the hatched line 1031.
In the present embodiment, a reflection portion (in this embodiment, a lightning-like image can be displayed from the lower area of the game board toward the upper area in all areas indicated by diagonal lines of the light guide plate 1031. The reflective portion in this region is referred to as a fourth reflective portion).
Then, for example, a predetermined condition is set in the game, and a second movable effect combination 1213 to be described later moves to an appearance position (also referred to as a second position or another position), and a second movable effect combination storage unit 1313 is obtained. When a movable effect is made as if pierced, the LED 1038 below the left lower substrate 1037f emits light (flashes / lights) to the upper LED 1038 (FIG. 64A), and then the left middle substrate 1037e Light is emitted (flashing / lighting) from the lower LED 1038 to the upper LED 1038 (FIG. 64B), and then light is emitted (flashing / lighting) from the lower LED 1038 to the upper LED 1038 on the left upper substrate 1037d (FIG. 64B). 64 (c)).
Thereby, an image such as lightning is emitted (flashing / lighting) from the lower region to the upper region by the reflecting portion provided in the entire region of the light guide plate 1031 (see FIGS. 63 and 64). FIGS. 64A to 64C show a state in which light-emission images such as lightning gradually spread from the lower region to the upper region. This is expressed by lighting each LED 1038 in the order of the left lower substrate 1037f, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the upper left substrate 1037a.
In addition, after the LEDs 1038 on the left lower substrate 1037f, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the upper left substrate 1037a are in a light emitting state (FIG. 64C), the LEDs 1038 below the left lower substrate 1037f are sequentially turned to the upper LEDs 1038. The LED 1038 under the left middle substrate 1037e is turned off sequentially from the lower LED 1038 to the upper LED 1038, and then the LED 1038 under the upper left substrate 1037a is turned off in turn to the upper LED 1038. You may make it perform the effect that an image becomes difficult to visually recognize in order.
Note that the LEDs 1038 on the left lower substrate 1037f, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left upper substrate 1037d can simultaneously emit light (flash / light). In this way, the appearance of the second movable effect actor 1213 (movable effect) and the light emission effect display by the entire region of the light guide plate 1031 are provided together, thereby giving a surprise effect to the player. Can improve the interest. In other words, there is a development that is advantageous for the game by the production by the large appearance action in a certain direction of the second movable production actor 1213 and the light emission display production from the direction opposite to the appearance direction. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of heels.
Although a detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start winning opening 1009 and a game ball is detected by a sensor (not shown), a random number value is extracted. . Based on the extracted random number value, the symbol display device (not shown) displays the symbol in a predetermined manner and then stops and displays it in a predetermined manner.
As a mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display device, a jackpot mode that is stopped when the extracted random number value is a predetermined specific random value and a stoppage that is displayed when the extracted random number is not a specific random value. There is a losing aspect. When stopped and displayed in the big win mode, the big winning opening 1011 is in an open state, and the game ball shifts to a so-called jackpot game state in which a game ball can easily enter. Then, it is possible to perform the effects as described above during the symbol variation display in the symbol display device. For example, when a symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the effect of light emission display up to the state of FIG. 64A is a selection rate of 8/10, and the effect of light emission display up to the state of FIG. 64B is 2 / When the selection rate of 10 and the effect of light emission display up to the state of FIG. 64C is 0/10, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode, the light emission display is performed up to the state of FIG. 64A. The selection rate is 1/10 for the effect, the selection rate is 4/10 for the effect displayed until the state shown in FIG. 64B, and the selection rate is 5/10 for the effect displayed for the state shown in FIG. 64C. As such, the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode may be different for each effect to be executed.

65 and 66, each LED 1038 on the left upper substrate 1037d (this is referred to as a fifth light emitting unit in the present embodiment) emits light, thereby causing predetermined light emission in the upper region indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031 ( (Blinking / lighting) indicates that an effect will be given.
In the present embodiment, a reflective portion (in this embodiment, a reflective portion in this region) is displayed on the upper region indicated by the oblique lines of the light guide plate 1031 so that a predetermined decorative image (a predetermined character image or the like) can be displayed. Is referred to as a fifth reflecting portion). The decoration image in this case may be a character or another character image.
In addition, an image (for example, a headband) that overlaps with the image (first image 1051 of the character) on the cell sheet 1049 shown in FIG. 67 and constitutes one image (an image in which the character is winding a headband, see FIG. 67C). In order to display the first image 1051) in a light emitting manner, a predetermined reflecting portion may be provided at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 so that this one character image is simultaneously displayed in a light emitting effect.
As described above, only the upper area is displayed with the light emission effect, so that it is possible to make the player think that the effect is a special effect, and the interest can be improved.

  The upper left substrate 1037a, the upper middle substrate 1037b, the upper right substrate 1037c, the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f are caused to emit light at the same time, so that the entire region of the light guide plate 1031 has a predetermined area. It is also possible to perform a light effect display. By making all these light-emitting means emit light, all the light-emitting display effects partially overlap, and a flashy light-emitting effect can be performed. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment will be improved by an unprecedented light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, a predetermined light emission display effect is performed by arbitrarily combining the light emitting means of the upper left substrate 1037a, the upper middle substrate 1037b, the upper right substrate 1037c, the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f. Is possible and within the scope of the invention.
In addition, by displaying all the LEDs to emit light and displaying two layers of light emission and the LED on the left upper substrate 1037a, the torch image is emitted and displayed, and the cell character in the headband has a torch. Various effects may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, a light incident portion (light incident lens portion) 1047 is provided in the vicinity of each LED 1038, and light from each LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 is guided through the light incident portion (light incident lens portion) 1047. The light plate 1031 is configured to be able to enter from each end face 1031a with certainty (see FIGS. 54 and 55).
The shape and location of the light incident portion (light incident lens portion) 1047 have a configuration that allows the light from each LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 to be reliably incident from each end face 1031a of the light guide plate 1031 without spreading. The design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. In the present embodiment, the light guides are disposed on the respective end surfaces 1031a of the light guide plate 1031 and on the upper side or side thereof. 1037 are juxtaposed.

The discharge area 1035 is provided at the lower end of the light guide plate 1031 in a smaller number than the plurality of passage areas (general winning opening 1013), and in this embodiment, it is a single discharge area (discharge opening) (FIG. 54).
As a result, only one region for disposing the discharge region (discharge port) formed on the light guide plate 1031 is sufficient. Further, since a space for securing the discharge area in the light guide plate 1031 may be small, a wide light emitting display area in the light guide plate 1031 can be secured, which is very effective.

<Cell sheet configuration>
The cell sheet 1049 is provided on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 and displays a predetermined image (see FIG. 67).
For example, in the present embodiment, the second image 1053 corresponds to the second image 1053 at a position at least partially overlapping with an image (second image 1053 provided on the light guide plate) that emits light when the light guide plate 1031 emits light. The image (first image 1051) is displayed on the cell sheet 1049.

That is, for example, in this embodiment, the face (first image 1051) of the character is displayed on the cell sheet 1049, and even when the LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 provided in the light guide plate 1031 is not emitting light. The face of the character (first image 1051) is displayed so as to be visible to the player. The light guide plate 1031 is formed with a reflective portion corresponding to a headband image (second image 1053) that is displayed in a light-emitting manner at a position overlapping the character's face (first image 1051) when the LED 1038 emits light. .
Thus, when the LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 provided in the light guide plate 1031 is not emitting light, only the character face (first image 1051) without the headband (second image 1053) is displayed, and each LED 1038 of the light emitting means 1037 is displayed. At the time of light emission, the face (first image 1051) of the character wearing the headband (second image 1053) is displayed in a light-emitting manner, and an effect display with different images is performed at the time of light emission and at the time of non-light emission.
As described above, since different images are emitted and displayed to the player depending on whether light is emitted or not, the player's interest is improved.

<Back box configuration>
The back box 1055 has substantially the same surface shape as the game board 1, and has an opening 1055 h provided by opening front and rear surfaces formed wider in the depth direction than the game board 1. Various kinds of accessories are arranged so as to surround the opening 1055h (see FIGS. 45 to 48). For example, in the present embodiment, various light emitting effect means and various movable effect agents are provided. In the present embodiment, as described above, the light guide plate 1031 is detachably attached and fixed to the front surface of the back box 1055 by screwing the base 1041.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the following first light-emitting effect means 1057, second light-light effect means 1105, and third light-light effect means 1119, and the first movable effect character 1143 and the second movable effect character 1213. And a third movable effect actor 1321.
In addition, the opening 1055h is preferably as wide as possible in order to make the effect display area wide, but it should be dealt with according to the form of the gaming machine.

<First luminous effect means>
The first light emission effect means 1057 is one of the light effect effects means for effect display by light. In the present embodiment, the first light emission effect means 1057 is arranged substantially at the center right end in the vertical direction when viewed from the front surface of the back box 1055. (See FIGS. 45 and 68 to 71).
Note that the first light emission effect unit 1057 is not limited to the illustrated form and configuration of the present embodiment, and can be changed in design within the scope of the present invention.

  In the first light emitting effect unit 1057 of this embodiment, the exterior member 1059, the lens member 1071 provided on the inner surface side of the exterior member 1059, the inner lens member 1077 provided on the inner surface side of the lens member 1071, and the lens member 1071 A sheet member 1091 interposed between the inner lens member 1077, an annular reflector (reflecting member) 1093 provided on the inner surface side of the inner lens member 1077, and a front surface on the inner peripheral side of the annular reflector (reflecting member) 1093. The LED board 1097 provided with the LED 1099 on the side is provided (see FIG. 68).

The exterior member 1059 is formed of a non-permeable material and has a predetermined shape. In the present embodiment, the exterior member 1059 includes a predetermined cutout portion through which light emitted can pass. In the present embodiment, an annular skirt portion 1063 having a larger diameter than the front surface 1061 is provided, and a hollow cylindrical shape is formed by integrally connecting the front surface 1061 and the annular skirt portion 1063 with an inclined peripheral surface 1065. Is formed.
The cutout portion includes, for example, a substantially circular front cutout portion (through hole) 1067 in which the front surface 1061 of the exterior member 1059 is greatly cut out so that the front lens portion 1079 of the lens member 1071 can be seen, and the periphery of the exterior member 1059. In the surface 1065 region, a plurality of peripheral surface notches (slits) 1069 are provided so as to pass through an elongated shape so that a part of the side lens portion of the lens member 1071 can be seen (FIGS. 68, 70 and 70). FIG. 71).
Therefore, a predetermined light emission effect (color, light emission pattern, etc.) is provided to the player from the notches 1067, 1069.

  The lens member 1071 is formed of a transparent material in a predetermined shape and a predetermined color. In this embodiment, the lens member 1071 is smaller than the exterior member 1059 and can be fitted to the inner surface of the exterior member 1059. have. In this embodiment, it is formed in the hollow cylinder shape provided with the cylindrical protrusion part 1075 which expanded (projected) toward the back from the peripheral part of the front surface (plane part) 1073 (FIG. 68, FIG. 70). And FIG. 71).

The inner lens member 1077 has a light guiding property and is formed in a shape that can be fitted to the inner surface of the lens member 1071. In this embodiment, the inner lens member 1077 is smaller than the lens member 1071 and It has an outer surface form that can be fitted to. In the present embodiment, an annular skirt portion 1081 having a larger diameter than the front lens portion 1079 is provided, and the front lens portion 1079 and the annular skirt portion 1081 are integrally connected by an inclined peripheral surface 1083. It forms in the hollow cylinder shape which becomes (refer FIG. 68 thru | or FIG. 71).
In the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions (slits) 1085 formed in an elongated shape in a predetermined region of the peripheral surface 1083 are provided.
This notch (slit) 1085 reflects and diffuses the light emitted from the light emitting means to efficiently emit light outward from the notch (slit) 1085, so that the notch (slit) 1085 is emitted. A predetermined unevenness processing (zigzag processing) 1087 is applied to the inner surface.
In addition, the inner lens member 1077 is subjected to a predetermined unevenness processing (gray processing) 1089 on the inner surface side of the front lens portion 1079. The concavo-convex processing 1089 on the inner surface side of the front lens portion 1079 can efficiently emit the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the front lens portion 1079 by reflecting and diffusing the light.

  The sheet member 1091 is a thin-walled sheet member that diffuses the light from the light emitting means, and a predetermined character, design, or the like is emitted and displayed by a predetermined color of the light emitting means (see FIG. 68). In this embodiment, a predetermined character (first character) is emitted and displayed from the front lens unit 1079 by the light emission of the red LED, and a predetermined character (second character) different from the first character by the light emission of the blue LED. As a light-emitting display of characters, the production and decoration effects are improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the display visible to the player as the game progresses.

  The reflector (reflecting member) 1093 is formed in a predetermined shape, and in this embodiment is an octagonal annular member having a predetermined thickness, and is semicircular toward the inner side (inner peripheral side) at the opposite location. A protruding portion 1095 (a concave portion recessed in a semicircular shape when viewed from the outer periphery side) 1095 is formed (see FIGS. 68, 70 and 71).

  In this embodiment, the light emitting means is assumed to be an LED 1099 provided on the front side of an LED substrate (light emitting means mounting substrate) 1097 and an LED 1101 provided on the back side. The LED substrate (light emitting means mounting substrate) 1097 is disposed on the back side of the reflector (reflecting member) 1093, the front side of the LED substrate 1097 is in contact with the reflector (reflecting member) 1093, and the LED 1099 on the front side is The annular reflector (reflecting member) 1093 enters the inside (see FIGS. 68 to 71).

The front LED 1099 emits side light and irradiates predetermined light toward the inner side opposite to the reflector (reflecting member) 1093 on the outer side of the LED 1099. The light is incident upon a predetermined unevenness processing (gagged processing) 1089 provided on the inner surface side of the lens member 1077, and the front surface direction of the front lens portion 1079 is emitted and displayed (the arrow in the figure indicates the irradiation direction. See FIG. 71). ).
In addition, the light emitted from the front LED 1099 may be reflected and diffused at a predetermined position of a reflector (reflecting member) 1093 formed in an annular shape, so that the light is diffusely reflected toward the front lens unit 1079. In the diffused state, the light enters the front lens portion 1079 of the inner lens member 1077 and produces a light emission effect with a spread.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the front LED 1099 is disposed inside the reflector (reflecting member) 1093, and the reflector (reflecting member) 1093 surrounds all the LEDs 1099 on the front. Therefore, the light emitted from the front LED 1099 is difficult to leak to the back side of the LED substrate 1097.

The LED 1101 on the back side emits side light like the LED 1099 on the front side, but the light emission direction is different from the LED 1099 on the front side and faces outward (see FIGS. 70 and 71).
Therefore, the light emitted from the side is irradiated toward the inner peripheral surface of the inner lens member 1077 and guided to the inner lens member 1077 having light guiding properties, but there is also light that is reflected, and the reflected light is The light is emitted from the notch (slit) 1085 toward the protrusion (circumferential surface) 1075 of the lens member 1071, guided to the protrusion 1075, and passed through the peripheral notch (slit) 1069 of the exterior member 1059. The light is guided outward (in the figure, the arrow indicates the irradiation direction, see FIG. 71). At this time, the light irradiated by the predetermined uneven | corrugated process (gray process) 1087 given to the inner surface of the notch part 1085 of the inner lens member 1077 is diffused.

  68 is a decorative member disposed around the exterior member 1059 of the first light emitting effect means 1057. The first light emitting effect means 1057 is attached and fixed to the decorative member 1103. The member is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the inner surface of the back box 1055.

Recent gaming machines are in a situation where the necessary light-emitting space cannot be obtained because a lot of light-emitting effect means and movable effect agents are arranged in a narrow game machine in which the arrangement space is limited. There are many. For example, in the present embodiment, drive means (motor) 1245 constituting a second movable effect actor 1213, which will be described later, is disposed close to each other (see FIGS. 47 and 70).
By being configured as in the present embodiment, even if the space is limited by the driving means as described above, the light emission effect from the front surface and the light emission effect from the peripheral surface are sufficient. Can be expected.

<Second light emitting effect means>
In FIG. 72, the second light emitting effect means 1105 can perform a light emitting effect and also a movable effect by a rotation operation.
The second light emission effect means 1105 of the present embodiment is disposed below the first light emission effect means 1057 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front surface (player side) of the back box 1055 (FIG. 43). 45 to 47). Note that the second light emitting effect unit 1105 is not construed as being limited to the illustrated form and configuration of the present embodiment, and can be modified within the scope of the present invention.

  In the second light emitting effect unit 1105 of this embodiment, an exterior member 1107 formed in a predetermined shape, a lens member 1111 provided on the inner surface side of the exterior member 1107, and an inner lens member provided on the inner surface side of the lens member 1111 1113, a base cover 1114 and a base portion 1116 attached and fixed to the back box 1055, and attached and fixed to the front side of the base portion 1116, located on the back side of the inner lens member 1113, and an LED 1117 as a light emitting means The LED board 1115 is provided, and a drive mechanism (relay gear 1110, transmission gear 1112) disposed between the base cover 1114 and the base portion 1116. In the driving means (motor) 1108 constituting the driving mechanism, the rotating shaft protrudes in the direction of the base cover 1114 and is fixedly attached to the lower front surface of the base portion 1116. In the drawing, for the sake of explanation, the relay gear 1110 and the transmission gear 1112 are extracted and displayed in front of the base portion 1116 (see FIG. 72).

The exterior member 1107 is made of a non-permeable material and is formed in a short cylindrical shape. In this embodiment, the exterior member 1107 is provided with a predetermined notch 1109 through which light of the LED 1117 that emits light can pass.
Therefore, a predetermined light emission effect (color, light emission pattern, etc.) is provided to the player from each notch 1109.
Further, a plurality of screw-fixing bosses (non-penetrating on the front surface side) 1106 are formed at predetermined positions on the back surface (inner surface of the front surface portion).

The lens member 1111 is made of a transparent material, and is formed in a short cylindrical shape that is smaller than the exterior member 1107 and can be fitted to the inner surface of the exterior member 1107.
Further, a plurality of screw holes (through holes) 1111a are formed at predetermined locations on the front surface.

The inner lens member 1113 is made of a transparent material, is smaller than the lens member 1111, and is formed in a short cylindrical shape that can be fitted to the inner surface of the lens member 1111.
Further, an insertion hole (through hole) 1113a through which the rotating shaft 1112a of the transmission gear 1112 can be inserted and fixed is formed at a substantially central position on the front surface, and a plurality of screw-fastening holes 1113b are provided at predetermined positions. Is formed.

  The LED board 1115 is disposed by screwing and fixing a predetermined portion on the front surface side of the base portion 1116, and includes a predetermined number of LEDs 1117 at predetermined positions on the front surface of a predetermined shape (disc-shaped) substrate (see FIG. 72). The LED 1117 emits light forward and emits light toward the inner lens member 1113 provided in the front.

The lens member 1111 and the inner lens member 1113 are internally provided in the exterior member 1107, and the screwing boss 1106 provided on the back side of the exterior member 1107 is used for screwing the lens member 1111. The hole 1111a and the screw fixing hole 1113b of the inner lens member 1113 are overlapped and screwed from the back side of the inner lens member 1113 so as to be integrally provided. In this integration step, the tip of the rotation shaft 1112a of the transmission gear 1112 is integrally attached to the insertion hole 1113a of the inner lens member 1113.
Accordingly, the relay gear 1110 that has received the rotation operation from the driving means (motor) 1108 transmits the rotation operation to the transmission gear 1112, and the exterior member 1107, the lens member 1111, and the inner lens member 1113 are rotated by the rotation operation of the transmission gear 1112. Rotate together.
At this time, in accordance with the game mode, a light emission effect display by predetermined light emission from the LED 1117 of the LED substrate 1115 is performed. The rotation operation and the light emission effect display can be arbitrarily changed within the scope of the present invention.

<Third light emitting effect means>
73 to 76 show the third light emission effect means 1119.
In the figure, reference numeral 1119 denotes third light emitting effect means disposed at the lower front end of the back box 1055. The inner lens member 1123 includes LEDs 1125 (first light emitting means) and 1125a (second light emitting means) as light emitting means. , 1125b (third light emitting means) irradiates light to produce an effect display.
The third light emitting effect unit 1119 of the present embodiment includes a decorative member (decorative lens member) 1121 and an inner lens member (lens member) provided on the inner surface side of the decorative member 1121 when viewed from the front side (player side). 1123, LED 1125, LED 1125a, LED 1125b provided on the inner surface side of the inner lens member (lens member) 1123, and a base portion 1127 disposed on the back side of the light emitting means LED 1125, LED 1125a, LED 1125b. In the figure, reference numeral 1129 denotes another decorative member constituting the third light emitting effect unit 1119 of the present embodiment, and the light emitting effect is displayed by the LED 1125b (third light emitting unit).
The third light emission effect means 1119 is characterized by the light emission effect by the lens member (inner lens member) 1123 and the LED 1125 (1125a, 1125b), and will be described.

  The lens member (inner lens member) 1123 includes a first light emitting display area 1131 processed in the first aspect, and a second different from the first aspect applied to the first light emitting display area 1131. And a second light emitting display area 1135 processed in this manner.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the first light emitting display area 1131 transmits light in one direction so as to express the first aspect extending from one direction to the other direction, in the present embodiment in the lateral direction. A first lens cut 1133 that can be scattered in the other direction (lateral direction) is applied along the first aspect.
The second light emitting display area 1135 is a second lens cut capable of irradiating the entire area of the lens member 1123 other than the area where the first lens cut 1133 has been applied with light at 360 degrees. Many 1137 are given (refer FIG.74 and FIG.75).
Note that the second light emitting display region 1135 may be a region where the second lens cut 1135 is applied to at least a part of the lens member 1123 other than the region where the first lens cut 1137 is applied. Good.

And LED1125 is matched with the predetermined several places of said 1st light emission display area | region 1131 (In FIG. 74, corresponding LED1125 position is shown with a broken line). Then, by turning on the plurality of LEDs 1125 corresponding to the first lens cut 1133 in order from either the left or right direction, the light emitting display area 1131 according to the first aspect is sequentially displayed.
That is, as shown in FIGS. 75A to 75E and FIGS. 76A to 76E, the LEDs 1125 in the first light-emitting display area 1131 are sequentially turned on to gradually extend in the horizontal direction. The first mode can be light emission display (rope light emission display). In FIGS. 75A to 75E and FIGS. 76A to 76E, reference numeral 1132 indicates a portion where light emission is displayed. In FIG. 76, the first light emitting display area 1131 is displayed on the front side of the decorative member 1121, but this is only shown to explain that the light flows in the lateral direction, and actually The first light emitting display area 1131 does not appear from the front surface of the decorative member 1121.
In addition, by repeatedly turning on / off the LED 1125 in order from either the left or right direction, a light-emitting display in which light flows along the light-emitting display area 1131 according to the first aspect is provided.
Furthermore, it is also possible to display all the LEDs 1125 on and off at the same time by alternately turning on and off at the same time to blink the entire rope.

Then, LEDs 1125 a of the second light emitting means are associated with a plurality of predetermined positions in the second light emitting display area 1135.
By turning on the LED 1125a, the light emitting display area 1135 according to the second mode is displayed in a light emitting manner (see FIG. 75). That is, the second mode in which the lens member 1123 other than the region where the first lens cut 1133 is given is caused to emit light in a substantially circular shape by causing the LED 1125a corresponding to the second lens cut 1137 to emit light. Is displayed and the entire decorative member 1121 is displayed. In particular, according to the present embodiment, the light emission of the light emission display area 1135 according to the second aspect different from the light emission effect of the first light emission display area 1131 around the light emission display area 1131 according to the first aspect. Since the effect is provided, the light emission effect is improved. In addition, the other decorative member 1129 also performs a predetermined light emission effect together with the first light emission display area 1131 and the second light emission display area 1135 by the light emission of the LED 1125b of the third light emitting means, thereby enhancing the light emission effect effect. .
Note that when the LED 1125 of the first light emitting means corresponding to the first light emitting display area 1131 displays the light emission, the LED 1125 of the second light emitting means in the second light emitting display area 1135 may be turned on. .
Note that the inner lens member 1123 itself may be easily provided without being provided with the decorative member 1121, and is within the scope of the present invention.

<First movable production role>
FIG. 77 to FIG. 83 show an example of the first movable effect accessory (also referred to as first effect means) 1143.
The first movable effect combination 1143 is a combination that can be rotated and extended (moved forward and backward) and has the following configuration.

The first movable effect actor 1143 is movable (rotatable and telescopically movable) from the first position (initial position difficult to visually recognize) 1145 to the second position (appearance position easily visible) 1147 (FIG. 46). See), an exterior member 1153 formed of a non-permeable material, a driving means (motor) 1159 for moving (rotating and expanding / contracting) the exterior member 1153, and an operation from the driving means 1159 to transmit the exterior member A transmission mechanism 1163 that moves the member 1153, a slide shaft member 1167 that moves the exterior member 1153 together with the transmission mechanism 1163, and a front decorative member that is arranged on the back side of the exterior member 1153 and accommodates a part of the transmission mechanism 1163 1149, a back cover member 1199 that covers the back side of the front decoration member 1149, and a back decoration member 11 disposed on the back side of the back cover member 1199 It is configured to include a 1 (see FIG. 79).
The back decoration member 1151 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position of the back box 1055, but the front decoration member 1149 includes a first member 1149a that is rotatably attached to the back decoration member 1151, and a back decoration member. The second member 1149b is fixed to and attached to 1151.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable effect actor 1143 is disposed in a state of standing upright in the vertical direction at the initial position 1145 on the left side of the inner surface of the back box 1055 (left side in FIGS. 46 and 77). It is configured to rotate clockwise from the position in the game area direction to the appearance position 1147. In the present embodiment, the first movable effect actor 1143 is located on the back side of the board surface of the game board 1 at the initial position 1145 and is difficult to see from the player side (see FIG. 43). .

  For example, in this embodiment, the exterior member 1153 has a front shape of a blade, and includes a front member 1155 and a back member 1157 formed of a non-permeable material (FIGS. 79 and 79). 80).

  The driving means (motor) 1159 is fixedly disposed in a lower region on the back side of the back decoration member 1151, and causes the rotation shaft to protrude to the front side of the back decoration member 1151, and the motor gear 1161 on the front side. Is attached. The motor gear 1161 is configured to be able to rotate in the forward and reverse directions according to the forward and reverse rotation operations of the drive means (motor) 1159 (see FIGS. 79 and 80).

The transmission mechanism 1163 includes a first gear 1177, a second gear 1183, a third gear 1185, a conversion mechanism 1193, and a slide shaft member 1167 (see FIGS. 79 to 83). .
The slide shaft member 1167 attaches and fixes the bearing portion 1169 to the back side of the front decorative member 1149, and attaches and fixes the front and rear ends 1173 and 1175 of the slide shaft 1171 to the back side of the back member 1157 of the exterior member 1153, respectively. As a result, the slide shaft 1171 slidably held on the bearing portion 1169 moves up and down, so that the exterior member 1153 is slidably (expandable) relative to the front decorative member 1149 (FIGS. 79 to 79). 81).

The first gear (slide relay large gear) 1177 has a diameter larger than that of the motor gear 1161 and includes a region 1179 having no gear teeth in a circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface. The motor gear of the driving unit 1161 It is configured to engage with 1161 and to rotate in forward and reverse directions upon receiving a rotational motion from the driving means 1159. That is, the first gear 1177 employs a so-called toothless gear, and the motor gear 1161 is arranged to mesh with a region 1181 having gear teeth over the entire circumferential direction of the first gear 1177 (FIG. 79, FIG. 79). (See FIGS. 80, 82, and 83).
The first gear 1177 is pivotally supported by a shaft member 1152 that projects from the front side of the back decorative member 1151.

The second gear (slide large gear) 1183 has a smaller diameter than the first gear 1177 and meshes with a region 1181 having gear teeth over the entire circumferential direction of the first gear 1177 to rotate in the forward and reverse directions. It is arranged to be operable.
For example, according to the present embodiment, an annular fitting tube portion 1185b protruding to one side of the circumferential surface of a third gear (missing gear) 1185 described later is slidably fitted to the inner surface of the second gear 1183. A third gear 1185 is provided on the back side of the front decorative member 1149 (see FIGS. 79, 80, 82 and 83).

  The third gear (missed gear) 1185 has a smaller diameter than the first gear 1177 and is substantially the same diameter as the second gear 1183, and the gear teeth of the first gear 1177. A region 1187 having gear teeth meshing with the first gear 1177 and a region 1179 having no gear teeth corresponding to the region 1179 having no gear teeth of the first gear 1177 are provided in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface. Missing gears are used.

  The region 1189 having no gear teeth is provided with a protrusion, and the tip end surface 1191 of the protrusion is configured to contact the peripheral surface region 1179 having no gear teeth of the first gear 1177. (See FIGS. 79, 80, 82 and 83). That is, in this embodiment, the height of the tip end surface 1191 of the protrusion is set to the same height as the tip of the gear teeth in the region 1187 having the gear teeth. The gear teeth of the region 1187 having gear teeth may be different from the height of the front end surface 1191 as long as the gear teeth mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 1177 and can transmit the rotation operation.

  The third gear 1185 has an annular fitting tube portion 1185b protruding to one side of the peripheral surface slidably attached to the inner surface of the second gear 1183, and the side on which the fitting tube portion 1185b is provided. A plurality of protrusions 1185a projecting on one surface are fitted into recesses (not shown) provided on the first member 1149a of the front decoration member 1149, and are rotated together with the first member 1149a (circulation) I am going to do it. A shaft hole 1185c is provided at the center of the plate of the third gear 1185, and a shaft member 1150 provided in the first member 1149a is inserted into the shaft hole 1185c (FIGS. 79 and 80). reference)

Since the second gear 1183 is only slidably attached to the fitting cylinder portion 1185b of the third gear 1185, it does not rotate with the first member 1149a.
Similar to the second gear 1183, it is rotatably supported on a shaft member 1150 that is provided on the back side of the front decorative member 1149.

  The conversion mechanism 1193 has a configuration capable of converting the forward / reverse rotation operation of the second gear 1183 into a rectilinear operation and moving the movable effect accessory 1143 forward / backward. A large number of gear groups (also referred to as slide relay gear groups, in this embodiment, seven gears 1195a, 1195b, and 1195c) sequentially meshed from the lowermost gear 1195a meshing with the gear 1183 to the uppermost gear 1195g. , 1195d, 1195e, 1195f, and 1195g), a pinion gear 1197 that is formed side by side and synchronized with the uppermost gear 1195g of the gear group, and a rack member (sliding rack) 1201 with which the pinion gear 1197 meshes. (See FIGS. 79 and 80).

In the drawings, the gear groups (1195a, 1195b, 1195c, 1195d, 1195e, 1195f, 1195g) are disclosed in a floating state so that they can be easily seen. Respective gears (1195a, 1195b, 1195c, 1195d, 1195e, 1195f, 1195g) are rotatably provided on the shaft member projecting on the back side.
The rack member 1201 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the back member 1157 of the exterior member 1153. Although the pinion gear 1197 is disclosed in parallel with the uppermost gear 1195g in the drawing for explanation, it is necessary to mesh with the rack member 1201 fixed to the back member 1157 of the exterior member 1153. Actually, the first member 1149a is located on the front side through the slide groove 1149c.

Here, the operation of the first movable effect combination 1143 will be briefly described.
In the first movable director 1143, a region 1181 having the gear teeth of the second gear 1183 and a region 1187 having the gear teeth of the third gear 1185 are regions 1181 having the gear teeth of the first gear 1177. 43, and the blade shape of the exterior member 1153 is positioned in the vertical direction on the left back side of the gaming board 1 when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine as shown in FIGS. It is arranged. This state is the initial position 1145 in the first movable effect combination 1143.

Then, the gear teeth of the third gear 1185 mesh with the gear teeth of the first gear 1177, and the rotational movement of the driving means 1159 in the forward rotation direction is transmitted to the third gear 1185. By this, the first movable effect item 1143 (the exterior member 1153 and the front decoration member 1149) rotates from the initial position 1145 toward the center of the game area of the game board 1 so that it can be easily seen by the player. It protrudes (see FIGS. 46, 77 and 78). Thus, the state of rotating and projecting toward the game area of the game board 1 is the appearance position 1147 in the first movable effect combination 1143.
In FIG. 78, while the movable state of the 1st movable production | presentation actor 1143 is shown as a continuous line, the extended state (state advanced ahead diagonally upward) is shown with a virtual line. In addition, it is easy to visually recognize the state in which the first movable effect actor 1143 rotates and projects in the game area direction (indicated by a solid line) and further extends (indicated by an imaginary line) from the player. In this state, the appearance position 1147 is used.

The second gear 1183 that meshes with the gear teeth of the first gear 1177 simultaneously with the third gear 1185 and rotates in the forward direction rotates the rotation mechanism of the drive unit 1159 in the forward direction. The pinion gear 1197 that is engaged with the rack member 1201 operates in the direction of extending the exterior member 1153 that is integrated with the rack member 1201. When the region 1189 having no gear teeth of the third gear 1185 is opposed to the region 1181 having no gear teeth of the first gear 1177, the third gear 1185 has gear teeth. Since the region 1189 (protrusion leading end surface 1191) that is not moved moves while contacting the region 1181 that does not have the gear teeth of the first gear 1177, the first movable effect accessory 1143 (exterior member 1153) Is maintained at the appearance position 1147, and the turning motion transmitted from the second gear 1183 is converted into a straight-ahead motion by the conversion mechanism 1193, so that the first movable effect accessory 1143 moves in the extending direction.
Then, after stopping at the appearance position for a certain period of time, the driving means 1159 is rotated in the reverse direction to rotate the motor gear 1161, the second gear 1183, the third gear 1185, and the gear group 1195a constituting the conversion mechanism 1193, the pinion gear 1197, and The counter-rotating operation is transmitted to the rack member 1201 to operate the first movable effect actor 1143 in a contracting direction and to rotate to return to the initial position 1145.

Further, in the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1203 integrally protruding on the back side of the back cover member 1199 is provided on the back side of the back decoration member 1151 via the curved slide long groove 1205 provided on the back decoration member 1151. And the other end of a predetermined spring member 1207 provided with one end locked to the back side of the back decorative member is locked to the protruding locking protrusion 1203 so that the exterior member 1153 is always provided. The front decoration member 1149 is urged so as to return to the initial position (see FIG. 81).
In addition, the 1st movable production | presentation actor 1143 rotates between the initial position 1145 and the appearance position 1147 by the drive means 1159 and the transmission mechanism 1163, and the spring member 1207 is the appearance position 1147 to the last. The spring force is such that it functions to assist the turning operation to return to the initial position 1145.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a photo sensor 1209 is provided on the front side of the back decoration member 1151, and a projecting piece (not shown) protruding on the back side of the back cover member 1199 is detected to detect the first movable effect. The initial position 1145 and appearance position 1147 of the accessory 1143 can be recognized. For example, when a projecting piece (not shown) is detected by the photo sensor 1209, the photo sensor 1209 recognizes that the projecting piece 1145 is at the initial position 1145, and rotates to detect the projecting piece (not shown) from the photo sensor 1209. When it disappears, it recognizes that it is in the appearance position 1147, and after recognizing that it is in the appearance position 1147, a signal is sent to the sub-control board to reversely rotate the driving means 1159 after a predetermined time has passed.

Here, the light emission effect display form of the 1st movable effect part 1143 in this embodiment is demonstrated.
In the present embodiment, the first movable effect actor 1143 emits some of the LEDs 1038 disposed at predetermined positions of the light guide plate 1031 before the first movable effect actor 1143 starts moving. By performing the light emission display (light emission display of a specific image), it is notified that there is a possibility that the first movable effect actor 1143 may move to a predetermined position. This can give the player a sense of expectation that it may move (appear).
For example, as described in paragraph 0221 above, when a predetermined condition is established in the game and the first movable effect actor 1143 is moved, before the first movable effect agent 1143 starts moving. In addition, some of the LEDs 1038 on the upper left substrate 1037a are caused to emit light (flashing / lighting). Accordingly, the first movable effect is provided by the reflecting portion provided in the left region of the light guide plate 1031 corresponding to the position (the region indicated by the oblique line on the left side in FIG. 56) where the first movable effect actor 1143 is disposed. Since the blade image 1143a having the same shape as the accessory 1143 is displayed in the left region of the light guide plate 1031 as a light emission (flashing / lighting) effect (see FIG. 57), the first movable effect accessory 1143 reaches the predetermined position. It is supposed to notify that there is a possibility of moving. This can give the player a sense of expectation that it may move (appear).
It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the first movable effect accessory 1143 is moved in the left-right direction in small increments when a part of the LEDs 1038 of the upper left substrate 1037a emits light (flashes / lights).
In the present embodiment, after the light-emitting display of the light guide plate 1031, the first movable effect actor 1143 moves to a predetermined position or does not move to a predetermined position, but always moves to a predetermined position. It is also possible to make it not to move.

Further, in association with (in conjunction with) the movement of the first movable effect actor 1143 from the first position (initial position) 1145 to the second position (appearance position) 1147, a predetermined amount of the light guide plate 1031 is determined. It is also possible to cause the LED 1038 disposed at the position to emit light and to display a predetermined image (also referred to as a third image or one image) on the light guide plate 1031 through the first reflecting portion. For example, when the first movable director 1143 is moved to the second position (appearance position) 1147, the LED 1038 of the predetermined LED substrate 1037 (for example, the upper middle substrate 1037b) of the light guide plate 1031 is caused to emit light and guided. By a predetermined reflecting portion (first reflecting portion) provided in a predetermined region of the light plate 1031, a light emitting effect (third image or one image) as if light is emitted from the first movable effect member 1143 is applied. It is also possible (see FIG. 77). In order to emit light emitted from the first movable effect member 1143, it is also possible to produce a light emission effect by combining the first image provided on the cell sheet 1051 and the second image provided on the light guide plate 1031. .
The light-emitting display image that is notified before the first movable effect actor 1143 starts moving and the light-emitting display image that is displayed based on the movement are not particularly limited, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. .

<Second movable production role>
FIG. 84 to FIG. 90 show an example of the second movable effect actor 1213.
The second movable effect actor 1213 moves from one direction (an initial position difficult to view; hereinafter, this position is also referred to as a first position) 1217 to another direction (an easily visible appearance position, hereinafter this position is referred to as a second position). It is configured to be movable toward 1219 (see FIGS. 46, 47, 89 and 90) and has the following configuration.

  Different from the first movable effect actor 1143, the second movable effect agent 1213 is a first drive means (first motor) 1245 for rotating the second movable effect agent 1213, A second driving means (second motor) 1215 for extending and contracting the second movable effect accessory 1213 is separately provided (see FIGS. 85 to 88).

  The second movable effect actor 1213 is movable (rotatable and telescopically movable) from the first position (initial position difficult to see) 1217 to the second position (appearance position easy to see) 1219, and is an exterior member. 1227, the first drive means (first motor) 1245 for moving (rotating) the exterior member 1227, and the operation from the first drive means 1245 are transmitted to move the exterior member 1227 ( The first transmission mechanism 1249 that rotates), the second driving means (second motor) 1215 for moving (extending and contracting) the exterior member 1227, and the operation from the second driving means 1215 are transmitted. A second transmission mechanism 1279 that moves (extracts and retracts) the exterior member, a slide shaft member 1237 that moves (extracts and retracts) the exterior member 1227 together with the second transmission mechanism 1279, It includes a table decorative member (handle design) 1223 and back decorative member (base) 1225 which is disposed on the rear side of the member 1227 is constructed (see FIG. 87). The back decoration member 1225 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position of the back box 1055, but the front decoration member 1223 is attached to the back decoration member 1225 so as to be rotatable (see FIG. 47).

In the present embodiment, the second movable effect actor 1213 is disposed in a horizontal state at the initial position 1217 on the inner surface upper side of the back box 1055 (upper side in FIGS. 46 and 47), and the position Is rotated counterclockwise in the game area direction and moved to the appearance position 1219 (see FIGS. 46 and 89).
In the present embodiment, the second movable effect combination 1213 is provided on the back side of a third movable effect combination (other movable effect combination) 1321 to be described later. After the accessory 1321 moves, the second movable effect accessory 1213 is configured to be movable from one direction to the other direction (see FIGS. 46 and 89).
In the present embodiment, after the third movable effect actor 1321 is moved, the second movable effect actor 1213 will be described as having a configuration in which it can move from one direction to the other direction. In relation to the movement of the third movable stage actor 1321, the second movable stage actor 1213 may be configured so that the second movable stage actor 1213 is movable. Anything that is movable in relation to the movement of the third movable effect actor 1321 is within the scope of the present invention, and the design can be changed as appropriate.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second movable effect actor 1213 is disposed on the back side of the light guide plate 1031, but may be disposed on the front side of the light guide plate 1031.

For example, in the present embodiment, the exterior member 1227 has a frontal form of a blade that is larger than the exterior member 1153 of the first movable effect accessory 1143, and is a table formed of a non-permeable material. The member 1229, the lens member 1231 disposed on the back side of the front member 1229 and formed of a transparent material, the LED substrate 1233 disposed on the back side of the lens member 1231, and the back side of the LED substrate 1233 The back member 1235 is made of a non-permeable material (see FIG. 87).
According to this embodiment, since it is configured in this way, for example, a predetermined light emission effect is made on the exterior member 1227 via the lens member 1213 by a predetermined light emission from the LED substrate 1233.
In the present embodiment, the back member 1235 is composed of two members, a back lower member 1235a and a back upper member 1235b.

  An end 1239 of a slide shaft member 1237, which will be described later, is integrally attached to the back upper member 1235b, and a rack portion in which a pinion gear 1297 of a second transmission mechanism 1279, which will be described later, meshes with the back lower member 1235a. 1299 is integrally formed (see FIGS. 85 to 88).

  The first drive means (first motor) 1245 is fixedly disposed in a lower region on the front surface side of the back decorative member 1225, and protrudes toward the front surface side of the back decorative member 1225. The first motor gear 1247 is attached to the tip. The first motor gear 1247 is configured to be able to rotate in the forward and reverse directions according to the forward and reverse rotation operation of the first drive means (first motor) 1245 (see FIGS. 85 to 88).

  The first transmission mechanism 1249 includes a first gear 1251 and a second gear 1253 (see FIGS. 85 to 88).

  The first gear (rotary relay gear) 1251 has substantially the same diameter as the first motor gear 1247 and is pivotally supported on the back side of the member 1252 attached and fixed to the front side of the back decoration member 1225. Has been. The first motor gear 1247 is engaged with the first motor gear 1247 so that the first motor gear 1247 can rotate in the forward and reverse directions in response to the rotation operation from the first driving means 1245.

  The second gear (drive arm gear) 1253 includes gear teeth 1255 on one end side, and a protrusion (not shown) provided on the other end side 1259 of the elongated plate portion 1257 provided integrally with the gear teeth 1255. It is slidably connected in a slit 1263 provided on the back surface of a motor base member 1261 described later.

  In the present embodiment, the other end 1259 of the second gear 1253 is located at the lowermost end 1265 of the slit 1263, and in this state, the initial position 1217 of the exterior member 1227 (first movable effect accessory 1143). It has become. When the second gear 1253 rotates from this state, the elongated plate portion 1257 (the other end 1259) slides from the lowest end 1265 of the slit 1263 toward the upper end 1267.

  As a result, the force held by the other end 1259 is released, so that the second drive means 1215 (see FIG. 85), which is configured integrally with the motor base member 1261, including the motor base member 1261, The two transmission mechanisms 1279, the exterior member 1227, and the front decoration member 1223 rotate together so that the front end side of the exterior member 1227 faces downward due to its own weight. That is, the second drive unit 1215, the second transmission mechanism 1279, the exterior member 1227, and the front decoration member 1223, which are configured integrally with the motor base member 1261, including the motor base member 1261, always fall (rotate) under their own weight. The initial position 1217 is maintained by pressing by the other end side 1259 of the second gear 1253 and the lifting force of an auxiliary spring (not shown). The auxiliary spring has a spring force that does not hinder the rotating operation due to its own weight when the second gear 1253 is released.

The second drive means (second motor) 1215 is accommodated in a motor base member 1261 that is integrally attached to a back cover member 1273 having a second transmission mechanism 1279 described later, and the rotational axis is the back of the front decoration member 1223. The second motor gear 1277 is attached to the front end thereof (see FIGS. 85 to 88).
The second motor gear 1277 is configured to be able to rotate forward and backward according to the forward and reverse rotation operation of the second drive means (second motor) 1215.

The second transmission mechanism 1279 includes a third gear 1281, a fourth gear 1283, a fifth gear 1285, a conversion mechanism (second conversion mechanism) 1287, and a slide shaft member 1237. ing. The slide shaft member 1237 attaches and fixes the bearing portion 1291 to the front decoration member 1223, and attaches the front and rear ends 1239 and 1239 of the slide shaft member 1237 to the back upper member 1235b of the back member 1235 constituting the exterior member 1227, respectively. By fixing, the exterior member 1227 is provided so as to be slidable (expandable) with respect to the front decorative member 1223.
Note that a member indicated by reference numeral 1280 in the drawing is a member that serves as a presser (guide) when the exterior member 1227 slides, and a lower lower member of the back member 1235 at a position where the upper surface is in sliding contact with the lower surface of the gear base 1273. 1235a (see FIGS. 85 and 86).
).

  The third gear (slide relay small gear) 1281 has a smaller diameter than the second motor gear 1277 and meshes with the motor gear 1277 of the second driving means 1215 to rotate from the second driving means 1215. In response to this, it is configured to be able to rotate in forward and reverse directions.

  The fourth gear (slide relay small gear) 1283 is a gear having the same diameter as the third gear 1281 and formed integrally with the third gear 1281 via a shaft, and is synchronized with the second gear 1281. In response to the rotational movement of the driving means 1215, the forward and reverse rotation is possible.

  The fifth gear (sliding large gear) 1285 has a larger diameter than the first gear 1251 to the fourth gear 1283 and meshes with the fourth gear 1283 so that the second driving means 1215 It is configured to be able to rotate forward and reverse in response to a turning operation.

The second conversion mechanism 1287 has a configuration capable of converting the forward / reverse rotation operation of the fifth gear 1285 into a rectilinear operation and moving the second movable effect accessory 1213 forward / backward. In addition, a large number of gear groups (also referred to as slide relay gear groups, in this embodiment, seven gears 1295a and 1295b, which are sequentially meshed with the fifth gear 1285 from the nearest gear to the tip gear. , 1295c, 1295d, 1295e, 1295f, and 1295g), a pinion gear 1297 that is formed side by side and synchronized with the gear 1295g at the tip of the gear group, and a rack portion (slide) that the pinion gear 1297 meshes with Rack) 1299.
In the gear group, gears 1295a, 1295b, 1295c, 1295d, 1295e, 1295f, and 1295g are rotatably provided on the back side of the front decorative member 1223.
Further, the rack portion 1299 is directly formed on the back member 1235 of the exterior member 1227 as described above.

Here, the operation of the second movable effect actor 1213 will be briefly described.
First, the second movable effect accessory 1213 is arranged above the inner surface of the back box 1055 at the initial position 1217 (see FIGS. 46 and 47).
At this time, the other end 1259 of the second gear 1253 is positioned at the lowermost end 1265 of the slit 1263, and in this state, becomes the initial position 1217 of the exterior member 1227 (first movable effect accessory 1143). (See FIGS. 84, 85, 87 and 88).

Then, when the first driving means (first motor) 1245 starts rotating operation, the rotating operation of the motor gear 1247 is transmitted to the second gear 1253 via the first gear 1251, and the second gear 1253 is transmitted. When the gear 1253 rotates, the elongated plate portion 1257 (the other end 1259) slides from the lowermost end 1265 of the slit 1263 toward the upper end 1267. As a result, the force held by the other end side 1259 is released, so that the second drive means 1215 and the second transmission mechanism 1279 that are configured integrally with the motor base member 1261 including the motor base member 1261 are included. The exterior member 1227 (the front member 1229, the lens member 1231, the LED substrate 1233, the back member 1235) and the front decorative member 1223 rotate together so that the front end side of the exterior member 1227 faces downward due to its own weight (see FIG. 87 and FIG. 87). 88. When viewed from the front side in FIG. 88, the lower left portion is rotated in the direction indicated by the arrow H3 in FIG. 86).
As a result, the second movable effect accessory 1213 rotates from the initial position 1217 to the appearance position 1219 and easily protrudes from the player.

After the rotation operation of the first drive means (first motor) 1245, the second drive means (second motor) 1215 starts the rotation operation. The second drive means (second motor) 1215 can be configured to start the rotation operation simultaneously with the rotation operation of the first drive means (first motor) 1245. Within the scope of the invention.
Then, the rotational movement of the motor gear 1277 is transmitted to the fifth gear 1285 via the third gear 1281 and the fourth gear 1283, and the forward rotation direction of the second drive means 1215 via the fifth gear 1285. Is transmitted to the second conversion mechanism 1287 (comprising gears 1295a, 1295b, 1295c, 1295d, 1295e, 1295f, and 1295g), and the gears 1295a to 1295g are alternately arranged in a predetermined direction. The pinion gear 1297 meshed with the rack portion 1299 fixed to the exterior member 1227 side is rotated in a predetermined direction (in this embodiment, clockwise when viewing FIGS. 87 and 88 from the front side). ) In the direction in which the exterior member 1227 formed integrally with the rack portion 1299 is extended (FIG. 8). And lower left looking at Figure 88 from the front side, it is dropped operated toward the direction) indicated by arrow H1 in FIG. 86 (see FIG. 86, FIGS. 89 and FIG. 90).

  Then, after stopping at the appearance position for a certain time, the second driving means 1215 is rotated in the reverse direction, the second motor gear 1277, the third gear 1281, the fourth gear 1283, the fifth gear 1285, the second A direction of reverse rotation is transmitted to the gear groups 1295a to 1295g, the pinion gear 1297, and the rack portion 1299 that constitute the conversion mechanism 1287, and the second movable effect accessory 1213 is contracted (see FIGS. 87 and 88 from the front side). As shown in FIG. 86, the first drive unit 1245 is rotated in the reverse direction to move the first motor gear 1247, the first gear 1251, and the second gear 1253 to the left. Rotating operation is transmitted so as to return the second movable effect actor 1213 to the initial position 1217 by transmitting the reverse rotation operation (rotating in the direction indicated by the arrow H4 in FIG. 86). To work).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1303 integrally protruding on the back side of the front decoration member 1223 is provided on the back side of the back decoration member 1225 via the curved slide long groove 1305 provided on the back decoration member 1225. In addition, a retaining ring 1307 is attached to the protruding projection 1303 so as to be slidable along the slide long groove 1305 (see FIGS. 47 and 87).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a photo sensor 1309 is provided on the front side of the back decoration member 1225, and a projecting piece 1311 projecting on the back side of the back cover member 1273 is detected to detect a second movable effect accessory 1213. The initial position 1217 and the appearance position 1219 can be recognized. For example, when the projecting piece 1311 is detected by the photosensor 1309, it is recognized that the projecting piece 1311 is at the initial position 1217, and when the projecting piece 1311 is removed from the photosensor 1309 and is no longer detected. And a signal is sent to the sub-control board to reversely rotate the drive means after a predetermined time has elapsed since the presence position 1219 is recognized.

Moreover, in this embodiment, in the area | region corresponding to the 2nd position (other direction) 1219 which said 2nd movable production | presentation actor 1213 moved from the 1st position (one direction) 1217 in the inner surface downward area | region of the back box 1055, In order to produce an effect as if the tip of the second movable effect accessory 1213, that is, the tip of the blade-shaped exterior member 1227 was pierced, a second movable effect accessory storage portion 1313 is provided, The distal end of the exterior member 1227 of the second movable effect actor 1213 moved to the second position 1219 is configured to be retractable (see FIG. 90).
For example, the second movable effect accessory storage unit 1313 is disposed in the lower left region of the inner surface of the back box 1055 as viewed in the drawing, and the second movable effect accessory storage unit 1313 has a front side wall member 1315 and a rear side wall member formed in a predetermined external shape. A storage space 1319 is formed between 1317 (see FIG. 90).

Here, the light emission effect display form of the second movable effect actor 1213 in the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment, the second movable effect actor 1213 is associated with (moved from) the first position (one-direction initial position) 1217 to the second position (other-direction appearance position) 1219. Then, the light emitting means (LED) disposed at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 is caused to emit light, and the second reflection is performed from the light guide plate 1031 position corresponding to the other direction toward the light guide plate 1031 position corresponding to the one direction. A predetermined image (fourth image, other image) is displayed by light emission via the unit. That is, when the second movable effect actor 1213 moves from the first position (one-direction initial position) 1217 toward the second position (other-direction appearance position) 1219, the second position (other-direction appearance position). ) A predetermined image is lit or blinked from the light guide plate 1031 position corresponding to 1219 toward the light guide plate 1031 position corresponding to the first position (one direction) 1217.

For example, as described in the paragraph 0225, the LED 1038 below the left lower substrate 1037f emits light (flashes / lights) to the upper LED 1038 (FIG. 64 (a)), and then from the LED 1038 below the left middle substrate 1037e. The upper LED 1038 emits light (flashes / lights up) (FIG. 64B), and then the LED 1038 below the left upper substrate 1037d emits light (flashes / lights up) (FIG. 64C). Thus, an image (fourth image, other image) like lightning is emitted and displayed on the entire region of the light guide plate 1031 from the lower region of the game board to the upper region (FIG. 63 and FIG. 63). (See FIG. 64).
And when the 2nd movable production | presentation actor 1213 moves to the 2nd position (another direction appearance position) 1219, LED of the LED board 1233 with which the 2nd movable production | presentation actor 1213 is equipped light-emits. Configure. When the LED on the LED substrate 1233 emits light, light is incident on the lens member 1231 disposed in front of the LED substrate 1233, and the periphery of the exterior member 1277 is caused to emit light.

  Thereby, the light emission effect of the second movable effect character 1213 and the effect by the large action in a certain direction of the second movable effect character 1213 and the light emission display effect in the direction opposite to the direction of the large action. By this, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that there will be development that is advantageous for the game.

Although not particularly illustrated, also in the present embodiment, before the second movable effect actor 1213 starts to move, the LED 1038 disposed at a predetermined position of the light guide plate 1031 is caused to emit light to display a predetermined light emission display (specification). The player may be informed of the movement of the second movable effect actor 1213 by performing a light emission display).
The light emitting display image that is notified before the second movable effect actor 1213 starts moving and the light emitting display image that is displayed based on the movement are not particularly limited, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. .

<Third movable director>
The third movable effect actor 1321 includes a plurality of movable effect actors (a first combination movable effect agent 1323 and a second combination movable effect agent 1335) that can be separated and combined, and the plurality of movable effect actors. A driving means 1390 for moving one movable directing effect (second combination movable directing effect 1335) of the directing effects, and any of the plurality of movable directing effects The first locking member 1391 provided on the object (first combination movable effect character 1323) and the other movable effect character other than the movable effect character provided with the first locking member 1391 (second A movable movable combination 1335), which includes a second locking member 1393 that can be locked with the first locking member 1391, and the movable locking mechanism 1390 is provided with the second locking member 1393. Directional actor (second combination movable production By moving the object 1335) from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326, the locked state between the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393 is released, and the first locking member is provided. A stage character (first combination movable stage character 1323) is movable from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326.

FIG. 91 to FIG. 98 show an example of the third movable effect character 1321.
The third movable effect actor (other movable effect actors) 1321 in the present embodiment is composed of a first combination movable effect agent 1323 and a second combination movable effect agent 1335 that can be separated and combined. It is provided in front of the second movable effect accessory 1213. And in this embodiment, the 1st combination movable production | presentation actor 1323 and the 2nd combination movable production | presentation actor 1335 which comprise the 3rd movable production | presentation actor (other movable production | presentation actor) 1321 isolate | separate, It is assumed that after moving from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326, the second movable effect actor 1213 is movable from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326.

  In the present embodiment, a second movable member 1337, which will be described later, constituting the first combination movable effect combination 1323 and the second combination movable effect combination 1335 is positioned on the front side of the light guide plate 1031. It is arranged.

  The first combination movable effect combination 1323 is inserted through the boss 1032 protruding from the front surface side of the light guide plate 1031 with respect to the mounting hole 1370 a protruding from the upper left end of the first base member 1370 toward the drawing. And fix with screws. Then, a boss 1034 protruding from the front surface side of the light guide plate 1031 is inserted into the mounting hole 1364 provided in the first base member 1370 and fixed with screws.

Similarly, the boss 1036 protruding from the front surface side of the light guide plate 1031 is inserted into the mounting hole 1366 provided in the first base member 1370 and fixed with screws. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first base member 1370 is integrally disposed on the front surface side of the light guide plate 1031 by screwing.
Then, a shaft member 1362 that protrudes toward the front near the upper left end of the front surface of the first base member 1370 is pivoted to a hole 1333 a provided at the upper left end of the first back side support plate 1333. To wear.

A second support member 1349 (including a second front mechanism base 1351, a drive mechanism unit 1353, and a second rear mechanism base 1355), which will be described later, constituting the second combination movable effect combination 1335 is a predetermined number. It is attached to the back box 1055 with screws, and adjacent to the light guide plate 1031 through a predetermined range of cutouts provided in the region above the light guide plate 1031 (for example, upper right in FIG. 52). It arrange | positions so that it may face ahead.
In addition, a part of the second support member 1349 is attached and fixed via a boss 1030 protruding from the front side of the light guide plate 1031. For example, in this embodiment, the boss 1030 is fixed to the hole 1353a provided on the side surface side of the drive mechanism 1353 with screws, and is attached to the front surface of the light guide plate 1031 (see FIGS. 52 and 91).

  The first combination movable effect combination 1323 and the second combination movable effect combination 1335 each have the following configuration as a movable member.

  The first combination movable effect actor 1323 is disposed on the back side of the first exterior member 1327 having a predetermined shape and the first exterior member 1327, and the first reflector having a predetermined through hole 1329a. (Reflector) 1329, a first LED board 1331 provided with a predetermined LED 1331a, provided on the back side of the first reflector (reflector) 1329, and provided on the back side of the first LED board 1331 The first backside support plate 1333 to be formed has a first movable member 1325 integrally formed (see FIG. 91).

The first back side support plate 1333 is formed with a curved long groove 1333b penetrating over the front side and the back side, and the long groove 1333b has a boss 1370b protruding from the front side of the first base member 1370. Are communicated with each other and pivotally attached to the shaft.
In other words, the first combination movable effect actor 1323 is provided with a shaft member 1362 protruding toward the front near the upper left end of the front surface of the first base member 1370 at the upper left end of the first back support plate 1333. Since it is pivotally attached to the formed hole 1333a, the boss 1370b is guided along the long groove 1333b while being configured to be rotatable about the shaft member 1362 (FIG. 91, FIG. 97 and FIG. 98).

  The second combination movable effect actor 1335 is disposed on the back side of the second exterior member 1339 having a predetermined shape and the second exterior member 1339, and is a second reflector having a predetermined through hole 1341a. (Reflector) 1341, a second LED board 1343 provided with a predetermined LED 1343 a, and a second LED board 1343 provided on the back side of the second reflector (reflector) 1341. The second movable member 1337 is formed integrally with the second back side support plate 1345 (see FIG. 91).

In the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339, a predetermined region is displayed in a light emitting effect by light emitted from the LED 1331a of the first LED board 1331 and the LED 1343a of the second LED board 1343, respectively. It is configured.
In the present embodiment, only the edge vicinity regions 1328 and 1340 on the respective surfaces of the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 are configured to have transparency, so that each of the edge vicinity regions 1328. And 1340 are configured to emit light (see FIGS. 91 to 93). In the present embodiment, the first exterior member 1327 and the entire second exterior member 1339 are formed of a permeable member, and only the predetermined area on the surface, that is, the edge vicinity areas 1328 and 1340 are left non-permeable. Surface treatment (for example, decorating the surface with a non-permeable colorant) is performed. Therefore, the back side of the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 exhibits a lens effect except for the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339, and further enhances the diffusion / reflection effect. Therefore, predetermined lens cut processing (lens cut processing units 1327a and 1339a) is performed (see FIG. 93).

For example, the light from the LED 1331a of the first LED board 1331 passes through a predetermined through hole 1329a of a first reflector (reflector) 1329 disposed on the front surface thereof, and is in the vicinity of the edge portion having transparency. Irradiated outward from 1328 (see FIG. 93). Further, the light that has passed through the through-hole 1329a is irradiated and emitted from the edge vicinity region 1328 after being diffused and reflected by the lens cut processing portion 1327a formed on the back side of the first exterior member 1327 (FIG. 93).
In addition, since it has the same structure also in the 2nd combination movable production | presentation actor 1335, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The light emission effect display areas of the first exterior member 1327 and the second exterior member 1339 are not particularly limited and can be changed within the scope of the present invention. In addition, the light emission mode may be either lighting or blinking, all the LEDs may emit light at the same time, or only predetermined LEDs may be lit or blinking. It is also possible to obtain a light emitting mode in which the above are combined appropriately.

  The second movable member 1337 is supported by a second support member 1349 so that it can be driven. The first movable member 1325 rotates according to the driving operation of the second movable member 1337. It is simply supported by the first support member 1347 and the first base member 1370 so as to be movable (see FIGS. 91, 97 and 98).

  The second support member 1349 includes a second front mechanism base 1351 disposed on the back side of the second back side support plate 1345 and a drive mechanism disposed on the back side of the second front mechanism base 1351. The unit 1353 and the second rear mechanism base 1355 disposed on the back side of the drive mechanism unit 1353 are integrally configured.

  The drive mechanism portion 1353 is configured by accommodating a predetermined drive mechanism in an internal space sandwiched between the second front mechanism base 1351 and the second rear mechanism base 1355, and the second front mechanism base 1351. The drive mechanism base 1357 is slidable in the vertical direction on the back surface, and the slide cylinder portion 1371a is fixed to the drive mechanism base 1357, and both ends 1371b of the slide shaft 1371 sliding inside the slide cylinder portion 1371a are provided. 1371b is fixed to the back surface (inner surface) of the second front mechanism base 1351.

  The driving means 1390 is fixedly provided on the back surface (outer surface) of the second rear mechanism base 1355, and the rotation shaft of the driving means 1390 is inserted from the back side through the hole 1360 of the second mechanism base 1355. At the same time, a third motor gear 1389 attached to the rotary shaft on the front surface side of the second mechanism base 1355 and a shaft member 1358 projecting on the front surface (inner surface) of the second rear mechanism base 1355 are rotated. An idle gear 1359 that is movably attached and meshes with the third motor gear 1389, and a shaft member 1356 that projects from the front surface (inner surface) of the second rear mechanism base 1355. The link gear 1361 meshing with the gear 1359 and the link gear 1361 rotate to rotate clockwise and counterclockwise. One end 1385 is locked to the upper end of the link arm 1365 and the drive mechanism base 1357, and the other end 1387 side protrudes into the through-sliding groove 1375 on the other end side of the link arm 1365. And a tension spring 1383 provided to be locked to a locking member 1379 that locks 1377 (see FIGS. 91, 97, and 98). The lower end of the drive mechanism base 1357 that slides between the second front mechanism base 1351 and the second rear mechanism base 1355 is juxtaposed with the protruding shaft 1377 of the second movable member 1337. A connecting hole portion 1380 is formed through which the second protruding shaft 1378 is inserted and pivotally mounted. The second protruding shaft 1378 is attached to the connecting hole portion 1380 through a slide groove 1350 provided so as to penetrate through the front side and the back side of the second front mechanism base 1351.

  The link gear 1361 is rotatably provided with a single protrusion 1363 provided at a predetermined position on the front side.

The link arm 1365 is formed in a long plate shape, and the one end 1367 side is provided with a shaft support portion 1369 that is pivotally supported by the second rear mechanism base 1355, and the other end 1368 side is directed toward the one end 1367 side. A penetration slide groove 1375 having a predetermined length is provided, and a non-penetration slide groove 1381 is provided from the vicinity of the penetration slide groove 1375 toward the one end 1367 side.
In the penetrating slide groove 1375 of the link arm 1365, a projecting shaft 1377 projecting to the back side of the second movable member 1337 passes through the slide groove 1352 of the second front mechanism base 1351 and projects to the back side. A through slide groove 1375 is slidably disposed through a member 1379. As described above, the other end 1387 side of the tension spring 1383 is locked to the locking member 1379. The projection 1363 of the link gear 1361 is slid and moved in the non-penetrating slide groove 1381 of the link arm 1365.
Reference numeral 1376 in the figure is a cover on the front side of the configuration of the portion provided with the protruding shaft 1377.

A second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393 projecting toward the first movable member 1325 is provided on the back surface side of the second movable member 1337 constituting the second combination movable effect combination 1335. (See FIGS. 94 to 98).
Projecting toward the second movable member 1337 on the back side of the first movable member 1325 constituting the first combination movable effect actor 1323, and a second locking member (second projecting portion) 1393. A first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 that can be locked is provided (see FIGS. 94 to 98).

A first locking member (first protruding portion) 1391 protrudes in a rod shape, and a second locking member (second protruding portion) 1393 has a first locking member (first protruding portion) protruding in the rod shape. ) Has a recess 1395 for receiving 1391 (see FIGS. 94 to 96).
Further, in the present embodiment, the width in the front-rear direction of the recess 1395 of the second locking member (second protruding portion) 1393 is the protruding direction of the first locking member (first protruding portion) 1391 (in the arrow B1). The structure which becomes narrow as it goes to the direction shown) is adopted. In other words, the width of the recess 1395 in the front-rear direction becomes narrower from the recess end on the side facing the first locking member 1391 toward the recess end on the side opposite to the first locking member 1391 ( In other words, it is also said that the width in the front-rear direction becomes narrower from the distal end side to the far side of the second locking member 1393). In FIG. 95, the portion indicated by reference numeral W1 is the width in the front-rear direction of the recess 1395 at the end of the recess facing the first locking member 1391, and the portion indicated by W2 is opposite to the first locking member 1391. It is a recessed end portion on the side to be connected, and has a relationship of W1> W2.

Therefore, for example, when returning to the initial position 1324, the first locking member (first protruding portion) 1391 can be easily accommodated in the recessed portion 1395 of the second locking member (second protruding portion) 1393, and the recessed portion 1395. Since the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 can be held by the narrow portion, the swing can be firmly suppressed.
Moreover, the following effects may be exhibited by employ | adopting the structure which becomes gradually narrow from the wide part of the recessed part 1395 to a narrow part like this embodiment.
For example, when the first locking member (first protrusion) 1391 and the second locking member (second protrusion) 1393 are separated, the first locking member (first Even if the positions of the one protruding portion 1391 and the second locking member (second protruding portion) 1393 are slightly shifted in the front-rear direction, the first locking member (first Since the protruding portion 1391 can be picked up, there is an allowable range in the front-rear direction at the start of the locking operation, and the first locking member (first protruding portion) 1391 can be easily and reliably held.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable member 1325 is provided with the first locking member 1391, and the second movable member 1337 is provided with the second locking member 1393. It is possible to provide the second locking member 1393 and the first movable member 1337 to include the first locking member 1391, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

With this configuration, when the motor gear 1389 of the third drive unit 1390 is rotated in a predetermined direction, the rotation is transmitted to the link gear 1361 via the idle gear 1359.
When the link gear 1361 rotates in a predetermined direction, the protrusion 1363 provided on the front surface of the link gear 1361 slides in the non-penetrating slide groove 1381 of the link arm 1365 in the predetermined direction.

By this operation, the link arm 1365 rotates in the clockwise direction shown in FIG. 98 against the spring force of the tension spring 1383, and is slidably disposed in the through slide groove 1375 according to the rotation operation of the link arm 1365. The protruding shaft 1377 of the second movable member 1337 is moved downward along a slide groove 1352 provided in the second front mechanism base 1351. Specifically, first, the protruding shaft 1377 drops in the vertical direction along the longitudinal groove region 1352a of the slide groove 1352. As a result, the second movable member 1337 once falls downward. At this time, the second projecting shaft 1378 is coupled to the coupling hole 1380 of the drive mechanism base 1357 and falls together with the drive mechanism base 1357 with the slide groove 1350 downward.
Then, the projecting shaft 1377 descends along the curved groove 1352b of the slide groove 1352 while rotating clockwise as viewed from the back side shown in FIG.
As a result, the locked state of the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393 is released, and the second movable member 1337 rotates with the protruding shaft as a fulcrum (in the rear view shown in FIG. 98). It rotates clockwise in the direction of the figure) and moves from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326 (see FIGS. 44, 45 and 89).

Then, when the motor gear 1389 of the third drive unit 1390 is rotated in the reverse direction, the rotation operation is transmitted to the link gear 1361 via the idle gear 1359.
When the link gear 1361 rotates in a predetermined direction (rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction), the protrusion 1363 provided on the front surface of the link gear 1361 passes through the non-penetrating slide groove 1381 of the link arm 1365. Slide and move in a predetermined direction (a direction opposite to the rotation direction).

By this operation, the link arm 1365 is also added with the spring force of the tension spring 1383 and rotated counterclockwise as viewed in the figure, and is slidably disposed in the through slide groove 1375 according to the rotation operation of the link arm 1365. As a result, the 1337 projecting shaft 1377 moves up and moves along the curved groove 1352b of the slide groove 1352 provided in the second front mechanism base 1351, and the vertical groove region It moves upward in the vertical direction along 1352a. The second protruding shaft 1378 moves upward along the slide groove 1350 in conjunction with the upward movement of the protruding shaft 1377. The second movable member 1337 moves from the appearance position 1326 to the initial position 1324 so that the first locking member 1391 scoops up the second locking member 1393 and the first locking member 1391 The locking member 1393 is locked. The first combined movable effect combination 1323 (first movable member 1325) and the second combined movable effect combination 1335 (second movable member 1337) return to the initial position 1324, and the second combined movable effect. When the director 1335 (second movable member 1337) moves from the appearance position 1326 to the initial position 1324, the first locking member 1391 is returned while being accommodated in the recess 1395 of the second locking member 1393.

As described above, the third movable production role 1321 is separated into the first combination movable production role 1323 and the second combination movable production role 1335 and rotated (from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326). The second movable effect actor 1213 moves (rotates and expands / contracts) from the initial position 1217 to the appearance position 1219 as described above, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the appearance position 1219 is obtained. When the second movable effect combination 1213 in the position returns to the initial position 1217 and the first combination movable effect combination 1323 rotates in the reverse direction and returns to the initial position 1324, the second combination movable effect combination 1213 Returning to the initial position 1324 while locking the accessory 1335, it becomes one movable stage actor, and the second movable stage actor 1213 is shielded on the back side so that it is difficult to see, so that the player's interest Improvement Achieved.
Further, in the present embodiment, the front mechanism base 1351 is provided with a photosensor 1354, and the drive mechanism base 1357 is detected so that the initial position 1324 and the appearance position 1326 of the third movable effect actor 1321 can be recognized. doing. For example, when the drive mechanism base 1357 is detected by the photosensor 1354, it is recognized that the drive mechanism base 1357 is at the initial position 1324, and when the drive mechanism base 1357 is detached from the photosensor 1354 and is no longer detected. 1324, a signal is sent to the sub-control board in order to reversely rotate the driving means after a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence position 1324 is recognized.

Here, the light emission effect display form of the third movable effect character 1321 in the present embodiment will be described.
First, for example, a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the second movable effect actor 1213 is movable from the first position (one-way initial position) 1217 to the second position (other-direction appearance position) 1219. In this case, first, the movement of the third movable effect actor 1321 is started. At this time, only the edge vicinity regions 1328 and 1340 of the first combination movable effect combination 1323 and the second combination movable effect combination 1335 of the third movable effect combination 1321 are displayed as light emission effects. In this case, the light emission mode may be blinking or lighting.
Then, the first combination movable effect combination 1323 and the second combination movable effect combination 1335 of the third movable effect combination 1321 move and move from the initial position 1324 to the appearance position 1326. The lighting effect is still displayed.

Then, in a state in which the third movable effect combination 1321 is displayed in the light emission effect at the appearance position 1326, the second movable effect combination 1213 is moved from the first position (one-way initial position) 1217 to the second position. It moves in the production state where light is emitted up to position (appearing position in other direction) 1219.
Then, as described in the paragraph 0225, the LEDs 1038 of the left upper substrate 1037d, the left middle substrate 1037e, and the left lower substrate 1037f emit light, and extend from the lower region of the game board to the upper region in the entire region of the light guide plate 1031. Thus, an image such as lightning is emitted and displayed (see FIGS. 63 and 64).
And when the 2nd movable production | presentation actor 1213 moves to the 2nd position (another direction appearance position) 1219, LED1233a with which the LED board 1233 with which the 2nd movable production | presentation actor 1213 is equipped is equipped. Configure to emit light. When the LED 1233a emits light, light is incident on the lens member 1231 disposed in front of the LED 1233a, and the periphery of the exterior member 1277 is caused to emit light.

Thereby, the light emission effect of the second movable effect character 1213 and the effect by the large action in a certain direction of the second movable effect character 1213 and the light emission display effect in the direction opposite to the direction of the large action. By this, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that there will be development that is advantageous for the game.
In addition, in this embodiment, although one Embodiment comprised from the two members of the 1st combination movable production | presentation actor 1323 and the 2nd combination movable production | presentation actor 1335 was shown, this invention is three or more isolation | separation. In addition, it may be composed of a plurality of movable stage effects that can be combined, and the design can be changed as appropriate according to the embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first locking member (first protrusion) 1391 protruding in a bar shape is provided in a movable effect accessory that is not connected to the driving means, and the first locking member (first protrusion) protruding in the bar shape is provided. Part) The second engaging member (second projecting part) 1393 having an upward concave part 1395 that accommodates the part 1391 is provided in the movable effect combination connected to the driving means, but the reverse may be possible. That is, the first locking member (first projecting portion) 1391 is provided in a movable effect combination connected to the driving means, and the second locking member (second projecting member) 1393 is provided in another movable effect combination. It is also possible and within the scope of the present invention. In this case, the second locking member (second projecting portion) is provided with a downward-facing recess (not shown), and the first locking member of the movable effect accessory that attempts to return to the initial position by the rotation operation of the driving means. However, it can be locked while being fitted from below into the downwardly recessed portion of the second locking member of the movable effect combination at the appearance position.
Furthermore, in this embodiment and the other embodiments described above, the first locking member (first protruding portion) 1391 and the second locking member (second protruding portion) 1393 are both described as members that protrude. However, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, either one is configured in a protruding shape, while the other is a locking member configured in the protruding shape (the locking of one of the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393). Member) formed in the shape of a depression that receives the member from below, the first locking member 1391 and the second locking member 1393, the other locking member, It may be provided on the lower surface of any one of the second combination movable effect combination 1335, and the same function and effect can be exhibited.
"Fourth embodiment"

99 to 139 show a fourth embodiment.
The pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is substantially the same as the third embodiment, but differs from the third embodiment in the following configuration (see FIGS. 99 to 139).
Hereinafter, only the configuration different from the third embodiment will be described, and the third embodiment will be referred to for other configurations. In the present embodiment, the outer rail and the game nail are not shown, but, as in the first embodiment, they are arranged at predetermined positions, and the display device (liquid crystal display device) 4 is Although not shown, a well-known display device is appropriately applied within the scope of the present invention.

  In the back box 1055, a fourth movable effect role 1500, a fifth movable effect role 1589, a sixth movable effect role 1741, an eighth movable effect character 1950, and a fourth light emission are displayed. Producing means 1990 is arranged at a predetermined position. Further, the game board 1 is provided with a fifth light emitting effect means 2000 and a sixth light emitting effect means 2011, respectively. In the present embodiment, a seventh movable effect combination 1900 is assumed as another embodiment of the sixth movable effect combination 1741.

<Fourth moving director>
99 and 101 to 111 show an example of the fourth movable effect actor 1500.
A fourth movable effect accessory (one movable effect accessory) 1500 includes a base portion 1501 (front base 1501a and back base 1501b) attached and fixed to the inner surface side of the back box 1055, and a base portion 1501 (front base). 1501a and back base 1501b) are provided on one end side (base end side) so that the one end side (base end side) is turnable, and the other end side (front end side) of arm 1509. A movable member 1531 that moves between a difficult first initial position 1505 and a first appearance position 1507 that is easy to visually recognize, and the movable member 1531 is moved from the first initial position 1505 to the first through the arm 1509. The driving unit 1529 can be moved to one appearance position 1507 (see FIGS. 99 and 101 to 111).

The arm 1509 includes a base end portion 1511 that is pivotally supported with respect to the base portion 1501, an arm portion 1513 protruding in a long shape from the base end portion 1511, and a movable member provided at the tip end of the arm portion 1513. It is comprised with the attaching part 1515, and is arrange | positioned by the drive means (motor) 1529 so that rotation is possible centering on the axial support part 1517 of the base end part 1511 (refer FIG. 103 thru | or FIG. 105). In the figure, reference numeral 1510 denotes a decorative lens member provided on the front surface of the arm 1509.
The movable portion mounting portion 1515 is formed in a short cylindrical shape, the back side is covered with a cover member 1521, and the movable member drive means (motor) that drives the movable member (a part of members including a decorative member) in the internal space. ) 1523 (see FIG. 103).

The arm 1509 has a base end portion 1511 pivotally attached to a shaft support portion 1517 projecting forward from the front surface of the back base 1501b constituting the base portion 1501 (a shaft attachment portion 1536).
The back base 1501b is provided with a drive means (motor) 1529 for arm movable operation, and a link gear 1532 with which a motor gear 1530 provided in the motor 1529 is meshed. The base end portion 1511 is urged by an elastic member (spring material) 1502 so that the movable member 1531 provided at the tip of the arm 1509 always returns to the first initial position 1505 (FIGS. 104 and 105). reference).
In the present embodiment, in order to smoothly move the base end portion 1511, predetermined sliding protrusions 1511b and 1511b are provided on the base end portion 1511 side, and a front base 1501a constituting the base portion 1501 is provided. Are provided with sliding grooves 1503 and 1503 on which the sliding protrusions 1511b and 1511b slide. 1511 can rotate (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

  The ring gear 1532 includes a protrusion 1532a on a part of the outer peripheral surface provided with gear teeth. Between the protrusion 1532a and the link arm shaft support 1511a formed on the upper peripheral surface of the base end 1511. A link arm 1534 is provided (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

  The link arm 1534 has an end 1534a pivotally attached to the link arm shaft support portion 1511a of the base end portion 1511 and an other end 1534b pivotally attached to the projection portion 1532a. It is formed in the shape of a flat bar. Further, the link arm 1534 has a shaft avoiding portion 1534c having a curved central region in the length direction (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

  Since such a configuration is adopted, when the motor gear 1530 rotates in the clockwise direction indicated by the arrow C1 in FIG. 105, the link gear 1532 that has received the rotation operation in the counterclockwise direction indicated by the arrow C2 in the figure. It rotates. As the link gear 1532 rotates in the counterclockwise direction (C1 direction), the link arm 1534 with the other end 1534b pivotally attached to the protrusion 1532a moves downward as indicated by the arrow D1.

  As the link arm 1534 moves downward (in the D1 direction), the base end portion 1511 of the arm 1509 on which the one end 1534a is axially attached is pressed downward, and rotates clockwise about the axial attachment portion 1536 with respect to the base portion 1501. The arm portion 1513 and the rotation member 1531 are moved to the first appearance position 1507 because they are rotated in the direction.

When the motor gear 1530 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction indicated by the arrow C3 in FIG. 105 after being positioned at the first appearance position 1507 for a predetermined time, the link gear 1532 that has received the rotation is indicated by the arrow C4 in the figure. It rotates in the clockwise direction. In accordance with the clockwise rotation of the link gear 1532, the link arm 1534 having the other end 1534b pivotally attached to the protrusion 1532a moves upward as indicated by the arrow D2.
As the link arm 1534 moves upward, the one end 1534a is pulled up above the base end 1511 of the arm 1509 that is pivotally mounted, and is rotated counterclockwise about the pivoted portion 1536 with respect to the base 1501. Therefore, the arm portion 1513 and the rotation member 1531 move from the first appearance position 1507 to the first initial position 1505. At this time, the base end portion 1511 is urged by the elastic member 1502 to rotate in the direction of the first initial position 1505 (counterclockwise direction), so that the load on the motor is also reduced.

108 and 109 are views showing the operation of the projecting member 1547 of the movable member 1531. FIG. 108 is a schematic rear view showing that the projecting member 1547 is at an easily visible appearance position 1548 on the annular guide surface 1563 of the guide base 1561. FIG. 109 is a schematic rear view showing that the protruding member 1547 is in an initial position 1546 that is difficult to visually recognize on the annular guide surface 1563 of the guide base 1561.
The movable member 1531 performs a predetermined movable effect by rotating. The movable member 1531 is fitted from the front of the decorative member 1533 disposed on the front side, the rotary base 1535 to which the decorative member 1533 is attached, and the rotary base 1535. An annular ornament 1537 to be inserted, a substrate cover 1539 disposed on the back side of the rotation base 1535, an LED substrate 1543 disposed on the back side of the substrate cover 1539, a reflector 1545 disposed on the back side of the LED substrate 1543, A projecting member 1547 that is provided on the back side (back) of the reflector 1545 and can be displaced to a retracted position (initial position) 1546 that is difficult to visually recognize and an appearance position 1548 that is easily visible as the decorative member 1533 rotates. The protruding member 1547 can rotate and always rotate to the retracted position (initial position) 1546. A rotating shaft base 1559 that is urged and supported by an elastic member (spring) 1549 to rotate together with the rotating base 1535, and a guide portion (annular guide) that displaces and guides the protruding member 1547. A guide base 1561 that is integrally fixed to the front surface of the movable member mounting portion 1515 and configured to be non-rotatable, and a transmission mechanism (gear) 1575 that transmits the rotation operation from the driving means 1523. (See FIGS. 103 and 105 to 111). The substrate cover 1539 and the rotation base 1535 are transmissive, but may be non-transmissive and can be modified within the scope of the present invention.

In the figure, reference numeral 1579 denotes a gear (motor gear) provided in the driving means (motor) 1523, and 1575 meshes with the motor gear 1579 of the driving means to rotate the driving means 1523 with the rotation base 1535 (annular ornament 1537) and the rotation shaft. This is a transmission gear for rotating the base 1559 (see FIGS. 103 and 106).
In the figure, reference numeral 1583 denotes a gear having a protrusion 1585 on the back side and detecting an initial position by a photosensor 1587 provided in the rotating member mounting portion 1515 (see FIG. 106). The protrusion 1585 is a photosensor. It is possible to recognize that the movable member 1531 is located at the initial position.

  The LED board 1543 includes predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 1541 arranged at predetermined positions on the front side of the board and predetermined LEDs (light emitting means) 1542 arranged at predetermined positions on the back side. The substrate cover 1539, the LED substrate 1543, and the reflector 1545 are arranged in a non-rotating state.

  The projecting member 1547 includes a main body 1551 formed of a transparent member in a predetermined flat blade shape, a light introducing portion 1553 that projects integrally with the lower end of the main body 1551, a spring mounting portion 1555 that projects, and the spring A spring end locking portion 1558 is provided on the front side of the lower end of the main body 1551 adjacent to the attachment portion 1555, and is formed in a cylindrical shape on the back side of the main body 1551, and is formed on the annular guide surface 1563. A sliding guide surface sliding portion 1557 is provided (see FIGS. 106 to 108). The spring mounting portion 1555 is provided so as to protrude over the front surface and the rear surface of the main body 1551 of the protruding member 1547.

The projecting member 1547 performs a movable effect of moving around the rotation base 1535, and the projecting member 1547 itself receives light from the LED 1542 on the back surface side of the LED substrate 1543 through the light introducing portion 1553, thereby producing a light emitting effect. It also functions as a lens unit to perform.
The light introducing portion 1553 is formed in a substantially quarter-spherical shape, and is disposed so that the concave inner surface side faces the LED 1542 on the back surface side of the LED substrate 1543.
An annular reflector 1545 provided in close contact with the LED substrate 1543 is interposed between the LED substrate 1542 and the light introducing portion 1553, and the reflector 1545 includes a concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 and the light introducing portion 1553. A recessed portion 1545a is formed at a position facing the LED 1542 coaxially and with the concave inner surface and the LED 1542 in alignment with each other (see FIG. 111).
When the main body 1551 of the projecting member 1547 is positioned at the appearance position 1548, the light introducing portion 1553 is set so as to correspond to the LED 1542 of the light emitting means.

  Therefore, the light from the LED 1542 is emitted toward the concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 to display the main body 1551 in a light emitting effect. Further, the light emitted from the LED 1542 is reflected and diffused by the concave inner surface, and is also applied to the surface portion of the main body 1551. At this time, since a predetermined lens cut 1551a is formed on the surface of the main body 1551, the irradiated light is reflected and diffused by the lens cut 1551a to produce a light emission effect on the entire main body 1551 (see FIG. 111). In addition, the reflector 1545 is provided with a recessed portion 1545a disposed coaxially with the concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 and the LED 1542 so as to be aligned with the opening of the concave inner surface and the LED 1542, respectively. Light from the LED 1542 can be irradiated without being diffused toward the concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553 by the hollow portion 1545a. Further, when the protruding member 1547 is housed and positioned in the retracted position 1546 (a gap 1577 described later), the light introducing portion 1553 is not in the corresponding position. Although not limited in particular, it is also possible to provide more LEDs so that the protruding member 1547 can cope with any position.

The guide base 1561 is provided on the front surface of the base board 1561a in a concave shape with a first position 1565 provided in a circumferential direction of a predetermined length and the first position 1565 and having a smaller diameter than the first position 1565. An annular guide surface (guide portion) 1563 provided alternately with the second position 1567 in the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface protrudes forward (see FIGS. 103 and 107 to 109).
For example, in the present embodiment, the annular guide surface 1563 is formed to have a smaller diameter than the outer periphery of the base board 1561a, the second positions 1567 are provided in a concave shape at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular guide surface 1563, and the second position Guide surfaces other than 1567 are set as the first position 1565.
The second position 1567 is recessed in a circular shape from one end of the first position 1565 when viewed from the front, and is gently connected to the adjacent first position 1565 via a gentle curved surface 1569.

Further, in a substantially central region of the front surface of the base board 1561a of the guide base 1561, a first cylindrical portion 1571 protruding forward from the annular guide surface 1563 and a substantially central region of the first cylindrical portion 1571 are provided. The second cylindrical portion 1573 having a smaller diameter than the first cylindrical portion 1571 is provided. The second cylindrical portion 1573 is inserted through the through holes provided at the centers of the LED substrate 1543, the substrate cover 1539, and the substrate cover 1539, and then the shaft bush 1540 is attached to the tip thereof. A shaft member 1535a protruding from the back surface of the rotation base 1535 is inserted into the shaft bush 1540 and protrudes to the back surface side of the guide base 1561 (see FIG. 107). The protruding end of the shaft member 1535a is connected to a transmission gear 1575 so that the rotation operation of the drive gear 1579 is transmitted to the rotation base 1535.
An annular gap 1577 is formed between the front surface of the guide base 1561 and the back surface of the rotary base 1535 with the width of the tip of the first cylindrical portion 1571 (tip surface excluding the second cylindrical portion 1573). (See FIG. 107). The gap 1577 functions as a retracted position 1546 that is difficult to visually recognize when the protruding member 1547 is positioned at the second position 1567 (see FIGS. 103 and 107).

The rotating shaft base 1559 is integrally attached to the rotating base 1535 by screwing, and is formed in an annular shape so as to be slidably attached to the outer periphery of an annular guide surface 1563 provided on the guide base 1561, and the spring A winding portion of a spring 1549 is fitted around the mounting portion 1555, and the spring mounting portion 1555 is rotatably attached to the end surface 1559 a of the rotating shaft base 1559.
Then, the other end (free end) of the spring 1549 is locked to a spring end locking portion 1558 protruding from the front end surface of the protruding member 1547.
In this manner, the protruding member 1547 is rotatably attached to the rotating shaft base 1559, and the guide surface sliding portion 1557 slides on the peripheral surface of the annular guide surface 1563 when fitted on the annular guide surface 1563. Arrange for possible.
At this time, the spring force of the spring 1549 is biased in a direction in which the main body 1551 is accommodated in the gap 1577 between the rotating shaft base 1559 and the guide base 1561 (see FIGS. 103 to 105).

Therefore, when the driving unit (motor) 1523 is rotated, the rotation operation of the gear (motor gear) 1579 provided in the driving unit (motor) 1523 is transmitted to the transmission gear 1575.
The rotation operation transmitted from the transmission gear 1575 is transmitted to the rotation base 1535 via a shaft member 1535a formed by fixing the transmission gear 1575 to one end. As a result, the rotating shaft base 1559 attached integrally with the rotating base 1535 rotates, so that the guide surface sliding portion 1557 of the projecting member 1547 provided on the rotating shaft base 1559 is It will slide on the outer periphery in a predetermined direction.
The protruding member 1547 is easily visible against the urging of the elastic member (spring) 1549 when the guide surface sliding portion 1557 is positioned at the first position 1565 of the annular guide surface 1563 by the rotation operation. The main body 1551 protrudes from the appearance position 1548 (see FIG. 108).
When the guide surface sliding portion 1557 reaches the second position 1567 of the annular guide surface 1563 by moving in the rotational direction (the direction indicated by reference numeral R1 in FIG. 108), the force of the elastic member (spring) 1549 The guide surface sliding portion 1557 falls to the second position 1567. Due to the dropping operation, the projecting member 1547 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction (the retraction direction indicated by reference numeral R2 in FIG. 108) by the force of the spring 1549 and is accommodated in the retraction position 1546 (the gap 1577) that is difficult to see. To do. Thereafter, the guide surface sliding portion 1557 slides on the gentle curved surface 1569 and is positioned at the adjacent first position 1565. Thus, when the protruding member 1547 reaches the first position 1565 via the guide surface sliding portion 1557, the protruding member 1547 protrudes and is positioned at an easily visible appearance position 1548. This operation is repeated by the rotation operation, and the protruding member 1547 moves alternately between the first position 1565 and the second position 1567.

  With this configuration, the movable member 1531 moved from the retracted position (initial position) 1546 to the appearance position 1548 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the driving means (motor) 1523 at the appearance position 1548 and the LED 1541 is operated. And 1542, the front side of the movable member 1531 and the protruding member 1547 emit light. More specifically, the protruding member 1547 is a transparent member formed in a predetermined flat blade shape, and has a light introducing portion 1553 at the lower end. The protruding inner surface side of the protruding member 1547 is the first position. Since the LED 1542 is disposed so as to face the LED 1542 on the back surface side of the LED substrate 1543 when it is located at 1565 and is in the protruding state (the state shown in FIGS. 108 and 111), the light from the LED 1542 is Irradiated toward the concave inner surface of the light introducing portion 1553, the main body 1551 is displayed as a light emission effect.

In addition, the light emitted from the LED 1542 is reflected and diffused by the concave inner surface and is also irradiated to the surface portion of the main body 1551. Since the predetermined lens cut 1551a is formed on the surface of the main body 1551, the irradiated light is Reflected and diffused by the lens cut 1551a, the entire body 1551 produces a light emission effect (see FIG. 111).
Note that when the protruding member 1547 is accommodated in the retracted position 1546 (the gap 1577), the light introducing portion 1553 is not in a position corresponding to the LED 1542.
In addition, a large number of LEDs 1541 are provided on the front side of the LED substrate 1543, each of which performs a predetermined issuance effect according to the setting, and emits an annular ornament 1537 and a decorative member 1533 through the rotation base 1535. At this time, the LED 1541 is provided at a position corresponding to a decorative display portion 1538 that is integrally formed from the annular ornament 1537 and arranged in parallel below the decorative member 1533 together with a light emitting effect in the front direction by a large number of LEDs 1541. . Therefore, if a predetermined character design, character name, or the like is displayed on the decoration display unit 1538, a predetermined light emission effect is achieved when the light from the LED 1541 is irradiated.
Although not limited in particular, it is also possible to provide more LEDs so that the protruding member 1547 can cope with any position.

<Fifth movable production role>
FIG. 102 and FIGS. 112 to 117 show an example of the fifth movable effect actor 1589.
The fifth movable effect combination (other movable effect combinations) 1589 is composed of a plurality of movable bodies different from the fourth movable effect combination 1500. In the present embodiment, the fifth movable performance accessory 1589 is described below, at a position deviated from the opening 1 h of the game board 1, that is, outside in the horizontal direction of the opening 1 h when viewed from the front of the game board 1. The movable body is located at the second initial position 1506 (FIG. 100), and moves from the second initial position 1506 toward the center of the opening 1h, and the fourth movable effect. The second appearance position is when the accessory 1500 is arranged so as to surround the fourth movable effect accessory 1500 located at the first appearance position 1505 located at the approximate center of the opening 1h. 1508 (FIG. 102).

In this embodiment, the movable body is composed of a pair of a left movable body 1591 formed in a semi-annular body and a right movable body 1593 similarly formed in a semi-annular body, and each movable body is moved horizontally and separated. -It can be connected, and when it is connected, it forms an annular accessory that enters the opening 1h of the game board 1 (see FIGS. 102, 112, and 113).
When the movable member 1531 constituting the fourth movable effect combination 1500 is located at the first appearance position 1507, the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 constituting the annular combination are the second. When moving toward the appearance position 1508, the movable member 1531 is surrounded by the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 in the central empty space formed between the movable member 1531 and the opening 1h. Therefore, one design can be formed as a whole. That is, a design that occupies the opening 1h of the game board 1 appears in the depth direction of the game board 1, and at least a part of the arm 1509 of the fourth movable performance accessory 1500 is difficult to see. Since it is shielded, the game can be enjoyed (see FIG. 102).

  The left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 each have a target shape. Therefore, the left movable body 1591 will be described here, and the description of the right movable body 1593 will be omitted. The left movable body 1591 employs the following configuration (see FIGS. 114 to 117).

  The left movable body 1591 is provided with a decorative member 1595 having a plurality of openings, a lens member 1605 which is provided on the back side of the decorative member 1595 and has been subjected to predetermined processing, and is provided on the back side of the lens member 1605. And includes a reflector (reflecting part) 1611 having an opening and an LED substrate 1621 provided on the back side of the reflecting part.

  The decorative member 1595 includes, for example, three triangular openings 1597 arranged alternately in the circumferential direction between the inner and outer edge portions formed in a flat semi-annular body by a non-translucent member (first opening group Next, an elongated groove-like opening 1601 (second opening 1603) provided between the inner and outer edges is disposed next to the first opening group 1599 and the second opening 1603 alternately. It is composed repeatedly. Note that a small arc-shaped protruding decorative portion 1597 a is provided in the central opening 1597 of the openings 1597.

  The lens member 1605 is formed in a flat semi-annular body by a translucent member, and a plurality of star-shaped projecting regions 1607 are provided on the front surface of the lens member 1605 at predetermined intervals, and between the star-shaped projecting regions 1607. Is provided with an elongated region 1609.

  The reflectors (reflecting portions) 1611 are provided on both sides of the openings 1615 similar to the central triangular opening 1597 constituting the first opening group 1599 of the decorative member 1595, and form the first opening group 1599. A third opening group 1613 composed of triangular openings 1617 formed to be smaller than the left and right triangular openings 1597 and a fourth slot formed in the shape of an elongated groove in the same manner as the second opening 1603 of the decorative member 1595. The openings 1619 are alternately repeated.

  The LED board 1621 is configured such that a predetermined LED is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the substrate formed into a semi-annular body, and in this embodiment, in the first opening group 1599 (third opening group 1613). The LED 1621a is arranged in the region corresponding to the left and right of the central triangular opening 1597 (1615), and the LED 1621b is arranged in the region corresponding to the second opening 1603 (fourth opening 1619).

  That is, when the LEDs 1621a and 1621b are turned off, the opening shape of the decoration member 1595 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 116). When the LEDs 1621a and 1621b are turned on, the star-shaped projecting region 1607 of the lens member 1605 forms a substantially star shape. Since the decoration effect that emits light can be expressed (see FIG. 117), the light emission effect that the appearance of the decoration member 1595 is different between when the light emitting means is turned off and when it is turned on can be achieved. In addition, even when only the LED 1621a is lit, it is possible to produce an effect of light emission display in a substantially star shape.

  The left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 have other driving means that can be moved from the second initial position 1506, which is difficult to visually recognize, to the second appearance position 1508, which is easily visible. The other driving means are separately provided in each of the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593.

  Since the respective drive means for driving the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 have the same configuration, the drive means for driving the left movable body 1591 will be described here, and the drive means for driving the right movable body 1593. Description of is omitted. The driving means for driving the left movable body 1591 employs the following configuration (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

The motor gear 1625 of the drive motor 1623 transmits the rotation operation of the motor 1623 to the intermediate gear (pinion gear) 1627 and transmits the rotation operation of the intermediate gear 1627 to the rack 1629. A lower end slide portion 1591 a of the left movable body 1591 is integrally attached to the rack 1629. In addition, a transmission gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed to the same shaft as the intermediate gear is engaged with the motor gear 1625 behind the intermediate gear 1627 (the back side of the intermediate gear 1627 in the drawing), and the motor gear 1625 rotates. When the operation is transmitted to a transmission gear (not shown), the intermediate gear 1627 rotates.
In the drawing, the drive motor 1623 is not shown, and only the arrangement position is shown by a lead line, but it is provided on the back side of the motor gear 1625.
Further, in the present embodiment, the rack 1629 and the guide shaft 1631 disposed in the horizontal direction are passed through the lower end of the left movable body 1591 so that the lateral blur is less likely to occur when the left movable body 1591 moves in the horizontal direction. The lower end slide portion 1591a of the left movable body 1591 is configured to be slidable in the horizontal direction along the guide shaft 1631.

The rack 1629 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) along a rack guide 1635 provided in a base member 1633 that extends across the horizontal direction in the lower region of the back box 1055. The rack 1629 to which the rotation operation is transmitted converts the rotation operation into a straight-ahead operation in the left-right direction and moves in the left-right direction (horizontal direction).
Further, the upper end side of the left movable body 1591 is slidably disposed with respect to the upper end guide rail 1639 disposed in the back box 1055.
Incidentally, in this embodiment, the upper end guide rail 1639 is attached to the position described below. For example, the upper end guide rail 1639 on the left side is attached to the upper region on the front side of the pre-mechanism base 1952 that constitutes an eighth movable effect combination 1950 described later.
Further, the upper end guide rail 1639 on the right side is attached to the upper region on the front side of the front base 1501a that constitutes the fourth movable effect combination 1500 described above. Note that the mounting position of the upper end guide rail 1639 is not limited to the mounting position of the present embodiment, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

Note that the rack 1629 for the left movable body 1591 and the rack 1629 for the right movable body 1593 guide the racks 1629 and 1629 on the front and rear surfaces of the rack guide 1635 so that they do not become obstacles when moving in the horizontal direction. In this way, the positions are shifted in the front-rear direction.
After the fourth movable effect combination 1500 is moved to the first appearance position 1507, the fifth movable effect combination 1589 (the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593) is moved to the first appearance position. The fifth movable effect actor 1589 (left movable body 1591 and right movable body 1593) is moved to the second appearance position 1508 so as to surround the fourth movable effect actor 1500 located at 1507. Thus, since the fourth movable director 110 is surrounded by the fifth movable director 1589 (the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593), at least a part of the arm 1509 is disposed. The fifth movable effect actor 1589 (the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593) can be made difficult to view.

  118 to 122 are other embodiments of the fourth movable effect combination 1500 and the fifth movable effect combination 1589.

  In the fourth embodiment, the fourth movable director 1105 and the fifth movable director 1589 are a movable member 1531 constituting the fourth movable director 1500 and a left constituting the fifth movable director 1589. The movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 have some differences, but the other configurations are the same as those of the previous embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The description of the previous embodiment is used for other parts.

  The movable member 1531 performs a predetermined movable effect by rotating, and includes a decorative member 1533 arranged on the front side, a substrate cover 1539 to which the decorative member 1533 is attached, and a back side of the substrate cover 1539. The LED 1541 of the LED board 1543 to be arranged is included, and is integrally disposed on a movable member mounting portion 1515 provided at the tip of the arm 1509. The LED substrate 1543 includes predetermined LEDs 1541 at predetermined positions on the front side of the substrate.

In the figure, reference numeral 1523 denotes a driving means (motor) for the movable member, which is provided on the front surface of the movable member mounting portion 1515. The rotation shaft 1523a faces the inside of the movable member mounting portion 1515, and the movable member mounting portion. A motor gear 1714 is attached inward of 1515 (in FIG. 118, a portion indicated by reference numeral 1714a is a shaft attachment portion for the rotating shaft 1523a on the front surface of the motor gear 1714). Motor gear 1714 meshes with adjacent intermediate gear 1575. In the present embodiment, a small gear 1575 a is integrally formed on the front surface of the intermediate gear 1575, and the small gear 1575 a meshes with the transmission gear 1710 so that the rotation operation can be transmitted to the decorative member 1533 via the shaft 1711. doing.
The transmission gear 1710 has a rotary shaft 1711 fixed to the front surface, and a connecting member 1711a fixed to the tip of the fixed shaft 1711. That is, by connecting and fixing the connecting member 1711 a to the back surface (inner surface) of the decorative member 1533, the rotation operation of the driving means (motor) 1523 from the motor gear 1714 is transmitted to the decorative member 1533 and rotates.
In this embodiment, a protrusion 1713 is provided on the front surface side of the transmission gear 1710, and the rotation operation is detected by the photosensor 1715 provided on the inner surface of the rotating member mounting portion 1515 (see FIG. 118).

The fifth movable effect actor (other movable effect actors) in the other embodiments of the present invention has some differences in the form of the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593, but other The effects of the configuration are the same as in the above embodiment.
In addition, according to the present embodiment, an effect in which the periphery of the movable member 1531 of the fourth movable effect actor 1500 is surrounded by the left movable body 1591 and the right movable body 1593 constituting the fifth movable effect actor 1589. Therefore, since the driving means (motor 1523) for moving the movable member 1531 can be made difficult to visually recognize from the front (from the player side), there is no possibility of deteriorating the beauty of the decoration effect of the entire gaming machine.

  The movable body is provided with a decoration member 1717 having a plurality of openings, a lens member 1723 provided with a predetermined processing on the back side of the decoration member 1717, and a back side of the lens member 1723, A sheet member 1729 having a predetermined opening hole portion 1731, a light guide lens member 1733 having a predetermined opening hole portion 1735, and a rear surface side of the light guide lens member 1733 provided on the back side of the sheet member 1729. LED board 1737 is comprised.

  For example, the decorative member 1717 includes three openings 1719 having a drop shape in a plan view alternately arranged between inner and outer edges formed in a flat semi-annular body by a non-translucent member (first The first aperture group 1721) is configured by alternately repeating the first aperture group 1721).

  The lens member 1723 is formed into a flat semi-annular body by a translucent member, and a plurality of drop-like protrusion regions 1725 are provided on the front surface thereof in a plan view with a predetermined interval, and fine protrusions are provided in other regions. Regions 1727 are configured to be interspersed.

  The sheet member 1729 and the light guide lens member 1733 are provided with predetermined opening portions 1731 and 1735 at predetermined positions. The sheet member 1729 is formed of a light-transmitting member having a predetermined color.

  The LED board 1737 includes a predetermined LED 1739 provided at a predetermined position on the front surface of the board formed in a semi-annular body.

  That is, even in the other embodiments of the present invention, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which the appearance of the decorative member 1717 is different between when the LED 1739 is turned off and when it is turned on.

<Sixth movable director>
FIG. 123 to FIG. 128 show an example of the sixth movable effect accessory 1741.
A sixth movable stage effect (direction hall) 1741 is provided in the lower central region of the back box 1055, and moves up and down in the directions of arrows g1 and g2 in FIGS. It is an accessory. In other words, in this embodiment, the initial position 1743 that is provided in the lower central region of the back box 1055 and is usually difficult to visually recognize (for example, in FIG. ) And an appearance position 1745 that is easy to visually recognize when performing a predetermined effect in the game (for example, in FIG. 99, a virtual that protrudes upward in the vertical direction from the stage 1001 in FIG. 99 and is easily visible to the player). The game is going to be interesting by moving to the state indicated by the line.

  More specifically, the decorative member 1747 having a predetermined external shape, the driving means 1755 for moving the decorative member 1747, the decorative member 1747, and the driving means 1755 are provided and rotated from the driving means 1755. A movement mechanism (also referred to as a vertical movement mechanism; hereinafter referred to as a vertical movement mechanism) 1761 configured to move the decoration member 1747 up and down from the initial position 1743 to the appearance position 1745 in response to the operation, and the vertical movement mechanism 1761 After moving 1747 to the appearance position 1745, an end movable mechanism (upper lowering) that moves (lowers downward) only the end region (second decorative member 1751) of the decorative member 1747 by the rotation of the driving means 1755. 1775) (hereinafter also referred to as a mechanism). Is configured to at least include (see FIG. 124).

The decorative member 1747 is formed of an elastically deformable material, such as rubber or soft synthetic resin, and is provided at the upper end of the first decorative member 1749 and the first decorative member 1749 obtained by cutting the cylindrical body in half in the vertical direction. A second decorative member 1751 and a third decorative member 1753 provided at the lower end of the first decorative member 1749 are included (see FIGS. 123 to 128).
In the present embodiment, the first decorative member 1749 is formed of an elastomer resin, and the second decorative member 1751 and the third decorative member 1753 are formed of polycarbonate. The first decorative member 1749 may be made of a soft material, and the second decorative member 1751 and the third decorative member 1753 are not particularly limited, and may be a hard material or a soft material. The design can be changed within the scope of the invention.
It does not have to be made of an elastically deformable material.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first decorative member 1749 is formed to be thin overall, but the region 1749a, which is further thinner than the entire thickness in the substantially central region in the vertical direction, 1749a is provided in two places in the horizontal direction (see FIGS. 123 to 128).

  The drive means (motor) 1755 is used to move forward and backward (vertical movement) of a first link member (also referred to as a cylinder vertical link member, hereinafter simply referred to as a vertical link member) 1763 arranged in the vertical direction. A cam mechanism (motor cam) 1757 for conversion is provided. In the present embodiment, the cam mechanism 1757 is provided with a photosensor 1759 for position detection (see FIGS. 123 to 127).

  The vertical movement mechanism 1761 is also referred to as a vertical link member 1863 connected to the cam mechanism (motor cam) 1757 and a first slider member (also referred to as a cylinder vertical slider member) that is connected to the decorative member 1747 and moves up and down integrally. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “upper and lower slider member”) 1771, and between the upper and lower link member 1763 and the upper and lower slider member 1771, the upper end 1863 b of the upper and lower link member 1766 is connected, and The first arm member (also referred to as a cylindrical upper and lower arm member, hereinafter simply referred to as the upper and lower arm member) 1765 that moves up and down to move the upper and lower slider member 1771 up and down is included (see FIGS. 123 to 128). .

  As described above, one end (lower end) 1863a of the vertical link member 1863 is connected to the motor cam 1757, and the other end (upper end) 1863b is pivotally attached to the vertical arm member 1765.

  The upper and lower arm members 1765 are provided such that one end 1765a is pivotally attached via a shaft member 1769a of a mechanism base member (cylinder mechanism base member) 1769 and the other end 1765b is pivotally attached to the upper and lower slider members 1771.

That is, when the vertical link member 1766 moves up and down, the other end (upper end) 1863b of the vertical link member 1766 is pivotally attached to the vertical arm member 1765. The other end 1765b pivots up and down as a fulcrum.
As a result, the vertical slider member 1771 with the other end 1765b attached thereto can be moved up and down.

  The upper and lower slider members 1771 are formed in a plate shape having a predetermined width, and are integrally connected to the cylinder base member 1773 with a telescopic slider member 1779 described below interposed therebetween, and are pivotally attached to the mechanism base member 1769. Thus, it is arranged to be movable in the vertical direction.

  The upper pulling mechanism 1775 is a second slider member (left and right) that is movable in the horizontal direction indicated by an arrow E1 when a part of the cam mechanism 1757 comes into contact with the upper and lower link member 1863 when it moves forward (up) most. Also referred to as a slider member, hereinafter referred to as a left / right slider member) 1777, an expansion / contraction slider member (cylinder expansion / contraction slider member) 1779 that is connected to the second decoration member (upper region) 1751 of the decoration member 1747 and moves up and down integrally. It is provided between the left and right slider members 1777 and the telescopic slider member 1779, and the telescopic slider member 1779 is moved when the upper and lower link members 1763 move most forward (rise) and the left and right slider members 1777 move in the horizontal direction. Decorative member movable link that retracts (presses downward) Structure is configured to include a (tubular telescopic link mechanism) 1785.

The left and right slider member 1777 penetrates through two slide protrusions 1781 projecting horizontally in front of the mechanism base member 1769 to function as a slide guide, and at one end thereof, one end (lower end) 1789a of the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785. Is pivotally mounted (see FIGS. 123 to 127). The other end has a pressing wall portion 1783 integrally projecting rearward in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction.
The upper and lower link members 1863 are disposed in close proximity to the inner surface side of the pressing wall portion 1783, and the upper and lower link members 1863 that move up and down while rotating by the rotating operation of the motor cam 1757 are in contact with the pressing wall portion 1783. The left and right slider member 1777 slides in the left-right direction by this pressing operation.

The telescopic slider member 1779 is disposed between the tube base member 1773 and the upper and lower slider members 1771, and the upper end 1779 a of the telescopic slider member 1779 is suspended from the upper end portion 1803 connected integrally with the second decorative member 1751. Over the projecting pieces 1803a and 1803a provided and a pair of shaft mounting pieces 1795a and 1795a provided at the upper end of the first link portion 1795 of the front and rear link mechanism 1793, which will be described later, the shafts 1802a and 1803a are axially mounted together. It is attached so that rotation is possible (refer FIG. 125 thru | or 127).
Also, left and right penetrating areas 1801 that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed in the middle area of the telescopic slider member 1779. The left and right penetrating areas 1801 have a second link portion 1797 of the front and rear link mechanism 1793 described later. A shaft portion 1807 spanned across a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a provided at the upper end is inserted with play.
Further, the telescopic slider member 1779 is provided through a vertical longitudinal groove 1779, and a free end 1787a of the second link 1787 constituting the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785 is slid in the longitudinal groove 1779b. It is linked movably.

  The decorative member movable link mechanism 1785 has a first link 1789 and a second link 1787 which are formed in a predetermined crank shape so that their respective ends can be pivoted (reference numeral 1788 in the figure indicates a pivoted portion). The free end 1789a of the first link 1789 is pivotally attached to one end of the left and right slider members 1777, and the free end 1787a of the second link 1787 slides in the longitudinal groove 1779b of the telescopic slider member 1779. Connected as possible. (See FIGS. 123 to 127).

Therefore, when the upper and lower link members 1863 are raised most (FIG. 126), a part of the cam mechanism 1757 comes into contact with the pressing wall portion 1783 of the left and right slider members 1777, and the left and right slider members 1777 are pressed and moved in the horizontal direction (arrows). Horizontally moved in the E1 direction).
When the left / right slider member 1777 is moved horizontally (moved horizontally in the direction of arrow E1), the first link 1789 and the second link 1787 constituting the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785 are attached to the shaft attachment portion 1788 along with the horizontal movement. The first link 1789 moves in the direction of arrow F1 and the second link 1787 moves in the direction of arrow F2. Therefore, the free end 1787a of the second link 1787 causes the lower end of the vertical groove 1779b of the telescopic slider member 1779 to move. 1779c is pushed down slightly, so that the first decoration member 1749 is pushed down slightly by the push-down operation, and is bent at the two thinnest areas 1749a and 1749a, and the decoration member is crushed in the vertical direction. The state can be expressed (see FIG. 127).

  Further, in the present embodiment, an elastic deformation mechanism is provided that causes the drive unit to project a substantially central region of the outer surface of the decorative member 1747 forward, and the elastic deformation mechanism is an upper part of the decorative member 1747 by an upper pulling mechanism 1775. When the region (second decorative member) 1751 is pulled down, the front / rear link mechanism 1793 operates to press the pushing member (decorating member pressing portion) 1799 toward the inner surface of the decorative member 1747. Yes.

The front / rear link mechanism 1793 has a first link portion 1795 formed by projecting a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1795a and 1795a at the upper and lower ends, and a pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a and 1797a provided at the upper and lower ends, respectively. And a pushing member (decorating member pressing portion) 1799 provided between the first link portion 1795 and the second link portion 1797 (see FIGS. 125 to 128).
The extruding member (decorating member pressing portion) 1799 is formed, for example, in a flat plate shape, and has a pair of bearing portions (not shown) protruding in the horizontal direction on the back surface thereof, and the pair of bearing portions and the first link A pair of axially attached pieces 1795a and 1795a at the lower end of the portion 1795 and a pair of axially attached pieces 1797a and 1797a at the upper end of the second link portion 1797 are configured to be swingable by being axially attached via an axial portion 1804. Has been.

  Then, as described above, the pair of shaft attachment pieces 1795a and 1795a at the upper end of the first link portion 1795 are protruded from the upper end portion 1803 integrally connected to the second decorative member 1751, and projecting pieces 1803a and 1803a, Along with the upper end 1779a of the telescopic slider member 1779, it is configured to be pivotably mounted together via a shaft portion 1802, and between the pair of shaft mounting pieces 1797a, 1797a at the lower end of the second link portion 1797, A pair of bearing portions (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the upper and lower slider members 1771 are arranged, and a shaft portion 1807 is bridged between the pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a and 1797a and the pair of bearing portions (not shown). . Further, the shaft portion 1807 is inserted into the long left and right through regions 1801 and 1801 formed in the middle region of the telescopic slider member 1779 with play (see FIGS. 125 to 128).

With this configuration, when the telescopic slider member 1779 is pulled downward in the vertical direction by the decorative member movable link mechanism 1785, the shaft portion 1802 to which the upper end 1779a of the telescopic slider member 1779 is locked is moved downward. Will be reduced.
Then, the front / rear link mechanism 1793 pivotally attached to the shaft portion 1802 is pulled downward, and the pair of shaft attachment pieces 1797a and 1797a at the lower end of the second link portion 1797 project against the back surface of the vertical slider member 1771. Since the shaft is attached to a pair of bearing portions (not shown) provided, the first link portion 1795 and the second link portion 1797 swing forward about the shaft portion 1804. Then, the pushing member 1799 is pushed forward by the swinging motion of the first link portion 1795 and the second link portion 1797, and the decorative member (first decorating member) is pushed by the pushed pushing member 1799. The substantially central region of the member 1749) is pressed so as to protrude forward (see FIG. 128). In addition to simply moving up and down the movable director, such a humorous operation can be unexpectedly given to the player, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is provided in the lower central region of the back box 1055 and is configured to be movable upward in the vertical direction, but is not limited to this, for example, on the side of the back box 1055. It may be provided and configured to be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be provided above the back box 1055 and configured to be movable downward in the vertical direction.
Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a form in which a sixth movable effect actor (director) 1741 is disposed in combination with the fourth movable effect agent 1500 and the fifth effect agent 1589.
In this case, after moving the fourth movable effect agent (one movable effect agent) 1500 to the appearance position 1745, the fifth movable effect agent (other movable effect agents) 1589 is By moving to the appearance position 1745, the fourth movable effect agent (one movable effect agent) is surrounded by 1500 the fifth movable effect agent (other movable effect agents) 1589. At the same time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sixth movable effect combination (direction combination) 1741 by the fifth movable effect combination (other movable effect combination) 1589.
In the present embodiment, the sixth movable directing agent 1741 has been described as an example of this directing agent, but the fourth movable directing agent (one movable directing agent) 1500 is set as the appearance position 1745. In the case of adopting an accessory that moves the fifth movable director (other movable director) 1589 to the appearance position 1745 after being moved, the director is hidden from view from the front. In adopting the form to be displayed, the effect role may be one that protrudes to a position that is always visible without moving.

<Seventh movable production role>
FIGS. 129 to 132 show a seventh movable effect combination 1900 employed in the present embodiment, which is arranged in the lower central region of the back box 1055 in the same manner as the sixth movable effect combination 1741. By moving, an effect by the appearance operation is provided (see FIG. 100).
For example, the seventh movable effect actor 1900 of the present embodiment includes a mechanism base 1901 attached and fixed to the back box 1055, and a vertical slide mechanism 1903 that is held so as to be movable up and down with respect to the mechanism base 1901. (See FIG. 130).
The seventh movable effect combination 1900 is another embodiment arranged in place of the sixth movable effect combination 1741. Note that the sixth movable effect actor 1741 and the seventh movable effect actor 1900 are selectively adopted as one of the movable effect agents of the gaming machine. Depending on the case, the two may be employed together, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.

  The vertical slide mechanism 1903 includes a vertical slide plate 1905 that can be moved in and out and a drive mechanism 1915 that drives the vertical slide plate 1905 (see FIG. 130).

The upper and lower slide plates 1905 include a decorative member (lens part) 1907 formed in a predetermined shape, a light guide lens part 1909 disposed on the back side of the decorative member (lens part) 1907, and the back surface of the light guide lens part 1909. The LED board 1911 provided with a large number of LEDs 1912 facing the light guide lens portion 1909 and the back panel 1913 provided on the back side of the LED board 1911.
The light guide lens portion 1909 is provided with a light guide hole 1910 at a position facing the LED 1912 of the LED substrate 1911. Accordingly, the light from each LED 1912 is applied to the decorative member (lens portion) 1907 from each light guide hole 1910 of the light guide lens portion 1909 to perform a predetermined light emission effect.

  The drive mechanism 1915 includes a drive means (motor) 1917 disposed on a mechanism base 1901, a cam mechanism (motor cam) 1919 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 1917, and one end (lower end) 1921 a attached to the motor cam 1919. A link member 1921 provided in the vertical direction, one end 1923a is pivotally attached to the lower end region 1905a of the upper and lower slide plates 1905, and the other end 1923b is constituted by a vertical operation arm 1923 that is pivotally attached to the mechanism base 1901.

The other end (upper end) 1921 b of the link member 1921 is pivotally attached to a midway portion in the length direction of the vertical movement arm 1923.
A plurality of protrusions 1925, 1925, and 1925 projecting toward the mechanism base 1901 are provided at the lower end region 1905 a of the upper and lower slide plates 1905, and a plurality of vertical slides provided on the mechanism base 1901 are provided. The grooves 1901a and 1901a are slidably locked.

Accordingly, the link member 1921 that moves up and down by the motor cam 1919 moves the up and down slide plate 1905 up and down by moving up and down one end 1923a of the up and down operation arm 1923 that is arranged with the other end 1923b mounted on the mechanism base 1901. it can.
That is, in the seventh movable effect actor 1900 of the present embodiment, since it is arranged in the lower central region of the back box 1055, when it is not movable, the stage of the game board is viewed from the player side. Or various game members or the like, it is located at an initial position 1927 that is difficult to see from the player (see FIGS. 100 and 131). Then, it moves from the back side of the stage or the like to an easily appearing position 1929 (see FIGS. 129 and 132).

  In this embodiment, the cam mechanism 1919 is provided with a photo sensor 1922 to detect the initial position (see FIGS. 130 to 132).

<Eighth movable director>
133 to 135 show an eighth movable director 1950 employed in the present embodiment, which is disposed on the inner surface of the back box 1055 on the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and is located at the center of the gaming machine. It provides an appearance effect by rotating in the direction (see FIGS. 99 to 102).

A mechanism back base 1951 and a mechanism front base 1952 attached to the back box 1055; a drive means (motor) 1953 disposed in an upper region on the front side of the mechanism front base 1952; and a rotation shaft of the drive means (motor) 1953 The cam mechanism (motor cam) 1955 connected between the mechanism back base 1951 and the front mechanism base 1952 is disposed between the mechanism back base 1951 and the mechanism front base 1952, and the cam mechanism (motor cam) ) One end 1957a is axially attached to 1955 (the axially attached portion is indicated by reference numeral 1957c), and the link member 1957 that converts the rotational operation of the motor 1953 into the forward / backward movement in the vertical direction, between the mechanism back base 1951 and the mechanism base 1952 The lower end 1959a side is disposed on the other end 1957b of the link member 1957. Indicated by 957D) is to be configured to include a decorative member 1959 for pivotal movement (see FIGS. 133 through FIG. 135).
133, a member indicated by reference numeral 1962 indicates a harness holder for holding a harness (not shown), reference numeral 1964 indicates a relay board connected to an LED board (not shown), and reference numeral 1954 is attached to the front surface of the pre-mechanism base 1952. A base seal is shown.
One end 1957a of the link member 1957 and the shaft attachment portion 1957c of the motor cam 1955 are slidably guided in a groove 1951b provided in the mechanism back base 1951.
The mechanism back base 1951 and the mechanism front base 1952 are translucent. However, since the base seal is non-translucent, the mechanism back base 1951 and the mechanism front base 1952 are viewed from the front. It is difficult to see the mechanism arranged between the two.

A shaft attachment portion 1957d of the lower end 1959a of the decorative member 1959 and the other end 1957b of the link member 1957 is slidably guided in a groove 1951a provided in the mechanism back base 1951.
A predetermined weight 1961 is integrally provided on the upper end side of the shaft attachment portion 1957d, and the weight 1961 functions as an auxiliary when returning the decorative member 1959 to the initial position (a position difficult to view) 1963. .

  When the motor cam 1955 rotates in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise in FIGS. 134 and 135) and the link member 1957 moves upward, the other end 1957b moves upward. The decorative member 1959 rotates in the clockwise direction around the center, and moves from the initial position 1963 (state shown in FIG. 134) to the easily visible appearance position 1965 (state shown in FIG. 135).

  Further, although not shown in the present embodiment, in the eighth movable stage effect 1950, the decorative member 1959 is formed of a transmissive material, and a predetermined number of LEDs (not shown) are mounted therein. The LED board is arranged, and when the decorative member 1959 is kept at the appearance position 1965 for a predetermined time under a predetermined condition, the decorative member 1959 is caused to emit light and display an effect. In this case, the light emission form may be lighting or blinking.

  When returning to the initial position 1963, if the motor 1953 is rotated in the reverse direction, the link member 1957 moves downward and the other end 1957b moves downward. Accordingly, the decorative member 1959 is centered on the shaft attachment portion. Rotates counterclockwise and moves from the appearance position 1965 to the initial position 1963.

  In this embodiment, the cam mechanism 1955 is provided with a photo sensor 1971 to detect the initial position (see FIGS. 133 to 135).

<Big prize opening>
FIG. 136 is an enlarged schematic view of the special prize opening 1011 provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
The big prize opening 1011 of this embodiment is characterized in that the plunger 1981 is made of brass in the big prize opening 1011 in which the plunger 1981 is operated by the solenoid 1980 to open and close the opening / closing door 1983. In the figure, 1984 indicates a ball passage and 1985 indicates a sensor. The special winning opening 1011 opens and closes the opening / closing door 1983 to allow the game ball to enter the ball passage 198, and the entered game ball is detected by the sensor 1985. That is, in this embodiment, the plunger 1981 is made of brass, so that the magnetic force from the solenoid 1980 does not stay in the plunger 1981, and there is no possibility of causing the malfunction of the open / close door 1983.

<Fourth luminescence production means>
In the present embodiment, a predetermined light emitting decorative member is provided as the fourth light emission effect means 1990 (see FIGS. 99, 101, 102, 129, and 137). In FIG. 99, FIG. 101, FIG. 102, and FIG. 129, it is described that the fourth light emitting effect means 1990 is provided on the front surface of the game board 1, but this is a game that constitutes the present invention. Since the board 1 uses the transparent game board, the fourth light emitting effect means 1990 provided in the back box is seen through the transparent game board.

The fourth light emitting effect unit 1990 includes an opaque member 1991 having a predetermined shape, a half mirror 1993 provided on the back side corresponding to the central window (opening) 1991a of the exterior member 1991, and a half mirror 1993. A sheet member 1995 and 0 imitating a predetermined pattern provided on the back side, a reflector 1997 provided on the back side of the sheet member 1995, and an LED substrate 1999 provided on the back side of the reflector 1997 are configured.
By adopting such a configuration, when the LED substrate 1999 is not emitting light, the half mirror 1993 only makes the window 1991a a mirror surface, but when emitting light, an image imitating the sheet member 1995 is displayed on the half mirror 1993. Since the light is displayed from the window portion 1991a, the interest of the game is improved.
The entire exterior member may be formed of a transmissive material. In this case, a half mirror may be provided over the entire back surface of the exterior member.

<Fifth light emitting means>
In the present embodiment, a predetermined light emitting decoration member is provided as the fifth light emitting effect means 2000 in the side region on the right side of the game board 1 (FIGS. 99, 101, 102, 129, and 138). reference).

The fifth light emitting effect means 2000 is a non-transparent and predetermined-shaped character exterior member 2001, 2002, 2004, and a non-transparent and predetermined-shaped decorative member 2006 and 2008 disposed in the vicinity of the character exterior member 2001 and the like. A half mirror part 2007 provided below the character exterior member 2001, a reflector 2003 provided on the back side of the character exterior member 2001, an LED substrate 2009 provided on the back side of the half mirror part 2007, and a character exterior member 2001. Etc., and a rear decoration member (lens member) 2005 provided on the back side. In the present embodiment, the reflector 2003 is provided with a decorative character “mountain” as a light guide.
By adopting such a configuration, when the LED 2009a included in the LED substrate 2009 is not emitting light, the half mirror portion 2007 is only mirror-like, but when emitting light, the “mountain” decoration of the reflector 2003 is decorated. Since the characters are displayed in a light-emitting manner so as to be visible through the half mirror portion 2007, the interest of the game is improved.
Note that the entire character exterior member 2001 may be formed of a transparent material, and a half mirror may be provided over the entire back surface of the character exterior member.

<Sixth luminous effect means>
In the present embodiment, a light emitting decorative member simulating a predetermined logo is provided in the upper right region toward the game board 1 as the sixth light emitting effect means 2011 (FIGS. 99, 101, 102, and 129). And FIG. 139).

The sixth light emitting effect means 2011 includes a hollow cover member 2013 imitating the outline of a logo, a frame 2015 incorporated in the inner surface of the cover member 2013 and bordering a lens member 2017 described later, and the back surface of the frame 2015 The lens member 2017 that is provided on the side and receives light guided by an inner lens 2019 to be described later to emit light, and the light that is provided on the back side of the lens member 2017 and guided through a spacer 2023 to be described later. An inner lens 2019 that receives and guides light to the front lens member 2017, a spacer 2023 that is provided on the back side of the inner lens 2019, and guides light from a diffusion sheet 2025 described later to the front inner lens 2019; The LED 20 of the LED substrate 2027 which will be described later is provided on the back side of the spacer 2023. A diffusion sheet 2025 is irradiated to the front by diffusing the light from 7a, provided on the back side of the diffusion sheet 2025, and a LED substrate 2027 having a plurality of LED2027a.
According to the sixth light emitting effect means 2011, the LED 2027a of the LED substrate 2027 emits light (lights up / blinks) in a predetermined light emission mode, so that a predetermined logo form can be emitted and displayed from the front via the lens member 2017. Thus, it is possible to appropriately produce a light emission effect in combination with other effects (movable effect character, light emission effect, etc.), and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention.
"Fifth embodiment"

  140 to 190 show a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Schematic configuration of the entire gaming machine>
As shown in FIGS. 41, 42 and 140 to 152, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 1 having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow (the FIGS. 144 and 145 are detachable). A main body frame 2 (refer to FIGS. 142 and 143) provided with a main body frame base plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) provided in the above, and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be seen The front frame 3 is provided with a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base), and is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (player side) (FIGS. 42 and 140) and a rear frame base plate 5a (also referred to as a rear frame base) on which a liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 146) for performing a predetermined effect display is detachably provided. Turned by the main body frame 2 on the anti-player side) And a frame 5 after being supported on the ability (see FIGS. 146 and 147).

  In this case, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6, and in this state, the main body frame 2 is attached to the outside through the main body frame hinge 2 b. The frame 6 is rotatably supported. 41 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame 5 (See FIGS. 146 and 147) are not shown because they are accommodated in the outer frame 6.

<Table frame 3>
The table frame 3 includes a table frame base plate 3a and various table frame components provided in the table frame base plate 3a. The table frame components include a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, and a speaker. 10a and 10b, various decoration members (top decoration 14, right decoration member 15, left decoration member 16) and the like. In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained. Further, in the dish unit 8, respective cover members (an upper dish upper cover 8a, a lower dish cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a through a latching structure which will be described later.

In the front frame 3, a transparent plate unit 7 (also referred to as protective glass) having transparency is provided in the front frame opening 3 h described above.
The transparent plate unit 7 is detachable from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a with respect to the front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3. In the state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and to cover the front surface (front surface) side.

  Further, the front frame 3 is provided with speakers 10a and 10b on both sides of the upper side of the front frame opening 3h. The speakers 10a and 10b are provided with speakers 10a and 10b. It is covered with cover members 11a and 11b provided on the back surface (see FIG. 140). In this case, it is preferable to provide a wiring holding mechanism for holding various wirings 12a and 12b such as a harness and a cord in each cover member 11a and 11b.

  In FIG. 140, as an example of the wiring holding mechanism, a configuration in which holding pieces 13a and 13b are provided to hold the wiring between the cover members 11a and 11b is shown. However, the configuration is limited to this configuration. As other methods, for example, a method of holding the various wires 12a, 12b on the cover members 11a, 11b with an adhesive tape (not shown), or a screw with a washer (not shown) is provided for each cover member. A method of holding the various wires 12a and 12b between the washer and the cover members 11a and 11b by fastening to 11a and 11b can also be applied.

  Further, a decorative member for improving the beauty of the gaming machine is provided on the front surface (front surface) (see FIGS. 41 and 42) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp which will be described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. A right decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) that can be changed, and a left decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

  Further, light emitting means (for example, LEDs) controlled by a sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 147) described later is provided inside the right and left decorative members 15 and 16 (not shown). In this case, when the right and left decorative members 15 and 16 are irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting means (LED), the right and left decorative members 15 and 16 generate, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics. Since this can change the display mode by light, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the table frame 3 below the table frame opening 3h of the table frame base plate 3a, and the plate unit 8 receives rental balls and prize balls. An upper plate 17 for storing and a lower plate 18 provided on the lower side of the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, a game ball overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full are provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p.
On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p that can store a game ball, an upper plate upper cover 8a that is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, An upper plate decoration member for improving the beauty of the upper plate 17 is provided. As an example of the upper plate decoration member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Is bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a through the front side toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

  The front frame base plate 3a has a discharge port 19 (see FIG. 157) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, and a game ball discharged from the discharge port 19 below. The ball passage cover 21a is provided with a supply port 20 (see FIG. 42) for supplying to the tray 18, and the ball passage 21 is formed on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a by connecting the discharge port 19 and the supply port 20. (See FIG. 140). Here, when the ball removal button 22 (see FIG. 41) provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are lowered from the discharge port 19 through the ball passage 21 and the supply port 20. It is sent to the dish 18.

  In the present embodiment, a plated member is used for decoration on the front surface of the gaming machine, and a plated member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c for decorating the front portion of the upper plate 17 (FIG. 41, FIG. 41). FIG. 42). By using this plated member 17b, the decoration effect of the appearance design of the gaming machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the upper plate upper cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for lending a ball, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit device for lending a ball (not shown), and the like during a predetermined game. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player's operation (rotating operation, pressing operation). In addition, although there is no restriction | limiting in particular about the arrangement configuration (position, direction) of the operation unit 9, In the drawing, as an example, the operation unit 9 configured and arranged to protrude from the upper plate upper cover 8a is shown. .

  In addition, about the front frame 3, the part in the left side (namely, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) among the surfaces (front surface) (refer FIG.41 and FIG.42) toward the player side. For example, an unauthorized member (not shown) such as a piano wire is intruded, and an illegal act by the unauthorized member (piano wire) is performed on various configurations constructed on the back side of the front frame 3 on the back side in the vicinity thereof. Can be assumed.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an illegal act, a cover member 25 with a wiring holding function (see FIGS. 140 and 141) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 where the intrusion act by the illegal member is performed. Is provided. The cover member 25 with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion 25a for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion 25b for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and a piano wire or the like, for example The fraud prevention part 25c which prevents intrusion of a fraudulent member is integrated and comprised. According to this, since the single cover member 25 with the wiring holding function having the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering portion, and fraud prevention can be realized, a member for each of these functions is prepared separately. Since it is not necessary, the cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Body frame 2>
The main body frame 2 includes a main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame base plate 2a includes a game board 1, a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like.

  In the main body frame 2, an opening 2h (hereinafter referred to as a main body frame opening) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. ) And on the front surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a (see FIG. 142), the lower right side of the main body frame opening 2h (hereinafter referred to as the lower right surface of the main body frame base plate 2a). Is provided with a launching device 26 for launching a game ball (see FIGS. 41, 42, and 142).

  The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. Is disposed on the lower right side of the front surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back surface side, and includes a drive device 26f for launching a game ball (see FIG. 142).

  A cutout 3p (see FIGS. 41 and 42) for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the table frame 3 described above. ing. In this case, when the above-described front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3, and the above-described dish unit. 8, and in that state, the firing device 26 (panel body 26 a, firing handle 26 b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other (FIG. 41 and FIG. 42).

  The firing handle 26b is rotatably attached to the support portion (accommodating case) 26c, the support portion (accommodating case) 26c, and can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. A storage stop) 26c provided in the storage case 26c for stopping the launching of the game ball (also referred to as detection means) and a support stop (storage case) 26c provided in the storage unit 26c for stopping the switch for ON / OFF operation A button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) and a handle cap 26h disposed so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d are provided (see FIGS. 41, 42, and 142).

  In this case, when the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the driving device 26f is increased or decreased according to the rotation amount (rotation angle), and the upper plate 17 is changed by the driving force at that time. The game balls stored in the game board 1 are launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIGS. 141 and 143). At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the driving device 26f is controlled to stop, whereby the launching of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, in the operation control of the firing handle 26b such as the control based on the detection result of the firing stop switch 26g, the payout / launch control board connected to the main control board 28 (see FIG. 145). 34 (control means). In the figure, 26i is a handle shaft, 26j is a spring member formed by fixing one end 26j-1 to a support portion (accommodating case) 26c and the other end 26j-2 to a handle grip 26d. Since the grip 26d is always urged toward the start time point, the player rotates the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction against the elasticity of the spring member 26j to fire the game ball (FIG. 165). And FIG. 166).

  When the player interrupts the game and releases his / her hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member 26j. At this time, the launch stop button 26e is pushed by a protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d, and the launch of the game ball is stopped.

  Here, as a method of increasing / decreasing the launch intensity of the game ball, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b. It is also known that the power to be supplied to a solenoid (not shown) is changed to increase or decrease the launch intensity of the game ball, but in this embodiment, the turning operation of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is known. A launching spring (not shown) that is linked to the launching spring and a winding (clamping) gear mechanism for the launching spring are used, and the rotation of the lifting gear mechanism depends on the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b. Increasing the strength of the game ball by adjusting the amount to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring. It is made to change.

  More specifically, when the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is turned, the amount of rotation at that time is transmitted to the firing spring via the gear mechanism, and the firing spring is wound up (tightened). As a result, the return force (restoring force) of the firing spring is increased. Thereby, the firing strength of the game ball can be increased. If it is desired to weaken the launch strength of the game ball, the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b can be rotated in the reverse direction to loosen the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the game board 1 employ | adopts the structure attached so that attachment or detachment is possible from the back surface (refer FIG. 142) of the main body frame base board 2a. More specifically, a plurality of fasteners 27a to 27e are rotatably provided on the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a along the periphery of the main body frame opening 2h. The game board 1 is positioned along the main body frame opening 2h while the front surface where the region 1p is configured is opposed to the rear surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, and then the fasteners 27a to 27e are rotated to By engaging a part of the game board 1 with the game board 1, the game board 1 is sandwiched between the fasteners 27a to 27e and the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a. It can be detachably attached to the back surface of the base plate 2a.

  The game board 1 has an opening 1h (hereinafter referred to as a game board opening) provided in the rear frame 5 and capable of visually recognizing a display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display. Is provided on the surface (front surface) of the game board 1 (see FIGS. 142 and 144), and the game area 1p in which the game ball can roll and flow over the area including the game board opening 1h. And the main control board 28 is provided on the back surface of the game board 1 (see FIG. 145) in a state where the game board opening 1h is avoided and accommodated in the case 28k.

  In the present embodiment, an opening decoration frame 29 for decorating the game board opening 1h is provided on the back side of the game board opening 1h. It is configured to be movable and turnable (see FIG. 145). Accordingly, the opening decoration frame 29 is rotated, swung, and swung in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction indicated by the solid line and the two-dot chain line in FIG. 145) according to the state of play of the game. Can be dramatically improved.

  In the game area 1p (see FIGS. 142 and 144), various decorative members are provided so as to surround the game board opening 1h, and a plurality of general winning holes are provided below the game board opening 1h. 30 and various game members such as a start winning opening 31 in which special symbols are variably displayed are provided when a game ball is entered.

  The main control board 28 is connected to the sub control board 33 and the dispensing / launching control board 34 via the relay board 32 (see FIG. 48). The sub-control board 33 and the payout / launch control board 34 are provided on the rear frame 5 (see FIG. 147) described later. In this case, the sub control board 33 controls the display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 described above according to various commands supplied from the main control board 28, the control related to the sound generated from the speakers 10a to 10c, and the right side described above. Various LEDs including the decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 are controlled. In addition, the above-mentioned launching device 26 and a payout device 35 (see FIGS. 147 to 152) for paying out game balls are connected to the payout / launch control board 34.

  Here, the game ball launched from the launching device 26 described above is guided along the guide rail and then flows out to the upper side of the game area 1p. In this case, the guide rail includes an outer rail 36 (see FIGS. 142 and 143) and an inner rail 37 (see FIGS. 142 and 144) disposed to face each other along the inner side of the outer rail 36.

  In the present embodiment, the inner rail 37 is configured integrally with the game board 1 (see FIGS. 142 and 144), and the outer rail 36 is configured separately from the game board 1 and integrated with the main body frame 2. (See FIGS. 142 and 143). Specifically, the outer rail 36 is provided along the main body frame opening 2h of the main body frame base plate 2a, and the gaming board 1 can be attached to and detached from the back surface (see FIG. 45) of the main body frame 2 as described above. In this state, a guide rail in which the inner rails 37 are arranged to face each other along the inner side of the outer rail 36 is configured.

  In this case, it is assumed that the game ball that is launched from the launching device 26 and flows out to the upper side of the game area 1p rolls down while colliding with a plurality of game nails (not shown) or the like, and wins, for example, the general prize opening 30 Then, a signal that detects this is supplied to the main control board 28. At this time, a command for giving out a predetermined number of game balls from the main control board 28 (see FIG. 145) is output to the payout / launch control board 34 (see FIG. 147), and payout / fire control is performed based on the payout command. The substrate 34 (see FIG. 147) controls the payout device 35, so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 35 and supplied to the upper plate 17.

  Further, when the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated by the player during the game, the payout / launch control board 34 drives the drive device according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) and Control to fire the stored game balls.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, conventionally, guide rails (outer rails, inner rails) are integrated with the game board, and when replacing the game board, both the outer rail and the inner rail must be connected. At the same time, it was necessary to replace both the outer and inner rails 36 and 37 at the same time as before when the game board 1 was replaced because the outer rail 36 was configured separately from the game board 1. Therefore, it is only necessary to replace the inner rail 37, so that the replacement operation can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the case where the game board is provided with both outer and inner rails as in the prior art, when the game board is attached to the main body frame, it is extremely important to align with the launching device already attached to the main body frame. Become. At this time, if the positions of the launching device and the guide rail are slightly deviated, the ball jump may become unstable. Therefore, in the case of the conventional gaming machine form, it is designed with sufficient consideration of the relationship between the mounting of the gaming board, the position and angle of the guide rail provided in the gaming board, and the position of the launching device provided in the main body frame. Installation has to be performed, and manufacturing and mounting are troublesome, and there is a risk of increasing costs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, since the outer rail 36 is mounted on the main body frame base plate 2a of the main body frame 2 together with the launching device 26 as described above, the firing device 26 and the guide rail (outer rail 36) are used. Are attached to the same place, and each positioning can be performed easily and accurately. Therefore, the ball jumping becomes very stable, and a very useful action and effect can be achieved without giving stress to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the number of fasteners 27a to 27e that detachably fasten the game board 1 provided on the main body frame base plate 2a is also considered in order to execute the above-described specific effects. That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball frame is stabilized by adopting a form in which the main body frame base plate 2a is provided with the guide rail (outer rail 36) together with the launching device 26. If 1 itself is not firmly attached to the main body frame 2 (main body frame base plate 2a), the position of the guide rail (specifically, the position where the outer rail 36 and the inner rail 37 face each other) is shifted. As a result, it becomes impossible to execute the operations and effects peculiar to the present embodiment, such as ball jump stability. In particular, if the main body frame base plate 2a is distorted or the like, this problem appears remarkably, and the above-mentioned specific effects cannot be achieved.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the fasteners 27 are respectively provided at positions facing the upper and lower four corners of the game board 1 of the main body frame base plate 2a, and the four fasteners 27a to 27d are provided on the back surface of the main body frame base plate 2a. The game board 1 is provided with a single fastener 27e at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a in order to firmly and firmly hold it, and at least fix the lower center of the game board 1 to the main body frame base plate 2a. The inner rail base end region 1 is pressed against the main body frame base plate 2a to be closely fixed. As a result, the position of the guide rail (the facing position of the outer rail 36 on the main body frame 2 and the inner rail 37 on the game board 1) is not shifted, and the characteristic of the present embodiment such as stable ball jumping does not occur. Execution of the effect can be achieved.

  Conventionally, a configuration in which the liquid crystal display device 4 is directly disposed on the back side of the game board 1 is often employed. However, in such a configuration, when the game board 1 is replaced / discarded, the liquid crystal display device 4 is also replaced / discarded together, resulting in an increase in cost. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 1 can be made inexpensive because the game board 1 is disposed on the main body frame 2 and the liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed on the rear frame 5 on the back side thereof. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 4 can be reused.

  Further, the main body frame 2 is provided with a speaker 10c for performing an effect by sound at the center of the lower portion of the main body frame opening 2h. Note that the sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted from the speaker cover 10k (FIG. 41) provided in the part of the dish unit 8 in the front frame 3 (specifically, the part between the upper dish 17 and the lower dish 18). , See FIGS. 42 and 140).

  Here, the back side of the speaker 10c is covered with a cover member 38 provided on the back surface of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 46). In this case, the cover member 38 is covered with various harnesses, cords, and the like. It is preferable to provide a wiring holding mechanism for holding the wiring 39. In FIG. 143, as an example of the wiring holding mechanism, a configuration is shown in which a holding piece 40 is provided to hold the wiring 39 between each cover member 38, but the configuration is limited to this configuration. However, as other methods, for example, a method of holding various wirings 39 on each cover member 38 with an adhesive tape (not shown), or a screw with a washer (not shown) is fastened to each cover member 38. A method of holding the various wirings 39 between the washer and each cover member 38 can also be applied.

  By the way, the main body frame 2 is provided with electrical components (for example, the launching device 26, the main control board 28, the relay board 32, etc.) important for the gaming machine, including the gaming board 1 described above. For this reason, it is required that the main body frame 2 is not easily unlocked from the outer frame 6 (see FIG. 41). Further, the main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b (see FIG. 41), and a main body provided on the upper right side of the panel body 26a of the launching device 26 described above. The main body frame 2 can be opened from the outer frame 6 by inserting and rotating a predetermined opening / closing key (not shown) into the frame opening / closing key hole 41 (see FIGS. 41, 42 and 142).

In this case, for example, an unauthorized instrument (or an unauthorized member) such as a piano wire is inserted into the rear surface of the main body frame 2 from the main body frame opening / closing key hole 41 or the vicinity thereof, and the main body frame opening / closing key hole 41 is disposed behind the main body frame opening / closing key hole 41. An unauthorized act of unlocking the locking device by directly accessing the constructed locking device (not shown) is assumed.
Therefore, in order to prevent the main body frame 2 from being easily opened (that is, the locking device is not easily unlocked), the entire periphery of the locking device on the back surface of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 143) is the cover member 42. Covered by. Thereby, the above-mentioned fraudulent acts can be prevented in advance.

<Rear frame 5>
The rear frame 5 includes a rear frame base plate 5a and various rear frame constituent members provided in the rear frame base plate 5a. The rear frame constituent members include various electric components including the liquid crystal display device 4. Note that the rear frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all members constituting the rear frame 5 are included.

  As shown in FIG. 147, in the rear frame 5, the rear frame base plate 5 a has various electrical components (the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub control board 33, and the sub relay board 43 that transfers signals to the sub control board 33. , A sub-ROM relay board 44 in which a program related to game effects is stored, a power supply board 45 for supplying power, and the like.

  In this case, the rear frame 5 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 4 at a position facing the front frame opening 3h, the main body frame opening 2h, and the game board opening 1h. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 4 is detachably provided on the front surface (front surface) of the rear frame base plate 5a of the rear frame 5 at a position facing the back surface of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 146). . In this case, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 4 is controlled by the sub control board 33 based on the command from the main control board 28. For example, in the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display (LCD) is assumed as the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In the rear frame 5, the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub control board 33, the sub ROM relay board 44, the sub relay board 43, the dispensing / launch control board 34, the power board 45, etc. For example, it is preferable to accommodate the electrical component housing members 4a, 33a, 44a, 43a, 34a, and 45a having predetermined shapes.

In this embodiment, the electrical component housing members 4a, 33a, 44a, 43a, 34a, and 45a are configured to be able to be confirmed internally with a transparent synthetic resin material. The first surface portion 60 that houses various electrical components, And a second surface portion 61 which is the back surface (opposite surface).
Although not particularly illustrated, each electrical component includes a connector, and is electrically connected via a predetermined wiring (for example, an assembled wire in which a plurality of wires are bundled, a so-called harness) 515. The wiring 515 has a connector at one end, and the connector is connected to a connector of a predetermined electrical component.

  In addition, this embodiment is also characterized in that a wiring holding member (also referred to as a harness case) 500 that holds the wiring is provided (see FIGS. 170 to 173).

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44 that constitute the back unit are respectively connected to the second part of the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a that houses the liquid crystal display device 4. Are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction (rear side) 61, and each adopts a form (Board to Board) in which connectors are directly connected to each other. In this embodiment, the sub control board 33, the sub relay board 43, and the sub ROM relay board 44 are covered with a single transparent cover member (not shown) so as to be opened and closed.

In the present embodiment, the electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4 a is configured to be detachable from the rear frame base plate 5 a of the rear frame 5.
The electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a has a pair of insertion pieces (not shown) protruding at one end in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined interval, and a screwing piece 4a-1 that can be screwed to the other end. , 4a-1 project from each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 146). A pair of insertion piece insertion holes (not shown) are provided at predetermined positions on the rear frame base plate 5a, and a pair of female screw portions (not shown) are provided at predetermined positions on the opposite rear frame base plate 5a. Yes. Therefore, when the electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a is attached to the rear frame base plate 5a, each not-shown insertion piece of the electric component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a is inserted into each not-shown insertion piece insertion hole. Then, the screwing pieces 4a-1 and 4a-1 are screwed and fixed to female screw portions (not shown).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the sub control board 33 and the sub control board 33 are mounted on the second surface portion 61 of the liquid crystal bracket (electrical component housing member) 4a for housing the liquid crystal display device 4 by screwing or fitting, for example. A unit configuration in which the relay substrate 43 and the sub ROM relay substrate 44 are integrally provided is adopted, and this unit configuration is changed from the rear frame base plate 5a to the screwing piece 4a-1 of the liquid crystal bracket (electrical component housing member) 4a as described above. The liquid crystal display device 4, the sub-control board 33, the sub-relay board 43, and the sub-ROM relay board 44 can be integrated and easily attached / removed only by attaching / detaching the screws fixing the screws 4a-1. Therefore, a test of the liquid crystal display device 4 (for example, a test of whether or not the liquid crystal display device 4 operates normally) can be easily performed with this unit configuration.

  As a result, not only can the sub control board 33, the sub relay board 43, and the sub ROM relay board 44 be separately replaced independently, but also only different sub ROM relay boards 44 can be used to execute various different effects. It becomes possible. In this case, regarding the sub ROM relay board 44, in order to prevent illegal acts such as falsification and reading (duplication) of the program, it is possible to visually check whether or not the sub ROM relay board 44 is illegally accessed. 46 "(see FIG. 50). “Caulking” means sealing, insulation locking (binding), and the like.

  In addition, on the back surface of the rear frame 5 (see FIG. 147), for example, a ball tank 47 for storing game balls to be paid out as rental balls or prize balls, and a plurality of game balls from the ball tank 47 are continuously provided. A rail unit 48 to be rolled down, a payout device 35 (specifically, covered by a payout device case 49) that can be continued to the lower end of the rail unit 48, and a payout from the payout device 35 A ball payout passage (not shown) for supplying the played game balls to the upper plate 17 is continuously provided.

  In such a configuration, if a game ball launched into the game area 1p wins a general winning opening 30, for example, a signal that detects this is transmitted to the main control board 28. At this time, a command for giving out a predetermined number of game balls from the main control board 28 (see FIG. 145) is output to the payout / launch control board 34 (see FIG. 147), and payout / fire control is performed based on the payout command. By controlling the payout device 35 by the substrate 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out one by one by the payout device 35 among the plurality of game balls rolling down the rail unit 48 from the ball tank 47. It flows down the passage (not shown) and is supplied to the upper plate. In FIG. 147, since the payout device 35 is housed in the payout device case 49, the outline of the payout device is not shown by indicating the housing position with the reference numeral 35.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the game board is detachably provided on the front surface (front frame side) of the main body frame, and the liquid crystal display device is provided on the front surface (main body frame side) of the rear frame. What is provided so that attachment or detachment is possible is known. Therefore, when it is desired to remove both the game board and the liquid crystal display device at the time of maintenance, etc., the following steps have to be performed.

  First, when it is desired to remove the game board from the main body frame, it is necessary to rotate the front frame with respect to the main body frame. When it is desired to remove the liquid crystal display device from the rear frame, the main body frame needs to be rotated with respect to the outer frame, and then the rear frame needs to be rotated with respect to the main body frame. Therefore, the corresponding frame must be rotated at least three times (for example, the main body frame is rotated with respect to the outer frame, and both the front frame and the rear frame are rotated with respect to the main body frame).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game board 1 is detachably provided on the back surface (see FIG. 142) of the main body frame 2, and the liquid crystal display device 4 is opposed to the back surface (back surface) of the main body frame 2. In this position, the game machine 1 and the liquid crystal display device 4 can be removed with one touch (the main body frame 2 and the rear frame) by detachably providing the front surface (front surface) of the rear frame 5 (see FIG. 146). 5), it can be efficiently performed. In addition, as a method of attaching the liquid crystal display device 4, the liquid crystal display device 4 may be detachably provided not only on the front surface (front surface) of the rear frame 5 but also on the rear surface of the rear frame 5.

  The payout device case 49 covering the payout device 35 is rotatably supported at the lower end of the rail unit 48 via a hinge mechanism 50 provided on the upper end side of the payout device 35 and rotates the payout device case 49. Thus, in the state where the dispensing device 35 is exposed (see FIG. 148), the posture at that time can be maintained. Therefore, a first locking piece 49a is provided on the upper end side of the dispensing device case 49, and a second locking piece 48a on which the first locking piece 49a can be locked is provided on the lower end side of the rail unit 48. (See FIGS. 148 and 149).

  In this case, the first locking piece 49a and the second locking piece 48a have such a shape that their parts (tip portions) are hooked to each other. Here, when the dispensing device case 49 is rotated to expose the dispensing device 35, the first locking piece 49a and the second locking piece 48a are hooked to each other. The posture in which the device 35 is exposed is maintained. On the other hand, when the dispensing device case 49 is rotated in the opposite direction, the catch between the first locking piece 49a and the second locking piece 48a is released following this, and the corresponding dispensing The dispensing device 35 can be covered by the device case 49.

  The payout device 35 can be switched between a position where the game ball can be paid out (see FIG. 150) and a position where the game ball can be removed (see FIG. 151). In this case, at the position where the game ball can be paid out, the payout device 35 is in a state where the lower end surface 35a is supported by the detachment mechanism 51, and the upper end surface 35b abuts on the rail unit 48 described above. Yes. The detaching mechanism 51 includes a detachable lever 53 that is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 52. One end of the detachable lever 53 comes into contact with the lower end surface 35a of the payout device 35, whereby the payout device 35 is The upper end surface 35b abuts on the rail unit 48 while being supported by the detaching mechanism 51 (detaching lever 53) (see FIG. 150). As a result, the rail unit 48 (specifically, the ball passage 48a built in the rail unit 48) and the dispensing device 35 communicate with each other, thereby rolling down the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48a). The game ball can be introduced into the payout device 35.

  On the other hand, in the position where the detachment is possible (see FIG. 151), the detachable lever 53 is rotated and one end thereof is avoided from the lower end surface 35a of the dispensing device 35 (that is, the detachable mechanism 51 (the detachable lever 53). ) Is released), and thus the dispensing device 35 can be slid downward. In this case, the payout device 35 can be easily detached from the rear surface of the rear frame 5 by sliding the payout device 35 downward and then pulling it forward.

  By the way, when the payout device 35 is removed, the game ball from the ball tank 47 rolls down on the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48a), so that the game ball is transferred to the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48a). It is assumed that it will flow out and fall. Therefore, in order to eliminate such a problem, a ball drop prevention mechanism 54 (see FIGS. 150 to 152 (a)) is provided on the back surface of the rear frame 5.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the ball drop prevention mechanism 54 is constructed on the lower end side of the rail unit 48 described above, and the ball drop prevention mechanism cover body 48p is detachably attached to the rail unit 48. Is housed inside. In this case, the ball drop prevention mechanism 54 always urges the ball drop prevention main body 55 having a ball stopper 55p protruding toward the ball passage 48a of the rail unit 48 and the ball drop prevention main body 55 toward the ball passage. And a moving means for moving the ball drop prevention main body 55 in a direction away from the ball passage 48a against the urging force of the urging means 56. In the drawing, a compression coil spring is shown as an example of the urging means 56, but an air spring using the elastic force of compressed air may be used instead.

  The moving means includes a lever 57 rotatably supported by the ball drop prevention mechanism cover body 48p, and a front end portion 57a of the lever 57 (specifically, an inclined surface 55s to be described later in the front end portion 57a). The abutting portion 57p) can be abutted and has an inclined surface 55s formed on the ball drop preventing main body 55. The inclined surface 55s is configured to extend along the protruding direction of the ball stopper 55p and form a gradient along a direction away from the ball stopper 55p. Note that the gradient (inclination angle) of the inclined surface 55s is set according to, for example, the shape and size of the ball drop prevention main body 55, and is not particularly limited here. In addition, the lever 57 is pivotally supported by the rail unit 48 at a rotation shaft 58 provided at the base end portion 57 b.

  Further, in order to make the direction in which the ball drop prevention main body 55 is moved by the moving means constant, a guide piece 59 is extended to the end face of the ball drop prevention main body 55, and the guide piece 59 is a rail unit. It can move along a guide groove (not shown) extending to 48. In this case, the extending direction of the guide groove and the guide piece 59 is defined as a direction in which the ball stopper 55p can be inserted into the ball passage 48a of the rail unit 48 or the ball stopper 55p can be escaped from the ball passage 48a. be able to.

  In such a configuration, when the tip 57a is pressed and the lever 57 is rotated, the contact 57p of the tip 57a contacts the inclined surface 55s of the ball drop prevention main body 55, and the contact force at this time is the inclined surface. The component is divided into a component perpendicular to 55s and a component in the inclination direction along the inclined surface 55s. For this reason, if the tip 57a is continuously pressed against the inclined surface 55s and a contact force against the inclined surface 55s is continuously applied, the guide piece 59 moves in one direction along the guide groove. The ball drop prevention main body 55 can be moved in the same direction against the urging force of the urging means 56 (in other words, retracted from the ball passage 48a) (see FIG. 152 (c)). On the other hand, when the pressing force on the lever 57 is released, at the same time, only the urging force of the urging means 56 acts on the ball drop prevention main body 55, and accordingly, the guide piece 59 is moved along the guide groove. By moving in the direction, the ball drop prevention main body 55 can be moved in the same direction (in other words, advanced toward the ball passage 48a) (see FIG. 152 (b)).

  Accordingly, in a state where such a ball drop prevention mechanism is provided in the rail unit 48, when the payout device 35 is at a position where the game ball can be paid out (see FIG. 150), the tip end portion 57a is formed by the upper end surface 35b of the payout device 35. The lever 57 is rotated by being pressed, and as a result, a contact force is applied to the inclined surface 55s of the ball drop prevention main body 55 from the contact portion 57p of the tip end portion 57a. By retreating against the urging force of 56, the ball stopper 55p can escape from the ball passage 48a (see FIGS. 150 and 152 (c)). At this time, the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48 a) and the payout device 35 communicate with each other, so that the game balls rolling down the rail unit 48 (ball passage 48 a) can be introduced into the payout device 35.

  On the other hand, when the payout device 35 is in a detachable position (see FIG. 151), the pressing state of the tip end portion 57a of the lever 57 by the upper end surface 35b of the payout device 35 is released. Only the urging force of the urging means 56 acts on the ball drop prevention main body 55, whereby the ball drop prevention main body 55 moves forward so that the ball stopper portion 55p can enter the ball passage 48a (FIG. 151). FIG. 152 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game ball flows out of the rail unit 48 (ball path 48a) and falls.

<About transparent plate unit>
The transparent plate unit 7 provided in the front frame 3 includes a first transparent plate 100 located on the near side as viewed from the player side when the gaming machine is installed in the island facility, and the first transparent plate 100. The second transparent plate 101 located behind the first transparent plate 100, and the first transparent plate 100 and the first transparent plate 100 with the predetermined space 102 disposed between the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101. The transparent plate holding frame 103 holding the two transparent plates 101 is provided (see FIGS. 153 to 155).
In the present embodiment, the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 employ the same glass plate having a predetermined shape and a predetermined thickness.

The transparent plate holding frame 103 has holding portions 103a and 103a for holding the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 in the front and rear, respectively, and is arranged between the holding portion 103a and the holding portion 103a. The intermediate portion 103b has a plurality of communication holes 104 communicating with a predetermined space 102 formed between the first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 (FIG. 155). .
The first transparent plate 100 and the second transparent plate 101 are integrally fixed to the holding portions 103a and 103a of the transparent plate holding frame 103 through an adhesive, respectively.

The communication holes 104 are a first communication hole 104a and a second communication hole 104b provided at positions facing each other in the vertical direction.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the first communication hole 104a and the second communication hole 104b are provided at the opposite positions of the transparent plate holding frame 103, they pass through the space 102 from the outside of the transparent plate unit 7. Thus, an air flow path that escapes outward is effectively formed (FIGS. 154 and 155).

In addition, the first communication hole 104a and the second communication hole 104b are provided at positions that do not contact the front frame opening (window) 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. In other words, the hole is not blocked by the grounding surface of the opening, and the air flow path is not blocked by this configuration.
In the present embodiment, each of the first communication hole and the second communication hole is formed by a group of three holes.

  Note that the first transparent plate and the second transparent plate are in a state of rolling down of the game ball of the game board 1 provided in the main body frame 2 located at the rear, and various effects (effects movable effect and image effects) Etc.) As long as the material does not impair the visibility of the situation, the material may not be a glass plate, for example, a transparent synthetic resin plate material.

  The communication hole 104 is not limited to the present embodiment in terms of the hole diameter, the number and position of the communication holes, and the optimum specification is adopted in consideration of strength and air permeability.

A plurality of communication holes 104 (104a, 104b) provided in the transparent plate holding frame 103 allows a space 102 between the two transparent plates 100, 101 from one of the communication holes 104 (104a, 104b) and other communication. Since an air flow path through which air flows to the holes 104 (104a, 104b) is secured, moisture in the space can be effectively removed without a desiccant chamber or a desiccant.
Accordingly, there is no risk of increasing the overall size of the transparent plate unit 7, and a high cost can be suppressed because a desiccant is not required.

As a method for attaching the transparent plate unit 7 to the back surface of the front frame 3, for example, the following configuration is adopted in this embodiment (see FIG. 140).
The transparent plate unit 7 is mounted and positioned from the back side of the front frame opening 3h along the transparent plate unit mounting portion 105 provided in the front frame opening 3h, and the lower end surface of the transparent plate unit 7 in this state 7a is placed on a pedestal 108 formed in a region below the assembling portion of the front frame opening 3h, and then the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, that is, the front frame base plate 3a above the front frame opening 3h. A pressing force is applied to the upper end surface of the transparent plate unit 7 (left and right tongue pieces 107 provided on the upper end of the transparent plate holding frame 103) by the fasteners 106 and 106 provided on the back surface of the transparent plate. And fix it. Thereby, the transparent plate unit 7 can be detachably attached to the back surface of the front frame 3 while being sandwiched between the respective fasteners 106 and the pedestal 108.

  The form of the transparent plate unit, that is, the form of the transparent plate and the transparent plate holding frame is not construed as being limited to this embodiment, and the design can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

<About the ball passage cover>
As described above, the lower plate cover 8b of the lower plate 18 constituting the table frame constituting member is attached to the table frame base plate 3a via the locking structure (see FIG. 41).
That is, the lower plate cover 8b includes a locking portion 203 that protrudes in the horizontal direction rearward, and the front frame base plate 3a has a locking hole 204 that can lock the locking portion 203 of the lower plate cover 8b. It is provided penetrating at a predetermined position (see FIGS. 156 and 158).

The locking portion 203 is provided with a thin plate-like main body 203a that protrudes horizontally from the lower plate cover 8b, and a substantially arrowhead-type locking claw that is provided at the tip of the main body 203a and that can be locked to the periphery of the locking hole 204. Part 203b.
Thus, since the lower plate cover 8b is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via the locking structure, it can be detached when the locked state is released.

In the present embodiment, the locking claw portion 203b of the lower plate cover 8b locked in the locking hole 204 in this way cannot be easily removed except when necessary. A holding portion 202 that can hold the locked state is provided.
The holding unit 202 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the discharge port 19 and the supply port 20 provided in the front frame base plate 3a are connected to the supply passage 20 so as to be integrated with the spherical passage cover 21a that forms the spherical passage 21. (See FIGS. 156 and 158).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, the ball passage cover 21a is composed of two members, an upper cover 200 and a lower cover 201, which are detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a.
In the present embodiment, when the lower cover 201 is attached to the front frame base plate 3a, the locking hole 204 is located on the side of the lower cover 201. A holding portion 202 that holds the locking state of the portion 203 and the locking hole 204 is integrally provided, and the holding portion 202 functions as a drop-off prevention portion that prevents the locking claw portion 203b from dropping off ( (See FIG. 156).

  The holding portion 202 is a plate-like member that protrudes in the horizontal direction from the side surface (the right side surface in the drawing) of the lower cover 201, and when the lower cover 201 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position of the front frame base plate 3a, The holding portion 202 is provided so as to cross a predetermined position of the locking hole 204 (see FIGS. 156 and 158). The shape of the holding unit 202 is not limited to the illustrated form.

That is, the latching claw portion 203b is inserted from the front of the front frame base plate 3a in a state where it is pushed down against its elasticity, and its elastic return is returned on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. It is locked to the upper peripheral edge of the locking hole 204 by force.
When the lower cover 201 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position of the front frame base plate 3a, the drop-off prevention portion (holding portion) 202 is engaged with the locking claw portion 203a that is locked to the upper peripheral edge of the locking hole 204. It is located immediately below (see FIGS. 156 and 158).

  Therefore, if the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) connecting the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18 is disposed on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a as usual, the holding portion of the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201). (Falling prevention portion) 202 locks the lower plate cover (table frame constituent member) 8a that is detachably provided on the front frame base plate 3a through a locking structure including the locking portion 203 and the locking hole 204. Can not be inadvertently released, and the ball path cover 21a (lower cover 201) can also be used for functions other than the function as the ball path 21, thereby increasing the usefulness of the ball path cover.

  Moreover, the latching claw 203b of the lower plate cover (table frame constituent member) 8a is configured to be easily detachable so as to be latched by the latching hole 204 of the table frame base plate 3a against its elasticity. While it is easy to attach the lower plate cover (table frame constituent member) 8a, if the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) is attached to the back side of the table frame base plate 3a, the ball passage cover 21a (lower cover 201) is attached. The provided drop prevention part (holding part) 202 suppresses the downward movement of the locking claw part 230b immediately below the locking claw part 203b. Dropout is easily prevented.

Note that the configuration of the holding portion (drop-off preventing portion) that prevents the table frame constituent member from being released is not limited to the present embodiment. That is, the front frame base member 3a is detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a via the locking structure, and the locking portion of the front frame base member is located on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. The structure of the holding portion differs depending on whether the holding portion is locked.
Further, the holding portion (drop-off preventing portion) may be attached so as to prevent the locking claw portion locked to the locking hole as a single unit, but the locking claw portion is locked. If there is a front frame constituent member that is detachably provided on the back side of the front frame base plate 3a in the vicinity of the locking hole, a holding part (falling prevention part) is integrally formed with the front frame constituent member. That's fine.

<About the connector cover>
The left decorative member 16 is a member that makes a decorative effect by light. For example, as shown in FIGS. 41, 42, and 159 to 162, an electronic component (for example, light emitting means, LED: Light Emitting Diode) is used. A left relay substrate (also referred to as a glass left relay substrate) 300 to be mounted, a left light guide lens 302 made of an insulating material that guides light emitted from the light emitting means in a predetermined direction, and guided through the left light guide lens 302. The upper left lens 16b and the left outer lens 16a for diffusing the emitted light are composed of a terminal 301a for electrical connection to the lower end of the left relay substrate 300 via an electrical component and wiring (harness). A connector 301 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plating member 17b is used for an upper plate front decoration (also referred to as a first decorative member) 17c for decorating the upper plate 17 provided on the front surface of the front frame 3, and an end portion of the plating member 17b is The left decorative member (also referred to as second decorative member) 16 is disposed adjacent to the position opposite to the connector 301 of the left relay board 300 (see FIGS. 41, 42, 159, and 160).

Such a plated member 17b has the effect of gracefully decorating the entire gaming machine and enhancing the decoration effect, but the plated member 17b is easily charged with static electricity.
Therefore, when static electricity is discharged directly from the plating member 17b of the upper dish front decoration 17c to the connector 301 (specifically, the terminal 301a) of the left relay board 300 in the immediate vicinity, it is mounted on the left relay board 300. There is a risk of hindering (damaging) electronic components such as LEDs.
That is, the creepage distance (Creepage Distance) between the connector 301 and the factor that discharges static electricity (the plated member 17b of the upper dish front decoration 17c) is short.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, a connector cover (insulator) 303 that covers the connector 301 of the left relay board 300 is provided, and causes of discharging static electricity (plating member 17b of the upper dish front decoration 17c) and the connector 301 (specifically, The creeping distance from the terminal 301a) is increased.

In the present embodiment, the left relay substrate 300 is formed in an approximately same shape as the planar shape, and is disposed on the left relay substrate 300 and is made of an insulator that guides light from the left relay substrate 300 forward. A connector cover 303 that covers the connector 301 of the left relay substrate 300 is formed integrally with a part of the left light guide lens 302 (see FIG. 161).
That is, a predetermined position on the inner surface facing the left light guide lens 302 is recessed in a box shape so as to cover the connector 301 provided so as to protrude below the surface of the left relay substrate 300 (a box on the outer surface). The connector cover 303 (which protrudes in a shape) is integrally formed.
The connector cover 303 may be configured as a separate part from the left light guide lens 302.

FIG. 162 (a) is a schematic view when the creepage distance to the connector 301 (specifically, the terminal 301a) is increased because the connector cover 303 in this embodiment is integrally provided in the left light guide lens 302. 162 (b) shows a schematic view when the creepage distance to the connector 301 is short when the connector cover is not provided. The arrow in each figure shows the flow of static electricity discharged from the first decorative member (plating member 17b).
When the creepage distance is short, static electricity is directly discharged to the connector 301. However, when the left light guide lens 302 that is an insulator integrally provided with the connector cover 303 is provided as in this embodiment, the creepage distance becomes long. Static electricity is not directly discharged to the connector 301 (terminal 301a).

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the decorative member (the left decorative member 16) provided with the control board (the left relay board 300) adjacent to the decorative member (the upper dish front ornament 17c) provided with the plating member 17b. Is provided with the connector cover 303 for taking a creepage distance between the terminal of the connector 301 provided on the control board (the left relay board 300) and the plating member 17b. It is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged directly.

  According to this embodiment, since the connector cover 303 is integrally provided on the left light guide lens 302 made of an insulating material, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being directly discharged to the terminals of the connector 301 without deteriorating the aesthetic appearance. In addition, since the left light guide lens 302 is disposed, the connector cover 303 is also disposed at the same time, so that a dedicated cover for the connector is not separately prepared, and the manufacturing cost and work cost are reduced. Can do.

<About the firing stop button>
The firing stop button 26e in the present embodiment includes, for example, a button part 401 provided on one end side, a pressing part 403 provided on the other end side, and a shaft stopping part 400 provided between the button part 401 and the pressing part 403. Including the operation unit 402 and the shaft member 405 that are integrally disposed on the inner surface of the shaft stopper 400 of the operation unit 402 and project from the inner bottom surface of the support (accommodating case) 26c of the firing handle 26b. And a sliding portion 404 that moves (see FIGS. 163 to 169).

The firing stop button (operation member) 26e is provided with a shaft stop portion 400, which is integrally provided with a sliding portion 404, rotatably provided on the shaft member 405 via a screw 406, and the button portion 401 on one end side supports the support. The pressing portion 403 on the other end side is located below the firing stop switch (also referred to as detection means) 26g (see FIGS. 166 to 169). reference). That is, the button portion 401 is located so as to protrude outward from the firing handle 26b. In FIG. 169, reference numeral 407 denotes a washer interposed between the top surface of the sliding portion 404 and the screw head of the screw 406.
The firing stop button 26e is always urged in the direction in which the pressing unit 403 moves away from the firing stop switch (also referred to as detection means) 26g (a state in which a game ball can be launched). By pressing, the pressing portion 403 comes into contact with a firing stop switch (also referred to as detection means) 26g, and the launch of the game ball is stopped.

  FIG. 166 shows a state in which the pressing unit 403 is in contact with the firing stop switch (also referred to as detecting means) 26g (game ball firing stopped state), and FIG. A state where the unit 403 is separated (a state where a game ball can be launched) is shown.

The sliding portion 404 is formed of a member having excellent sliding performance, for example, a self-lubricating member such as polyacetal POM, polyamide, or polyethylene.
The operation unit 402 is a flame retardant member such as flame retardant V-0 grade, for example, a flame retardant member such as polycarbonate (polycarbonate PC), polystyrene (polystyrene PS), or flame retardant ABS resin (FR-ABS). Is formed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the firing stop button (operation member) 26e is formed of a self-lubricating material only in the sliding portion 404, and the operation portion 402 is formed of a flame retardant member. It is possible to provide a button mechanism that is resistant to a disaster such as a fire while maintaining the operability of the stop button (operation member) 26e.
Therefore, even if the player operates the firing handle 26b while holding a cigarette with fire, even if the player tries to light the firing handle 26b to heal the game, the firing is stopped. Since the operation unit 402 of the button 26e is difficult to ignite, there is little risk of fire and safety is high.

  Although the operation unit 402 and the sliding unit 404 are arranged integrally, this means that the operation unit 402 and the sliding unit 404 need only be arranged so as to perform the same movement. Yes, it does not mean that it is integrally molded. For example, in the case of being united by being separable with an adhesive or the like and in the case of being united so as to be separable such as key connection or fitting, both are assumed, and are not construed as limiting in any way.

<About wiring holding member>
The wiring holding member 500 is connected to an electric component housing member (for example, a liquid crystal display device housing member 4a, a sub control board housing member 33a, a sub ROM relay board housing member 44a, a sub relay board housing member 43a, a pay-out / pay-out device via an attaching / detaching mechanism. The firing control board housing member 34a, the power board board housing member 45a, etc.) are detachably provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device housing member (also referred to as a liquid crystal bracket) 4a that houses the liquid crystal display device 4 is used as an embodiment of an electrical component housing member, and an example of the wiring holding member 500 of the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to the drawings (FIGS. 170 to 173).

For example, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device housing member (electric component housing member) 4a is a first concave portion configured to house an electrical component (liquid crystal display device 4) as shown in FIG. A surface portion (accommodating portion) 60 and a second surface portion (back surface portion) 61 that is a surface (back surface) opposite to the first surface portion 60 are provided.
The second surface portion 61 is formed with a region in which a wiring holding member 500 for holding a predetermined wiring (harness) 515 is provided, and the wiring holding member 500 is provided at a predetermined position in the region. A plurality of insertion holes 509 and a plurality of locking holes 510 constituting an attaching / detaching mechanism are provided together with a plurality of protruding portions 507 and a plurality of locking claws 508 (see FIG. 171).

The electrical component housing member (for example, the liquid crystal display device housing member 4a, the sub control board housing member 33a, the sub ROM relay board housing member 44a, the sub relay board housing member 43a, the dispensing / launching control board housing member 34a, the power board housing member 45a and the like are not particularly limited to the form, but various electrical components (the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub control board 33, the sub relay board 43, the sub ROM relay board 44, the payout / launch control board 34). , A power supply board 45 and the like, and at least a first surface portion 60 having a configuration capable of accommodating the power substrate 45 and a second surface portion 61 on the back side thereof.
It is assumed that the first surface portion 60 accommodates the entire electrical component and a portion that accommodates a portion thereof, both of which are within the scope of the present invention.

  The wiring holding member 500 is detachably provided on the second surface portion 61 of the electric component housing member (for example, the liquid crystal display device housing member 4a) via an attachment / detachment mechanism.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 171 to 173, the wiring holding member 500 has a plate-like upper surface portion 501 and a lower surface portion 502 formed in parallel, and one length of the upper surface portion 501 and the lower surface portion 502 facing each other. It is composed of a plate-like rear surface portion 503 formed integrally over the sides, and is formed in a narrow and long shape having a substantially U-shape when viewed from the side, with the front side and the left and right side surfaces opened respectively. Yes.
Moreover, in this embodiment, it is comprised by the transparent synthetic resin material so that inside confirmation is possible.

  Near the opening edges of the inner surfaces of the upper surface portion 501 and the bottom surface portion 502, substantially right-angled triangular protrusions 504 and 504 with the same position as the base in the vertical direction (direction indicated by L in the figure) face each other. Is formed. In the present embodiment, four pairs of upper and lower pair of protrusions 504 and 504 are provided at equal intervals (see FIGS. 172 and 173).

Opposite protrusions 504 and 504 are so-called point-symmetric. That is, the apexes 504a and 504a and the sides (perpendicular sides) 504b and 504b provided in the horizontal direction at right angles are respectively shifted in the horizontal direction, and the opposite hypotenuses are opposed to each other. A predetermined gap 505 is formed between 504c and 504c (see FIGS. 172 and 173).
The wiring (harness) 515 is incorporated into the wiring (harness) holding space 506 described later through the gap 505.
Wiring in a predetermined space between the projection 504 and the inner surface 503a of the rear surface portion 503 has a gap 505 between the projections 504 and 504 as an insertion port and the left and right open side surfaces as wiring outlets 516 and 516, respectively. A (harness) holding space 506 is formed (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

Further, the thickness of the protrusion 504 (thickness in the depth direction indicated by W in FIG. 171) is not particularly limited, but has a thickness that does not break when the wiring is incorporated and can form the wiring holding space 506. If you do.
Further, the form of the protrusion 504 is not limited as long as the wiring held in the wiring holding space 506 does not easily fall off.
Further, although not shown, instead of the gap (insertion opening) 505 formed between the protrusions 504 and 504, a front surface portion facing the rear surface portion 503 is provided, and the longitudinal direction of the front surface portion (the direction of the left and right side surfaces) It is possible to envisage that a long notch that is notched over) can also be used as an insertion slot.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the attaching / detaching mechanism is provided in the insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 provided in the second surface portion 61 of the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal display housing space 4a), and the wiring holding member 500. The projection 507 can be inserted into the insertion hole 509, and the locking claw 508 is detachably locked to the locking hole 510 (see FIGS. 170 to 173).

The protruding portion 507 is provided upward near the opening edge of the outer surface of the upper surface portion 501, and has a rectangular thickness with a predetermined thickness raised integrally from the upper surface portion 501. , And a locking portion 507b integrally provided at the tip of the standing portion 507a. In the present embodiment, three protrusions are provided at regular intervals in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 500.
In addition, in this embodiment, it is set as the structure which has the latching | locking part 507b as mentioned above, However, The form which does not have this latching | locking part 507b in a protrusion part is also within the scope of the present invention.

The latching claw portion 508 protrudes forward from the rear surface portion 503 with a predetermined length. The horizontal plate portion 508a protrudes integrally from the rear surface portion 503 in an orthogonal manner, and the horizontal plate portion. It is comprised by the nail | claw part 508b integrally provided in the front-end | tip of 508a.
In the present embodiment, a predetermined position of the bottom surface portion 502 is cut out, the horizontal plate portion 508a is disposed in the cut-out region, and the claw portion 508b protrudes forward from the region.
In the present embodiment, a total of two protrusions are provided one by one at positions inside the protrusions 507 and 507 at both ends.

The insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 are respectively provided at predetermined positions on the second surface portion 61 of the electric component housing member.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170, a first region 61a formed at a one step higher position is formed on the second surface portion 61 of the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a. In the region 61a, the sub control board 33, the sub relay board 43, and the sub ROM relay board 44 are arranged in the horizontal direction as a back unit.
The second surface portion 61 is formed with a second region 61b formed in a horizontally narrow shape that is one step lower than the first region 61a and vertically below the first region 61a. In the second region 61b, the insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 are formed at predetermined positions, respectively.

Three insertion holes 509 are formed in a penetrating manner in the horizontal wall portion 511 that is stepped from the first region 61a to the second region 61b.
Two locking holes 510 are formed on the vertical surface 512 that continues downward from the horizontal wall portion 511 in a vertical manner.

The positional relationship between the insertion hole 509 and the locking hole 510 is as follows.
When the distance from the upper surface portion 501 of the wiring holding member 500 to the locking claw portion 508 is A and the distance from the insertion hole 509 to the locking hole 510 is B, the relationship of A> B is satisfied. .
That is, as described above, the wiring holding member 500 is firmly held by the second surface portion 61 of the electrical component housing member (liquid crystal bracket) 4a by configuring so that A> B.
First, in a state where the wiring 515 is held in the wiring holding space 506 of the wiring holding member 500, each protrusion 507 of the wiring holding member 500 is inserted into each insertion hole 509 of the second surface portion 61, and then A Since the relationship is> B, the claw portion 508 b is inserted into the locking hole 510 against the elastic force of the locking claw portion 508. Thereby, the claw part 508b can be firmly latched to the latching hole 510 by the elastic force of the latching claw part 508 after insertion.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of rectangular through holes 513 are provided in the rear surface portion 503 of the wiring holding member 500.
The hole shape and the number of holes of the through hole 513 are not particularly limited, and the position of the through hole 513 is not limited, and the design can be changed within the scope of the present invention. Further, even a form without the through hole 513 is within the scope of the present invention.
Further, in the present embodiment, an arrow 514 indicating the arrangement direction is described on the rear surface portion 503 so that the arrangement direction of the wiring 515 can be seen at a glance. Thereby, even a worker who has little experience does not make a mistake in arrangement.

According to the present embodiment, since the wiring holding member 500 is provided, the wiring 515 can be removed by a simple operation by simply removing the wiring holding member 500 from the electrical component housing member (for example, the liquid crystal bracket 4a) via the attaching / detaching mechanism. It became a thing.
As a result, it is possible to facilitate wiring attachment / detachment work, which has been very troublesome in the conventional wiring and removal. In addition, the maintenance work time can be shortened by facilitating the wiring attaching / detaching work.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the wiring holding member 500 is provided with the through hole 513, the state of the wiring 515 can be easily confirmed through the through hole 513. Further, by providing the through hole 513, a heat dissipation effect can be exhibited.

  The form of the wiring holding member is not limited to this embodiment, and the design can be changed as appropriate according to the form of the second surface portion of the electric component housing member, the arrangement position or arrangement space of the predetermined wiring, etc. It is.

<About the operation unit 9>
As described above, the upper plate upper cover 8a that can be attached to and detached from the front frame 3 changes the display mode of various effects as the player operates (rotates and presses) during a predetermined game. As shown in FIGS. 174 to 182, the operation unit 9 is provided on the base member 600 that is detachably fixed to the upper plate upper cover 8 a as shown in FIGS. 174 to 182. In addition, a rotation operation mechanism 601 that can be operated by being rotated by a player and a pressing operation mechanism 602 that can be operated by being pressed by the player are integrally assembled. In the present embodiment, a configuration is assumed in which the rotation operation mechanism 601 is configured in a hollow ring shape, and a press operation mechanism 602 that forms a ring is interposed in the hollow ring region.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the pressing operation mechanism 602 includes a pressing operation means that allows the player to press and retract with a finger or the like, and an elastic support means that elastically supports the pressing operation means so as to protrude and retract. And a pressing operation state detection unit that detects a pressing operation state of the pressing operation unit (for example, the number of protrusions and protrusions, a protrusion / retraction timing, and the like).

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine having such a pressing operation mechanism 602 (operation unit 9) is provided with an effect execution means, whereby the pressing operation state of the pressing operation means is detected by the pressing operation state detection means. Thus, a predetermined effect can be executed. In this case, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 146), the sub control board 33 (see FIG. 147), or the like can be applied as the effect execution means.

  According to this, for example, assuming that an effect about a “command to press (push down) operation (press a button!)” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the player presses according to the command. When the operation means is pressed (projection operation), based on the press operation (projection operation) at that time, a predetermined effect (for example, “press (projection operation) operation completed) on the liquid crystal display device 4 by the sub-control board 33. Etc.) is performed.

  Here, for example, a compression coil spring 603 can be applied as the elastic support means. According to such a configuration, the elastic support means (compression coil spring) 603 is interposed between the fixed base 604 (fixed on the base member 600) of the rotation operation mechanism 601 described later and the pressing operation means, Accordingly, the pressing operation means can be elastically supported so as to protrude and retract with respect to the base member 600 (fixed base 604) by the elastic force of the elastic support means (compression coil spring 603).

  Moreover, as an example of the pressing operation means, the button decoration board 606 in which the light emitting means 606a (for example, LED) is constructed on the pressing base 605, and the surface decoration member that the player's finger or the like touches during the pressing operation. 607 (a lens 607a, a diffusion sheet 607b, etc.) can be arranged to face each other. According to such a configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) 606a can generate, for example, radiant light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics from the surface decoration member 607. Can be improved. The light emitting means (LED) 606a is controlled by the sub control board 33 (see FIG. 147).

  In this case, the button electrical decoration board 606 on which the light emitting means (LED) 606a is constructed and the surface decoration member 607 (the lens 607a, the diffusion sheet 607b) can be configured as the above-described effect execution means. Depending on the state of the light, the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) 606a is irradiated onto the diffusion sheet 607b, so that the lens 607a generates, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics according to the gaming state. be able to.

  In addition, as an example of the pressing operation state detection unit, a detection piece (also referred to as a detection member) 608 is provided on the press base 605, and a sensor substrate 609 for detecting the detection piece 608 is fixed to the base member 600. Can be configured. In such a configuration, the sensor substrate 609 is provided with a sensor unit 609s that detects a protruding state (for example, the number of protrusions and protrusions, a protrusion / retraction timing, etc.) of the detection piece 608 that protrudes and retracts together with the pressing base 605 (pressing operation means). ing. In this case, when the pressing operation is performed, for example, by detecting the number of protrusions and protrusions and the protrusion timing of the detection piece 608 that comes in and out (projects and retracts) with respect to the sensor unit 609s, It is possible to accurately detect the number of times the player presses the pressing operation means with, for example, a finger or the like, and the timing at which the player performs the protrusion / retraction operation.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176, the rotation operation mechanism 601 is supported on the base member 600, and the rotation operation means that the player can rotate with, for example, a finger, and the rotation that detects the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means. A plurality of spherical members 610 (for example, metal spheres, balls, and the like) that are provided between the operation state detection unit and are rotated between the rotation operation unit and the base member 600 and follow the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit. I have.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine having such a rotation operation mechanism 601 (operation unit 9) is provided with an effect execution means, whereby the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means is detected by the rotation operation state detection means. Thus, a predetermined effect can be executed. In this case, for example, the liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 146), the sub control board 33 (see FIG. 147), or the like can be applied as the effect execution means.

  According to this, for example, assuming a case where an effect about “a command to be rotated (turn the jog dial!)” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the player rotates the rotation operation means according to the command. When operated, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect on “rotation operation completion”) is executed on the liquid crystal display device 4 by the sub-control board 33 based on the rotation operation at that time.

  Here, as an example of the rotation operation means, there is a rotation housing 611 rotatably provided on the base member 600, and translucency that can be rotated by a player's finger, for example (light emitting means described later). Rotating cover 613 (which can transmit light from 612a) and rotating lens 614 interposed between rotating cover 613 and rotating housing 611 can be provided.

  The rotating housing 611, the rotating cover 613, and the rotating lens 614 are configured to be integrally combined with each other, whereby the rotating lens 614 and the rotating housing 611 are rotated together with the rotation operation of the rotating cover 613. Further, the above-described light emitting means 612a (for example, LED or the like) is constructed on the jog dial electrical decoration board 612, and the jog dial electrical decoration board 612 is fixed on the base member 600 while being mounted on the fixed base 604. It has come to be.

  In this case, the jog dial electrical decoration substrate 612, the rotating lens 614, and the rotating cover 613 on which the light emitting means (LED) 612a is constructed can be configured as the above-described effect executing means, and according to the state of the game, By irradiating the rotating lens 614 with light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) 612a, the rotating cover 613 can generate, for example, radiated light or diffused light having excellent aesthetics according to the gaming state.

  In addition, as an example of the rotation operation state detection unit, a sensor piece (also referred to as a detection member) 615 (see FIG. 178) is provided in the rotary housing 611, and a sensor for detecting the detection piece 615 rotating with the rotary housing 611. 616 (see FIG. 177) can be provided on the jog dial electrical decoration substrate 612. The detection piece 615 is provided on the surface 611f of the rotating housing 611 facing the jog dial electrical decoration board 612, is concentric with the rotation center of the rotating housing 611, and has a predetermined interval along the circumferential direction (for example, , At equal intervals).

  On the other hand, two sensors 616 are arranged in the circumferential direction along the position where each detection piece 615 rotating together with the rotating housing 611 can pass on the back surface 612t of the jog dial electrical decoration substrate 612 facing the front surface 611f of the rotating housing 611. The rotation state of the rotation housing 611 (that is, the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means) can be accurately detected by detecting that the detection piece 615 has passed through each sensor 616.

  Note that as an example of a detection method by the sensor 616, each sensor 616 may be configured by arranging a light emitting element 616a and a light receiving element 616b that receives light emitted from the light emitting element 616a to face each other. Accordingly, in each sensor 616, for example, the number of detection pieces 615 that have passed between the light emitting element 616a and the light receiving element 616b, the passage timing, and the like are detected. The rotational speed can be accurately detected.

  In such a rotation operation mechanism 601, a plurality of spherical members 610 are rotatably held one by one on the back surface 611t of the rotation housing 611 (the surface opposite to the surface 611f provided with the detection piece 615). The portions 611h are provided at a predetermined interval (for example, at equal intervals) along the circumferential direction (see FIG. 179). On the other hand, the base member 600 has the above-described surface 600f facing the back surface 611t of the rotary housing 611. A rolling surface 600s on which the spherical member 610 held by the holding portion 611h can roll is provided continuously in an annular shape along the circumferential direction (see FIG. 180).

  As a result, the plurality of spherical members 610 roll along with the base member 600 while being in contact with the back surface 611t of the rotating housing 611 opposite to the surface 611f provided with the detection piece 615. Instead of the holding portion 611h that holds the plurality of spherical members 610 rotatably one by one, a holding portion (not shown) that is continuous in an annular shape along the circumferential direction is configured, and the entire annular holding portion is configured. A plurality of spherical members 610 may be continuously arranged over the entire area. Moreover, about rolling surface 600s, you may make it apply | coat a lubricant here and improve the rolling property of the spherical member 610. FIG.

  As described above, the plurality of spherical members 610 that rotate following the rotation operation of the rotation operation means (the rotation cover 613) are interposed between the rotation operation means (the rotation housing 611) and the base member 600, Compared with the case where the spherical member 610 is not interposed, the rotational operability in the rotational operation means can be dramatically improved. According to this, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation means can be performed smoothly without feeling any sense of incongruity, the player can concentrate only on the game, and as a result, There is no reduction in interest.

  Furthermore, the structure (the back surface 611t on which the spherical member 610 is rotatably contacted) for rotating the rotation operation means smoothly (smoothly) with respect to one member (the rotation housing 611), and the rotation operation state of the rotation operation means. Since the number of parts required for the rotating operation means can be reduced by providing the structure for detecting (the surface 611f provided with the detection piece 615 of the rotating operation state detecting means), the corresponding amount is reduced accordingly. It is possible to reduce the cost of the rotation operation means and to thereby make the rotation operation means compact (space saving).

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the operation unit 9 as described above has a predetermined attachment mechanism in a state where the rotation operation mechanism 601 and the pressing operation mechanism 602 are assembled and integrated on the base member 600. The pachinko gaming machine can be detachably mounted on the pachinko gaming machine, whereby the above-mentioned operating means (pressing operating means, rotating operating means) constituting the operating unit 9 are connected to the pachinko gaming machine. It can be detachably attached to.

  Here, the place where the operation unit 9 is mounted is not particularly limited because it is set according to the purpose of use or usage environment of the pachinko gaming machine including, for example, a part that is easily operated by the player. In FIGS. 181 and 182, as an example, it is assumed that the operation unit 9 is detachably provided on the upper plate upper cover 8 a constituting the table frame 3.

  The attachment mechanism is formed through the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the attachment hole 617 in which the operation unit 9 can be inserted and disposed, and the attachment hole 617 on the back surface (back surface) side of the upper plate upper cover 8a. A pair of mounting bosses 618 provided opposite to both sides of the upper plate upper cover 8a and a pair of mounting bosses 618 provided on both sides of the upper plate upper cover 8a. Fixing means for detachably fixing the operation unit 9 to the upper plate upper cover 8a through a pair of mounting bosses 618 in a state of being inserted and arranged.

  In this case, the pair of mounting bosses 618 is provided with a shaft portion 618a raised from the back surface (back surface) side of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and a head portion provided at the tip of the shaft portion 618a and larger than the shaft portion 618a. 618b. As the mounting boss 618, for example, a general screw can be used as the shaft portion 618a, and a washer that is larger than the shaft portion 618a can be configured as the head portion 618b. Further, the shape, size, etc. of the mounting hole 617 are not particularly limited because they are set according to the shape, size, etc. of the operation unit 9 (pressing operation means, rotation operation means) inserted and arranged here.

  In addition, with regard to the arrangement of the fixing means, for example, the operation unit 9 (press operation means, rotation operation means) described above may be constructed directly, or the operation unit 9 (press operation means, rotation operation means) may be constructed. You may build in the said base member 600 in the state assembled | attached and integrated on the base member 600. FIG. Here, as an example, a case is assumed in which fixing means is constructed on the base member 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 175, 180, and 182, the fixing means is formed so as to penetrate both sides of the operation unit 9 (base member 600), and the operation unit 9 (specifically, the rotation operation means) rotates. A pair of fixing elongated holes 619 that extend in an arc shape along the direction and can be moved to both ends in a state where the shaft portions 618a of the pair of mounting bosses 618 are inserted, and a pair of A head insertion / removal portion 619a formed on one end side of the fixing long hole 619 and capable of inserting / removing the head portions 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618, and on the other end side of the pair of fixing long holes 619 And a head-retaining portion 619b that is formed and cannot be inserted into and removed from the head 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618.

  According to such fixing means, first, the head unit 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 is inserted into the mounting hole 617 from the rotation operating mechanism 601 and the pressing operation mechanism 602 side while the operation unit 9 is inserted into the pair of fixing mechanisms. Inserted into the head insertion / removal part 619a on one end side of the long hole 619 at the same time (see FIG. 182), and in this state, the operation unit 9 (specifically, the base member 600) is rotated in one direction, The shaft portion 618 a of the mounting boss 618 is moved to the other end side of the pair of fixing long holes 619. At this time, the head portions 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 are in a state of being prevented from being detached by the head retaining portions 619b, and as a result, the operation unit 9 (base member 600) is attached to the pair of mounting bosses 618. It can be fixed and secured. As a result, the operation unit 9 is secured to the upper plate upper cover 8a via the pair of mounting bosses 618 in a state where the operation unit 9 is supported by the base member 600 so as to be able to be rotated (pressed).

  On the other hand, in a state in which the operation unit 9 is secured to the pair of mounting bosses 618, the operation unit 9 (specifically, the base member 600) is first rotated in the other direction, so that the pair The shaft portion 618 a of the mounting boss 618 is moved to one end side of the pair of fixing long holes 619. At this time, the heads 618b of the pair of mounting bosses 618 can be inserted and removed via the head insertion / removal portions 619a of the pair of fixing long holes 619. Thereby, the operation unit 9 (base member 600) can be removed from the pair of mounting bosses 618.

  As described above, according to the attachment mechanism using the pair of attachment bosses 618 and the fixing means (fixing long hole 619), the operation of attaching the operation unit 9 (pressing operation means, rotation operation means) to the upper plate upper cover 8a and Removal work can be done easily and in a short time with one touch. In addition, the attachment mechanism does not require any members such as attachment screws that have been required in the past, so that it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine and to attach and remove the operation unit 9 accordingly. The sex can be improved dramatically.

  Further, the plate unit 8 provided on the surface of the front frame 3 (the front frame base plate 3a) has an upper plate component (an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration) so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. In addition to 17c and the upper plate body 17p, there are provided, for example, a decorative member for decorating the upper plate, an upper plate lower cover, and the like (not shown). Since it is fixed from the side, it cannot be removed from the front frame 3 unless the front frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 2. Therefore, when the operation unit 9 is attached / detached to / from the upper plate upper cover 8a, the upper plate upper cover 8a is not removed unless all the upper plate components are removed with the front frame 3 opened. The operation unit 9 cannot be attached or detached. Thereby, the operation unit 9 cannot be easily removed by unauthorized access from the player side.

  Here, as an operation of attaching / detaching the operation unit 9 to / from the upper plate upper cover 8a, for example, after all the upper plate components are removed with the front frame 3 opened, and only the upper plate upper cover 8a is left. The operation unit 9 (the rotation operation mechanism 601 and the pressing operation mechanism 602) may be inserted into the attachment hole 617 from the back side of the upper plate upper cover 8a, or the upper plate upper cover 8a may be attached. Insert from the front surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 (see FIGS. 41 and 42), and fix the insertion tip 8p (see FIGS. 181 and 182) from the back surface (rear surface) side of the front frame 3 (for example, screw fixing) When the operation unit 9 is mounted / removed, the upper plate upper cover 8a is removed together with the upper plate component with the front frame 3 opened, and then the upper plate upper cover 8a is attached to the upper plate upper cover 8a. And above It may be caused to attach and detach the operation unit 9 in the same manner. In addition, you may make it fix a part or all of an upper plate structural member from the surface (front surface) side of the table frame 3. FIG.

<About the presser member of the light guide plate in the right decorative member>
As shown in FIG. 183, the right decorative member 15 (the upper right lens 15a, the right middle lens 15b, and the right panel cover 15c) has a light guide plate 700 that uniformly emits light from the end surface 700t on the inside thereof. A light emitting substrate 702 having a reflector 701 that reflects light, a first light emitting means 702a that emits light toward the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700, and a second light emitting means 702b that emits light toward the reflector 701. The light guide plate 700 is positioned between the light guide plate 700 and the reflector 701 and the light emitting substrate 702 and is brought into contact with the light guide plate 700 so that the end face 700t faces the first light emitting means 702a. A pressing member 703 to be pressed.

  In the right decorative member 15, the light emitting substrate 702 is composed of two substrate members 702-1 and 702-2, and the pressing member 703 is also composed of two pressing members 703-1 and 703-2. In accordance with this, two light guide plates 700 described above are prepared, and these two light guide plates 700 are parallel to the first light emitting means 702a and have their end faces 700t opposed to the first light emitting means 702a. It is arranged in one direction. In such a configuration, each light guide plate 700 is sandwiched between the reflective sheet 704 and the translucent right panel unit, and one of the right stays 705 positioned on the reflective sheet 704 side. It is designed to be supported on the side.

  Specifically, the right panel unit includes a right panel sheet 706, a right panel cover 15c having a predetermined design, and a right side frame 707 covering the right panel cover 15c in order from the light guide plate 700 side. Has been. In such a configuration, by attaching the right side frame 707 to the right stay 705, the reflection sheet 704, each light guide plate 700, the right panel sheet 706, between the right side frame 707 and one side surface of the right stay 705, The right panel cover 15c is housed in a state where the right panel cover 15c is stacked in close contact with each other.

  In this case, when light is irradiated from the first light emitting means 702a to the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700, the light is uniformly spread along the light guide plate 700 and then reflected by the reflection sheet 704. Thus, light is emitted in a planar shape from each light guide plate 700 toward the right panel unit. The planar light passes through the right panel cover 15c from the right panel sheet 706, so that the design applied to the right panel cover 15c can be generated and displayed from the right side frame 707 according to the display mode by light. Therefore, the interest in games can be improved.

  In the right decorative member 15, the reflector 701 described above is supported on the other side surface of the right stay 705 (the surface opposite to the side on which the light guide plate 700 is supported). As a method for supporting the reflector 701 with respect to the right stay 705, for example, an existing method such as adhesion or screwing may be applied. As a result, the upper right lens 15a and the right middle lens 15b can be opposed to each other so as to surround the reflector 701.

  In this case, when the reflector 701 is irradiated with light from the second light emitting means 702b, the light randomly reflected from the reflector 701 passes through the upper right lens 15a and the right middle lens 15b, so that it has excellent aesthetics, for example, radiated light or diffused light. Light and the like can be generated, whereby a display mode by light can be changed, so that interest in games can be improved.

  By the way, when a plurality of LEDs 708 are applied as the first and second light emitting units 702a and 702b, for example, the second light emitting unit 702b has a plurality of LEDs 708 extending over the side surface (surface on the reflector 701 side) of the light emitting substrate 702. In the first light emitting means 702a, it is necessary to align a plurality of LEDs 708 in one direction in order to irradiate light along the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700. In this case, the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 and the plurality of LEDs 708 are required to face each other without deviation.

  Therefore, the right decorative member 15 is provided with a pressing member 703 that positions and fixes each light guide plate 700 and has its end surface 700t opposed to the first light emitting means 702a (that is, a plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction). It has been. In the drawing, as an example of the pressing member 703, a rectangular shape extending along the side surface in the vicinity of the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700 is shown. Any shape can be used as long as it can be positioned in contact with the side surface near the end surface 700t of the optical plate 700.

  According to this, as shown in FIG. 184, the pressing member 703 is brought into contact with the side surface in the vicinity of the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700, and in this state, the attachment portion 703a of the pressing member 703 is fixed to the right stay 705. Thus, the side surface near the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700 is sandwiched between the pressing member 703 and the right stay 705. As a result, the side surface of the light guide plate 700 in the vicinity of the end surface 700t is positioned, and as a result, the end surface 700t can be made to face accurately and without misalignment along the alignment direction of the plurality of LEDs 708.

  In this case, it is preferable that the pressing member 703 protrude beyond the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 so that a part thereof covers the light irradiation path in a state where the press member 703 is in contact with the light guide plate 700. . By doing so, the light emitted from the first light emitting means 702a (the plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction) can be emitted toward the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 without leakage. As for the shape and size of the pressing member 703 to protrude, for example, the size of the gap between the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 and the first light emitting means 702a (a plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction) Since it is set according to the configuration or the like, there is no particular limitation here.

  By the way, the right decorative member 15 is not limited to the above-described one, and may be configured as shown in FIG. 186, for example. In other words, in the right decorative member 15 in FIG. 186, between the one side surface of the right stay 710 and the right side frame 711, in order from the right stay 710 side, the reflective sheet 712, two light guide plates 713 aligned, a predetermined design. The right panel sheet 714 and the right panel cover 715 to which the above are applied are stacked and arranged. Further, the reflector 716 that reflects light, the light guide lens 717, the first light emitting means 718 a that irradiates light toward the end surface 713 t of the light guide plate 713, and the reflector 716 and the light guide. A light emitting substrate 718 having second light emitting means 718b that irradiates light toward the lens 717 is disposed to face the lens 717. In the right decorative member 15, the light guide lens 717 is composed of two lens members 717-1 and 717-2, and the light emitting substrate 718 is also composed of two substrate members 718-1 and 718-2. Yes.

  In such a configuration, when light is emitted from the first light emitting means 718a to the end face 713t of each light guide plate 713, the light is uniformly spread along the light guide plate 713 and then reflected by the reflection sheet 712. Thus, light is emitted from each light guide plate 713 in a planar shape. At this time, the planar light passes through the right panel cover 715 from the right panel sheet 714, so that the design applied to the right panel cover 715 is generated and displayed from the right side frame 711 according to the light display mode.

  Further, when light is irradiated from the second light emitting unit 718b to the reflector 716 and the light guide lens 717, light randomly reflected from the reflector 716 and the light guide lens 717 passes through the right outer lens 719 and the right inner lens 720. For example, it emits radiant light or diffused light that is excellent in aesthetics.

  Here, for example, when a plurality of LEDs 721 are applied as the first and second light emitting units 718a and 718b, the second light emitting unit 718b includes a plurality of light sources over the side surface (surface on the reflector 716 side) of the light emitting substrate 718. The LEDs 721 may be arbitrarily scattered, but in the first light emitting unit 718a, it is necessary to align the plurality of LEDs 721 in one direction so as to irradiate light along the end surface 713t of each light guide plate 713. In this case, it is required that the end surface 713t of each light guide plate 713 and the plurality of LEDs 721 face each other without deviation.

  Therefore, each light guide plate 713 is also positioned and fixed on the right decorative member 15 shown in FIG. 186, and its end surface 713t is opposed to the first light emitting means 718a (that is, a plurality of LEDs 721 aligned in one direction). Although a member is provided, as such a member, a presser member 703 used for the right decorative member 15 shown in FIG. 183 (a presser member composed of two presser members 703-1 and 703-2). Can be reused as is.

  According to this, the pressing member 703 is brought into contact with the side surface in the vicinity of the end surface 713t of the light guide plate 713, and in this state, the attachment portion 703a of the pressing member 703 is fixed to the right stay 710. The side surface in the vicinity of the end surface 713t is sandwiched between the pressing member 703 and the right stay 710. Thereby, the side surface in the vicinity of the end surface 713t of the light guide plate 713 is positioned, and as a result, the end surface 713t can be made to face accurately and without deviation along the alignment direction of the plurality of LEDs 721.

  As described above, according to the pressing member 703 of the right decorative member 15, when the light emission display mode of the right decorative member 15 is changed, even if the shape of the reflector 701 or the configuration of the light emitting substrate 702 is changed, for example, Even if the model of the member 15 itself is changed (see FIGS. 183 and 186), since the presser member 703 that has been used can be reused as it is, an increase in cost required for the change can be suppressed. .

  Further, by projecting a part of the pressing member 703 from the end surface 700t of each light guide plate 700 so as to cover the light irradiation path, from the first light emitting means 702a (a plurality of LEDs 708 aligned in one direction). Since all of the emitted light can be irradiated to the end surface 700t of the light guide plate 700 without omission, an excellent light emitting display mode with high accuracy and good appearance can be realized.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 185, the holding member 703 b that holds the wiring 709 (for example, a cord and a harness) extending over the light emitting substrates 702-1 and 702-2 is provided on the above-described holding member 703-2. It is preferable to provide it. According to this, since it is possible to prevent the wiring 709 extending over the light emitting substrates 702-1 and 702-2 from being scattered, the wiring 709 is entangled with or caught by another member. Can be prevented in advance.
In the above-described embodiment, the pressing member 703, the light emitting substrates 702 and 718, and the light guide lens 717 are assumed to be composed of two members, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the pressing member 703, Each of the light emitting substrates 702 and 718 and the light guide lens 717 may be configured as a single unit, or may be configured by combining three or more members. Further, the holding member 703b may be provided on the pressing member 703-1.

<About Patrol Card>
As shown in FIGS. 187 to 190, the patrol lamp accessory is built in the top decoration 14 provided on the upper side of the front frame opening (FIGS. 41 and 42), and includes a light emitting means 800 for emitting light, A first movable decorative member 801 that has reflection surface portions 801a and 801b that reflect the light, and turns around the light emitting means 800 so that the reflection surface portions 801a and 801b can be displaced forward and backward of the light emission means 800. , The reflecting surface portions 802a and 803a for reflecting light, and at least one of the both sides of the first movable decorative member 801, the first position (see FIG. 186) and the second position (FIG. 188). And a second decorative member 802, 803 that can be displaced to the rear of the light emitting unit 800, and a rear decorative unit provided at the rear of the light emitting unit 800. The reflective surface portion 804a reflects light emitted from the light emitting unit 800. Material 804.

  Here, the light emitting means 800, the first and second movable decorative members 801, 802, 803, and the rear decorative member 804 are configured to be suspended from a top ornament base 805 constructed in the top ornament 14. Has been placed. Further, as the light emitting means 800, for example, a commercially available light bulb or light emitting element (LED or the like) may be applied. Furthermore, the second movable decorative member is provided as a second right movable decorative member 802 and a second left movable decorative member 803 on both sides of the first movable decorative member 801 as an example here. The right side and the left side are defined based on the left-right direction when viewed from the player side.

  In the first movable decorative member 801, the reflection surface portions 801a and 801b described above are provided on the outer reflective member 801t and the inner reflective member 801s that constitute the first movable decorative member 801, respectively. The outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s have a semicircular arc shape so as to partially surround the light emitting means 800, the inner reflecting member 801s is disposed to face the light emitting means 800, and the outer reflecting member 801t Both are fixed to a turntable 806 that rotates concentrically around the light emitting means 800 while being opposed to the outside of the reflecting member 801s.

In this case, the reflection surface portion 801 b described above is provided in a portion of the inner reflection member 801 s that faces the light emitting unit 800 (that is, the inner portion of the first movable decorative member 801), and light emitted from the light emitting unit 800. It is comprised as the inner side reflection surface part 801b which reflects.
On the other hand, the reflection surface portion 801a is provided in a portion of the outer reflection member 801t opposite to the inner reflection member 801s (that is, the outer portion of the first movable decorative member 801), and a light emitting means (LED described later) ) It is configured as an outer reflective surface portion 801a that reflects light emitted from 809 or the like. In addition, it is preferable to give each reflective surface part 801a, 801b, for example, a height difference (step), an unevenness | corrugation, etc. in order to change the direction and angle of reflected light, in order to improve the production effect by light.

  According to this configuration, when the turntable 806 is rotated, the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) can be turned along the periphery of the light emitting unit 800. As a result, each of the reflecting surface portions (the outer reflecting surface portion 801a and the inner reflecting surface portion 801b) can be displaced forward and backward of the light emitting means 800. In this case, when the first movable decorative member 801 is displaced to the front of the light emitting means 800 during the light emission of the light emitting means 800, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is rearward by the inner reflective surface portion 801b of the inner reflective member 801s. After being reflected, it is reflected forward from the reflective surface portion 804a of the rear decorative member 804 and emitted (emitted) from the top decoration 14 to the outside, that is, the player side.

  On the other hand, when the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) is displaced to the rear of the light emitting means 800, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is directly applied from the top decoration 14 to the outside ( A component emitted (emitted) to the player side) and a component reflected forward by the inner reflective surface portion 801b of the inner reflective member 801s and emitted (emitted) to the outside (player side) from the top decoration 14 are polymerized. To do. At this time, the emitted (emitted) light is relatively stronger than the light reflected from the reflecting surface portion 804a of the above-described rear decorative member 804. Therefore, during the light emission of the light emitting means 800, the first movable decorative member. By turning 801, strong light emission and weak light emission can be repeated from the top decoration 14 to the outside (player side) at a predetermined timing.

  One end side of the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 is supported by rotating shafts 807 and 808, and the rotating shafts 807 and 808 are rotated. Thus, it can be displaced to the first position (see FIG. 187) and the second position (see FIG. 188). The second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are provided with reflecting surface portions 802a and 803a on the surfaces (front surfaces) facing the player side, respectively. In addition, it is preferable to give each reflective surface part 802a, 803a, for example, a height difference (level | step difference), an unevenness | corrugation, etc. for changing the direction and angle of reflected light, in order to improve the production effect by light.

  The rear decoration member 804 is fixed in a semicircular arc shape surrounding the rear side of the light emitting means 800, and a reflection surface portion 804 a is provided on the surface (front surface) facing the light emitting means 800. In addition, it is preferable to give the reflective surface portion 804a, for example, a height difference (step) or unevenness to change the direction and angle of the reflected light in order to enhance the effect of light.

  In such a patrol lamp accessory, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the light emission of the light emitting means 800, the turning of the first movable decorative member 801, the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 Movement to position 2 (see FIG. 188) is performed. In addition, as a case where predetermined conditions are satisfied, the case where it transfers to the other game state (for example, reach, jackpot) from the present game state can be assumed.

  Here, in a state where the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are displaced to the second position (see FIG. 188), the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are connected to the rear decorative member 804. The reflective surface portions 802a, 803a, 804a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803 and the rear decorative member 804 form a series of rear reflective surface portions that are continuous with each other. At this time, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 can be reflected from the reflecting surface portions 802a, 803a, and 804a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 and the rear decorative member 804, respectively.

  In this case, when the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) is turned during the light emission of the light emitting means 800, strong light emission and weak light emission from the top decoration 14 to the outside (player side). Is repeated at a predetermined timing, and in conjunction with this, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is reflected from the above-described series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a), so For the (player side), for example, radiant light or diffused light can be generated that is excellent in aesthetics with a high light effect.

  According to this, the light effect by the light emitting means 800 can be related to the first movable decorative member 801 and the second right and left movable decorative members 802, 803, and the second The reflective surface portions 802a, 803a, and 804a of the right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 and the rear decorative member 804 form a series of rear reflective surface portions that are continuous with each other, thereby further enhancing the light effect. Since the display mode can be changed, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, when the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) pivots behind the light emitting means 800, part of the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is blocked by the inner reflecting member 801s. Therefore, the amount of light applied to the series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) is reduced, and thus the amount of reflected light from the series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) is also reduced. By repeating the decrease in synchronization with the turning timing of the first movable decorative member 801, it is possible to further improve (promote) the change in the light display mode in the top ornament 14.

  Further, in the patrol lamp accessory, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the light emission means 800 does not emit light and the first movable decorative member 801 does not turn. At this time, the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflective member 801t and the inner reflective member 801s) is positioned in front of the light emitting means 800, and the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are in the first position. By being positioned (see FIG. 187), the outer reflecting surface portion 801a of the outer reflecting member 801t and the reflecting surface portions 802a and 803a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 form a series of front reflecting surface portions that are continuous with each other. Form.

  In this case, the decorative member is formed by forming a series of front reflective surface portions in which the outer reflective surface portion 801a of the outer reflective member 801t and the reflective surface portions 802a and 803a of the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are continuous with each other. Can be assumed to be non-movable, and then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, light emission from the light-emitting means 800, turning of the first movable decorative member 801, second right and left movable decorative members Since the player can be surprised by the movement to the second position of 802, 803, the production effect can be dramatically improved, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game. Can do.

  Here, in the top ornament 14, a plurality of light emitting means 809 are arranged along the series of front reflective surface portions (801 a, 802 a, 803 a) in the region on the player side of the above series of front reflective surface portions (801 a, 802 a, 803 a). (For example, an LED) is preferably provided. Thereby, in a state where the series of front reflection surface portions (801a, 802a, 803a) are formed (see FIG. 187), the light emission means (LED) 809 emits light, thereby the series of front reflection surface portions (801a, 801, From 802a, 803a) toward the player side, it is possible to generate, for example, radiated light, diffused light, and the like that are excellent in aesthetics with a high light effect.

  In this case, as the light emission timing of each light emitting means (LED) 809, the light emitting means (LED) 809 is in a state where the series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a) described above are formed (see FIG. 188). It is preferable to emit light. As a result, the light from each light emitting means (LED) 809 and the turning of the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflecting member 801t and the inner reflecting member 801s) during the light emission from the light emitting means 800, the outer (game) As the strong light emission and the weak light emission are repeated at a predetermined timing, the light emitted from the light emitting means 800 is linked to the above-described series of rear reflecting surface portions (802a, 803a, 804a). By being reflected, it is possible to generate, for example, radiated light, diffused light, and the like excellent in aesthetics with a high light effect from the top decoration 14 toward the outside (player side).

  By the way, in the top decoration 14, the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflective member 801t, the inner reflective member 801s) is turned, and the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 are moved to the first and second positions. However, since the drive mechanism is set according to the purpose of use and the use environment of the top decoration 14, it is not particularly limited here. FIG. 189 shows an example of a drive mechanism, and the drive mechanism is a first drive mechanism for turning the first movable decorative member 801 (the outer reflection member 801t and the inner reflection member 801s). And a second drive mechanism for moving the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803 to the first and second positions.

  As shown in FIG. 189, the first drive mechanism includes a speed increasing gear 811 connected to a rotation shaft (not shown) of the first motor 810 (see FIGS. 187 and 188), and a first movable decorative member. A driving pulley 812 connected to a turntable 806 (see FIGS. 187 and 188) to which 801 is fixed, and two relay gears 813 and 814 interposed between the speed increasing gear 811 and the driving pulley 812. ing. In this case, the rotational motion of the first motor 810 is transmitted from the speed increasing gear 811 to the driving pulley 812 via the relay gears 813 and 814, and the driving pulley 812 is rotated to be connected to the driving pulley 812. By rotating the turntable 806, the first movable decorative member 801 can be turned.

  On the other hand, the second drive mechanism includes a drive gear 816 coupled to a rotation shaft (not shown) of the second motor 815 (see FIGS. 187 and 188), and rotational movement of the drive gear 816 on the second right side and A rotation device that transmits the rotation to the rotation shafts 807 and 808 of the left movable decoration members 802 and 803, and the rotation device rotates the rotation axes of the second right and left movable decoration members 802 and 803. One is provided near each of 807 and 808, and extends rotatably between the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 that can reciprocate along one direction, and between the right rack 817 and the left rack 818. And a single rotating shaft 819.

  A right gear (not shown) and a left gear (not shown) are formed at a predetermined pitch along the circumferential direction at a portion facing the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 on the rotating shaft 819, and the right rack 817. The left rack 818 includes a first right tooth portion 820 (see FIG. 190) and a first left side that can mesh with the right gear and the left gear, and are formed along one direction (reciprocating direction). Teeth (not shown) are provided. Note that FIG. 190 shows the configuration of the first right tooth portion 820 of the right rack 817, but this configuration is the same for the first left tooth portion of the left rack, and is not shown.

  Further, the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 are provided with a second right tooth portion 817g and a second left tooth portion 818g formed at a predetermined pitch along one direction (reciprocating direction). The tooth portion 817g and the second left tooth portion 818g are connected to the rotation shafts 807 and 808 of the second right and left movable decorative members 802 and 803, respectively, via relay gears 821 and 822, respectively. In this case, connection shafts 823 and 824 that can rotate together with the rotation shafts 807 and 808 are constructed on the rotation shafts 807 and 808, and the above-described relay gears 821 and 822 are connected to the connection gears 823 and 824. Has been. The drive gear 816 is meshed with the second right tooth portion of the right rack.

  In this case, the rotational motion of the second motor 815 is transmitted to the second right tooth portion 817g via the drive gear 816, and the right rack 817 is moved in one direction. The rotating shaft 819 is rotated via a right gear (not shown) meshed with the right tooth portion 820 (see FIG. 190), and the rotational motion at that time is rotated via the left gear (not shown) of the rotating shaft 819. By transmitting to the first left tooth portion (not shown) of the left rack 818 and moving the left rack 818 in one direction, the linear movement of the right rack 817 and the left rack 818 causes each relay gear 821, 822 and each connection gear to be connected. The rotation shafts 807 and 808 are transmitted to the rotation shafts 807 and 808 via the gears 823 and 824, respectively, thereby rotating the rotation shafts 807 and 808. The second right and left movable decorative member 802 and 803 which are supported on 08 can be moved to the first and second positions.

  In each of the configurations of the second embodiment, the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the fifth embodiment described above, the other embodiments may be appropriately incorporated or changed within the scope of the present invention. Any combination of the configurations is possible.

  The present invention can also be used in gaming machines such as general pachinko gaming machines, including pachislot machines of enclosed type, general pachislot gaming machines, slot machines, and roulette machines.

2000 Operation member 2009 First position 2011 Second position 2059 Support member (unit base)
2095 Production component holding member (louver base)
2105 Vibration transmission prevention member (anti-vibration bush)
2113 Directional parts

Claims (3)

An operation member operable by the player;
A support member that displaceably supports the operation member from the first position to the second position;
An effect component holding member that is provided on the support member and holds an effect component for executing a predetermined effect,
The production component holding member is provided to the support member via a vibration transmission preventing member. A decorative member having a first opening that can be inserted and moved when the operating member is displaced from the first position to the second position;
A cover provided on the back side of the decorative member and in communication with the first opening, and having a second opening that can be inserted and moved when the operation member is displaced from the first position to the second position. Including members,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the opening diameter of the second opening of the cover member is smaller than the opening diameter of the first opening of the decorative member.   The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the cover member is formed of a self-lubricating material at least in a peripheral portion of the second opening.

Images